EOS RP
Introduction
Preparation and Basic Operations
Basic Shooting
Creative Zone
Shooting
- Shooting Still Photos
- Recording Movies
Playback
Set-up
Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions
Custom Functions / My Menu
Reference

Canon RP + RF 24-105mm F4-7.1 IS STM User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for RP + RF 24-105mm F4-7.1 IS STM by Canon which is a product in the Digital Cameras category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Canon M50 + EF-M 15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM + EF-M 55-200mm f/4.5-6.3 IS STM Manual

Canon M50 + EF-M 15-45mm f/3.5-6.3 IS STM + EF-M 22mm f/2 STM Manual

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

ENGLISH

Advanced User Guide

zThis manual is for the EOS RP with rmware

version 1.4.0 or later installed.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Introduction

Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following

To avoid shooting problems and accidents, rst read the “Safety Instructions”

(=25–=27) and “Handling Precautions” (=28–=30). Also,

read this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.

Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further

Familiarize Yourself with the Camera

While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they come

out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store this

manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when necessary.

Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability

After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been

properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the images

cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon cannot be held

liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.

Copyrights

recorded with the camera (or music/images with music transferred to the

memory card) for purposes other than personal enjoyment. Also be aware

that certain public performances, exhibitions, etc. may prohibit photography

even for private enjoyment.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Item Check List

Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your

camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.

Camera

(with body cap)

Battery Pack LP-E17

(with protective cover)

Battery Charger

LC-E17E*

Strap

* Battery Charger LC-E17E comes with a power cord.

oThe camera does not come with a memory card (=10), interface cable, or HDMI

cable.

oFor details on the Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals, see the next page.

oIf you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.

oBe careful not to lose any of the above items.

oWhen you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon

website (=4).

oThe Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF les) are for lenses sold individually. Note

that when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the accessories included with the

lens may not match those listed in the Lens Instruction Manual.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Instruction Manuals

The Instruction Manual included with the camera provides

basic instructions for the camera and Wi-Fi functions.

The Advanced User Guide (this PDF le), which provides

complete instructions, can be downloaded from the Canon

website to a computer or other device.

Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals

The Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals for lenses and software

(PDF les) can be downloaded from the Canon website to a computer or

other device.

zDownload site

www.canon.com/icpd

Advanced User Guide

Lens Instruction Manual

Software Instruction Manual

oTo view the PDF les, an Adobe PDF viewing software such as Adobe

Acrobat Reader DC (most recent version recommended) is required.

oAdobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.

oDouble-click the downloaded PDF le to open it.

oTo learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help section

or the like.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Instruction Manuals

Downloading the Advanced User Guide/Instruction Manuals

Using QR Code

The Advanced User Guide and Instruction Manuals for lenses and software

(PDF les) can be downloaded to a smartphone or tablet using the QR

code.

www.canon.com/icpd

oA software app is required to read the QR code.

oSelect your country or region of residence, then download the Advanced User

Guide/Instruction Manuals.

oSelect [5: Manual/software URL] to display the QR code on the camera

screen.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Quick Start Guide

1Insert the battery (=42).

zUpon purchase, charge the battery

to start using (=40).

2Insert the card (=42).

zWith the card’s label facing toward

the back of the camera, insert it into

the card slot.

3Attach the lens (=48).

zAlign the red mount index on the

lens with the red mount index on

the camera to attach the lens.

zMake sure the lens’s focus mode

switch is set to <2> (=48).

4Set the power switch to <1>

(=46).

5Flip out the screen (=45).

zWhen the date/time/zone setting

screen is displayed, see =374.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Quick Start Guide

6Set the Mode dial to <A>

(=68).

zAll the necessary camera settings

will be set automatically.

7Focus on the subject (=54).

z (an AF point) appears over

any face detected.

zPress the shutter button halfway,

and the camera will focus on the

subject.

8Take the picture (=54).

zPress the shutter button completely

to take the picture.

9Review the picture.

zThe image just captured will be

displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the

screen.

zTo display the image again, press

the <x> button (=296).

zTo view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (=296).

zTo delete images, see “Erasing Images” (=314).

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

About This Manual

Icons in this Manual

<6>: Indicates the Main dial.

<5>: Indicates the Quick control dial.

<W><X><Y><Z>: Indicates the corresponding direction on the <V>

cross keys.

<T>: Indicates the lens control ring.

<0>: Indicates the Setting button.

*: Indicates the duration (in * seconds) of the operation

for the button you pressed, as timed after you

release the button.

* In addition to the above, the icons and symbols used on the camera’s buttons and

displayed on the screen are also used in this manual when discussing relevant

operations and functionality.

M (in page titles) : Functions only available in Creative Zone modes

(<t>, <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F> mode) or

for movies recorded with manual exposure.

=*** : Reference page numbers for more information.

: Warning to prevent shooting problems.

: Supplemental information.

: Tips or advice for better shooting.

: Troubleshooting advice.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

About This Manual

Basic Assumptions for Operational Instructions, Sample

Photos

zBefore following any instructions, make sure the power switch is set to

<1> and the Multi-function lock feature is o󰀨 (=46, =58).

zIt is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to

their defaults.

zThe illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the RF24-

105mm F4 L IS USM lens as an example.

zThe sample photos displayed on the camera and used in this manual are

for instructional purposes only.

zIn references to using EF or EF-S lenses, it is assumed that a mount

adapter is used.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Compatible Cards

The following cards can be used with the camera regardless of capacity.

If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another

camera or computer, format the card with this camera (=367).

zSD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards

UHS-II and UHS-I cards supported.

Cards that Can Record Movies

When recording movies, use a high-capacity card with ample performance

(fast enough writing and reading speeds) for the movie recording size. For

details, see =586.

In this manual, “card” refers to SD memory cards, SDHC memory

cards, and SDXC memory cards.

* The camera does not come with a card for recording photos/

movies. Please purchase it separately.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters

Introduction 2

Preparation and Basic Operations 39

Basic Shooting 67

Creative Zone 95

Shooting 109

Playback 293

Set-up 357

Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions 415

Custom Functions / My Menu 523

Reference 553

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Introduction 2

Item Check List ......................................................................................3

Instruction Manuals ................................................................................4

Quick Start Guide ...................................................................................6

About This Manual .................................................................................8

Compatible Cards ................................................................................10

Chapters...............................................................................................11

Contents ...............................................................................................12

Index to Features .................................................................................21

Safety Instructions ...............................................................................25

Handling Precautions ...........................................................................28

Part Names ..........................................................................................31

Preparation and Basic Operations 39

Charging the Battery ............................................................................40

Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card ............................................42

Using the Screen .................................................................................45

Turning on the Power ...........................................................................46

Attaching and Detaching a Lens ..........................................................48

Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses ..........................................50

Using the Viewnder ............................................................................52

Basic Operations ..................................................................................53

Menu Operations and Settings ............................................................60

Touch-Screen Operation ......................................................................64

Quick Control .......................................................................................65

Contents

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Contents

Basic Shooting 67

Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...............................68

Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) ......................................71

Special Scene Mode ............................................................................75

Shooting Portraits ................................................................................77

Shooting Group Photos ........................................................................78

Shooting Landscapes ..........................................................................79

Shooting Moving Subjects ...................................................................80

Photographing Children .......................................................................81

Panning ................................................................................................82

Shooting Close-ups ..............................................................................84

Shooting Food ......................................................................................85

Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ..............................................86

Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld) ......................................................87

Shooting Backlit Scenes ......................................................................88

Shooting Quiet Scenes ........................................................................89

Cautions for the <SCN> Modes ...........................................................90

Creative Zone 95

Program AE ..........................................................................................96

Shutter-Priority AE................................................................................98

Aperture-Priority AE ...........................................................................100

Manual Exposure ...............................................................................102

Flexible-Priority AE .............................................................................104

Long (Bulb) Exposures ......................................................................106

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Contents

Shooting 109

Shooting Still Photos 110

Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting ........................................................ 111

Setting Image Quality ......................................................................... 116

Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio ........................................................... 119

Setting the Image Review Time .........................................................122

Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics ..........123

Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation ....................................128

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) .......................................................129

Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos ...............................................131

Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast ......................................136

Highlight Tone Priority ........................................................................137

Setting the Metering Timer .................................................................138

Exposure Simulation ..........................................................................139

Setting the White Balance ..................................................................140

White Balance Correction ..................................................................145

Setting the Color Space .....................................................................147

Selecting a Picture Style ....................................................................148

Customizing a Picture Style ...............................................................152

Registering a Picture Style .................................................................155

Setting Noise Reduction ....................................................................157

Appending Dust Delete Data .............................................................161

Shooting with the Touch Shutter ........................................................163

Multiple Exposures .............................................................................165

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Contents

HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting ...............................................171

Interval Timer Shooting ......................................................................176

Reducing Flicker ................................................................................179

Selecting the Display Speed for High-Speed Continuous Shooting ..181

Card Reminder ...................................................................................182

Setting Touch & Drag AF ....................................................................183

Selecting the AF Operation ................................................................185

Selecting the AF Method ....................................................................188

Focusing on People’s Eyes ................................................................198

Setting Continuous AF .......................................................................199

Setting Lens Electronic MF ................................................................200

Setting AF-Assist Beam Firing ...........................................................201

Focus Bracketing ...............................................................................202

Selecting the Drive Mode ...................................................................206

Using the Self-Timer .........................................................................209

Selecting the Metering Mode .............................................................211

Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock) ...................................213

Focusing Manually .............................................................................214

Remote Control Shooting ...................................................................217

Using a Remote Switch ......................................................................219

Flash Photography .............................................................................220

Setting the Flash Function .................................................................222

General Notes on Still Photo Shooting ..............................................231

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Contents

Recording Movies 235

Tab Menus: Movie Recording ............................................................236

Recording Movies ..............................................................................239

Recording HDR Movies......................................................................247

Setting the Movie Recording Size ......................................................249

Movie Cropping ..................................................................................256

Setting the Sound Recording .............................................................257

Movie Digital IS ..................................................................................260

Recording Time-lapse Movies ............................................................262

Recording Video Snapshots ...............................................................274

Setting Movie Servo AF .....................................................................280

Other Menu Functions .......................................................................285

General Movie Recording Cautions ...................................................291

Playback 293

Tab Menus: Playback .........................................................................294

Image Playback .................................................................................296

Magnifying Images .............................................................................299

Index Display (Multiple-Image Display) ..............................................300

Playing Back Movies ..........................................................................301

Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ............................................304

Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies or 4K Time-Lapse Movies ..........306

Playback on a TV ...............................................................................308

Protecting Images ..............................................................................310

Rotating Images .................................................................................313

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Contents

Erasing Images ..................................................................................314

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) .....................................................318

Specifying Images for a Photobook ...................................................322

Processing RAW Images with the Camera ........................................325

Applying Your Favorite E󰀨ects (Creative Assist) ................................331

Selecting the Type of RAW Image Processing ..................................333

Editing Video Snapshot Albums .........................................................334

Cropping JPEG Images .....................................................................337

Resizing JPEG Images ......................................................................339

Setting Ratings ...................................................................................340

Slide Show (Auto Playback) ...............................................................343

Filtering Images for Playback .............................................................345

Jump Display (Jumping Through Images) .........................................347

Customizing Playback Information Display ........................................349

Displaying the Highlight Alert .............................................................351

Displaying AF Points ..........................................................................352

Displaying a Grid ................................................................................353

Specifying Initial Image Display When Playback Begins ...................354

Setting the Initial Magnication Ratio and Position ............................355

Set-up 357

Tab Menus: Set-up .............................................................................358

Creating and Selecting a Folder ........................................................361

File Numbering Methods ....................................................................363

Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ......................................366

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Contents

Formatting Memory Cards .................................................................367

Displaying the Shooting Mode Guide .................................................369

Displaying the Feature Guide ............................................................370

Setting Eco Mode ...............................................................................371

Setting Power-Saving Features .........................................................372

Adjusting the Screen Brightness ........................................................373

Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone .............................................374

Setting the Interface Language ..........................................................377

Setting the Video System ...................................................................378

Setting the Touch Control Response..................................................379

Disabling Beeps for Camera Operations ...........................................380

Checking the Battery Information .......................................................381

Sensor Cleaning ................................................................................382

Setting the HDMI Output Resolution ..................................................386

RAW Playback on an HDR TV ...........................................................387

Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting ..........................388

Setting a Priority for Shooting Display Performance ..........................393

Setting the Viewnder Display Format ...............................................393

Setting the Display Mode ...................................................................394

Customizing Shutter Button Functionality for Movie Recording .........395

Help ....................................................................................................396

Setting Wireless Features ..................................................................398

Geotagging Images ............................................................................402

Setting the Multi-Function Lock ..........................................................407

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Contents

Registering Custom Shooting Modes ................................................408

Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings ...................................410

Setting Copyright Information ............................................................411

Checking Other Information ...............................................................413

Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions 415

What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions ....416

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi ..............................................419

Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi ..................................................453

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi .......................................................461

Sending Images to a Web Service .....................................................473

Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points ..................................................488

Reconnecting via Wi-Fi ......................................................................493

Changing or Deleting Connection Settings ........................................496

Clearing Wireless Communication Settings to Default ......................498

View Info Screen ................................................................................499

Responding to Error Messages .........................................................500

Wireless Communication Function Notes ..........................................511

Security ..............................................................................................513

Checking Network Settings ................................................................514

[Wireless communication settings] Screen ...................................515

[Wi-Fi settings] Screen .....................................................................516

Virtual Keyboard Operation ................................................................517

Setting the IP Address Manually ........................................................518

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Status Display ..........................................................520

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Contents

Custom Functions / My Menu 523

Tab Menus: Customization .................................................................524

Setting Custom Functions ..................................................................525

Custom Function Settings ..................................................................526

Clearing Custom Function Settings ...................................................546

Tab Menus: My Menu .........................................................................547

Registering My Menu .........................................................................548

Reference 553

Software Overview .............................................................................554

Importing Images to a Computer .......................................................556

Charging a Battery in the Camera .....................................................558

Using an Extension Grip ....................................................................560

Troubleshooting .................................................................................562

Error Codes ........................................................................................581

Performance Data ..............................................................................582

Information Display ............................................................................591

Index ..................................................................................................605

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index to Features

Power

zCharging the battery (=40)

zBattery level (=47)

zChecking battery information

(=381)

zEco mode (=371)

zPower saving (=372)

Cards

zFormatting (=367)

zReleasing shutter without card

(=182)

zCards compatible with movie

recording (=585)

Lens

zAttaching (=48, =50)

zDetaching (=49, =51)

zReleasing shutter without lens

(=544)

Basic Settings

zLanguage (=377)

zDate/Time/Zone (=374)

zBeeper (=380)

zCopyright information (=411)

zClear all camera settings (=410)

Viewnder

zDioptric adjustment (=52)

zInformation display in viewnder

(=389)

zViewnder vertical display (=390)

zViewnder display format (=393)

Screen

zVari-angle (=45)

zTouch control (=64)

zBrightness (=373)

zDisplay settings (=394)

zElectronic level (=388)

zHelp (=396)

zAF operation (=185)

zAF method (=188)

zAF point selection (=193)

zEye Detection AF (=198)

zContinuous AF (=199)

zTouch & drag AF (=183)

zMF peaking settings (=216)

zManual focusing (=214)

zElectronic manual focus (=200)

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index to Features

Metering

zMetering mode (=211)

Drive

zDrive mode (=206)

zSelf-timer (=209)

zMaximum burst (=118)

Image Recording Settings

zCreating/Selecting a folder

(=361)

zFile numbering (=363)

Image Quality

zImage quality (=116)

zStill photo cropping/aspect ratio

(=119)

zISO speed (still photos) (=131)

zPicture Style (=148)

zWhite balance (=140)

zAuto Lighting Optimizer (=136)

zNoise reduction for high ISO

speeds (=157)

zNoise reduction for long exposures

(=159)

zHighlight tone priority (=137)

zLens aberration correction

(=123)

zReducing icker (=179)

zColor space (=147)

Shooting

zShooting mode (=34)

zHDR mode (=171)

zMultiple exposures (=165)

zBulb timer (=107)

zDepth-of-eld preview (=101)

zRemote switch (=219)

zRemote control (=217)

zQuick Control (=65)

zTouch Shutter (=163)

zMagnied view (=195)

zGrid display (=390)

zShooting information display

(=388)

zDisplay settings (=394)

zMulti-function lock (=58)

zError codes (=581)

Exposure

zExposure compensation (=128)

zExposure compensation with

M+ISO Auto (=103)

zAEB (=129)

zAE lock (=213)

zSafety shift (=529)

zExposure simulation (=139)

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index to Features

Flash

zExternal ash (=220)

zFlash exposure compensation

(=220)

zFE lock (=220)

zFlash function settings (=225)

zFlash Custom Function settings

(=230)

Movie Recording

zAutoexposure recording (=239)

zManual exposure recording

(=241)

zISO speed (movie) (=286)

zMovie Servo AF (=280)

zMovie Servo AF tracking sensitivity

(=282)

zMovie Servo AF speed (=283)

zMovie recording size (=249)

zMovie cropping (=256)

zHDR movie (=247)

zTime-lapse movie (=262)

zVideo snapshot (=274)

zSound recording (=257)

zMicrophone (=258)

zWind lter (=257)

zAttenuator (=258)

zAuto slow shutter (=288)

zAv 1/8-stop increments (=289)

zHDMI output (=290)

zRemote control shooting (=285)

Playback

zImage review time (=122)

zSingle-image display (=296)

zShooting information display

(=597)

zGrid display (=353)

zTouch playback (=298)

zPlayback information display

(=349)

zIndex display (=300)

zImage browsing (Jump display)

(=347)

zSetting image search conditions

(=345)

zMagnied view (=299)

zImage rotation (=313)

zProtect (=310)

zRating (=340)

zMovie playback (=301)

zEditing a movie’s rst and last

scenes (=304)

zFrame Grab (4K) (=306)

zSlide show (=343)

zViewing images on a television

(=308)

zErasing (=314)

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index to Features

Image Editing

zRAW image processing (=325)

zResizing JPEGs (=339)

zCropping JPEGs (=337)

Print Order

zPrint order (DPOF) (=318)

zPhotobook Set-up (=322)

Customization

zCustom Functions (C.Fn) (=524)

zCustomizing operations (=537)

zMy Menu (=548)

zCustom shooting mode (=408)

Sensor Cleaning and Dust Reduction

zSensor cleaning (=382)

zAppending Dust Delete Data

(=161)

zManual sensor cleaning (=384)

Software

zDownloading and Installing

(=554)

zSoftware Instruction Manuals

(=555)

Wireless Features

zConnect to smartphones (=419)

zAuto send images to smartphones

(=439)

zRemote control (EOS Utility)

(=453)

zAuto send images to computers

(=458)

zPrint from Wi-Fi printers (=461)

zUpload to Web services (=473)

zClear wireless settings (=498)

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Safety Instructions

Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely.

Follow these instructions to prevent injury or harm to the operator of the

product or others.

WARNING

Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.

oKeep the product out of the reach of young children.

A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation.

The parts or provided items of cameras or accessories are dangerous if

swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical assistance.

The battery is dangerous if swallowed. If swallowed, seek immediate medical

assistance.

o Use only power sources specied in this instruction manual for use with the product.

oDo not disassemble or modify the product.

oDo not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.

oDo not touch any exposed internal parts.

oStop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as the presence

of smoke or a strange smell.

oDo not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine or paint thinner to clean the

product.

o Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.

oDo not use the product where ammable gases may be present.

This may cause electric shock, explosion or re.

oDo not leave a lens or a camera with a lens attached, exposed without the lens cap

attached.

The lens may concentrate the light and cause re.

oDo not touch the product connected to a power outlet during lightning storms.

This may cause electric shock.

oObserve the following instructions when using commercially available batteries or

provided battery packs.

• Use batteries/battery packs only with their specied product.

• Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to re.

• Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery chargers.

• Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins

or other metal objects.

• Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs.

• When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals with tape or other

means.

This may cause electric shock, explosion or re.

If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your skin or clothing,

ush the exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of eye contact,

ush thoroughly with copious amounts of clean running water and seek

immediate medical assistance.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Safety Instructions

oObserve the following instructions when using a battery charger or AC adapter.

• Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a

dry cloth.

• Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.

• Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet.

• Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact

with metallic pins or other metal objects.

oDo not touch the battery charger or AC adapter connected to a power outlet during

lightning storms.

oDo not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break or modify the

power cord.

oDo not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or shortly after use

when the product is still warm in temperature.

oDo not unplug the product by pulling the power cord.

oDo not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods of time.

oDo not charge batteries/battery packs at temperatures outside the range of 5–40 °C

(41–104 °F).

This may cause electric shock, explosion or re.

oDo not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin for extended

periods of time during use.

This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness and

blistering, even if the product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or similar

equipment is recommended when using the product in hot places and for people

with circulation problems or less sensitive skin.

oFollow any indications to turn o󰀨 the product in places where its use is forbidden.

Not doing so may cause other equipment to malfunction due to the e󰀨ect of

electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Safety Instructions

CAUTION:

Denotes the risk of injury.

oDo not re the ash near the eyes.

It may hurt the eyes.

oDo not look at the screen or through the viewnder for prolonged periods of time.

This may induce symptoms similar to motion sickness. In such a case, stop using

the product immediately and rest for a while before resuming use.

oFlash emits high temperatures when red. Keep ngers, any other part of your body,

and objects away from the ash unit while taking pictures.

This may cause burns or malfunction of the ash.

oDo not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low temperatures.

The product may become extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury when

touched.

oStrap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product

attached on a hook or other object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the

product or expose the product to strong impacts.

oDo not apply strong pressure on the lens or allow an object to hit it.

This may cause injury or damage to the product.

oOnly mount the product on a tripod that is su󰀩ciently sturdy.

oDo not carry the product when it is mounted on a tripod.

This may cause injury or may result in an accident.

oDo not touch any parts inside the product.

This may cause injury.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Handling Precautions

Camera Care

zThis camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to

physical shock.

zThe camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.

zTo maximize the camera’s dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal

cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers

rmly closed.

zThis camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to help

prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from getting

inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt from getting

inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt, dust, water, or salt to get

on the camera.

zIf water gets on the camera, wipe it o󰀨 with a dry and clean cloth. If dirt,

dust, or salt gets on the camera, wipe it o󰀨 with a clean, well-wrung wet

cloth.

zUsing the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may

cause a malfunction.

zCleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust, water,

or salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.

zIf you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that

moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly

consult the nearest Canon Service Center.

zNever leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic eld

such as a magnet or electric motor. Also, avoid using or leaving the

camera near anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large

antenna. Strong magnetic elds can cause camera malfunction or destroy

image data.

zDo not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct

sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.

zThe camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to

disassemble the camera yourself.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Handling Precautions

zDo not block shutter curtain operation with your nger or other objects.

Doing so may cause a malfunction.

zUse only a commercially available blower to blow away dust when it

adheres to the lens, viewnder, etc. Do not use cleaners that contain

organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take

the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center.

zDo not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your ngers. This is

to prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause

camera malfunction.

zIf the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,

condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent

condensation, rst put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust

to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.

zIf condensation forms on the camera, to avoid damage, do not use the

camera or remove the lens, card, or battery.

Turn the camera o󰀨 and wait until the moisture has fully evaporated

before resuming use.

Even after the camera is completely dry, if it is still internally cold, do not

remove the lens, card, or battery until the camera has adjusted to the

ambient temperature.

zIf the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery

and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while

the camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a

while to check that the camera is still working.

zAvoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust

and corrosion such as in a chemical lab.

zIf the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its

functions before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time

or if there is an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have

the camera checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the

camera yourself and make sure it is working properly.

zThe camera may become hot after repeated continuous shooting or still

photo/movie shooting over an extended period. This is not a malfunction.

zIf there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting

may occur.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Handling Precautions

Screen and Viewnder

zAlthough the screen and viewnder are manufactured with very high

precision technology with over 99.99% e󰀨ective pixels, 0.01% or fewer

of the pixels may be dead, and there may also be spots of black, red,

or other colors. This is not a malfunction. They do not a󰀨ect the images

recorded.

zIf the screen is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur

where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only

temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few

days.

zThe screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or

may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room

temperature.

Cards

To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:

zDo not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,

physical shock, or vibration.

zDo not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your ngers or anything

metallic.

zDo not a󰀩x any stickers, etc. on the card.

zDo not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic

eld, such as a television, speakers, or magnets. Also avoid places prone

to having static electricity.

zDo not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.

zStore the card in a case.

zDo not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.

Lens

zAfter detaching the lens from the camera, put down

the lens with the rear end up and attach the rear lens

cap to avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical

contacts (1).

(1)

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Part Names

(17)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(18)

(19)

(5)

(6)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(1) <V> Focal plane mark

(2) <6> Main dial

(3) Multi-function button

(4) Shutter button

(5) Movie shooting button

(6) AF-assist beam/Self-timer/

Remote control lamp

(7) Grip (Battery compartment)

(8) Contacts

(9) Lens mount

(10) Flash sync contacts

(11) Hot shoe

(12) RF lens mount index

(13) Power switch

(14) Strap mount

(15) Microphone

(16) Image sensor

(17) Lens release button

(18) Lens lock pin

(19) Body cap

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Part Names

(3)

(4)

(11)

(13)

(5)

(7)

(6)

(8)

(10)

(9)

(12)

(14)

(16)

(18)

(15)

(17)

(2)

(1)

(1) Eyecup

(2) Viewnder eyepiece

(3) Dioptric adjustment knob

(4) Terminal cover

(5) Mode dial

(6) <5> Quick control dial

(7) <R> Multi-function lock switch

(8) AF start button

(9) Viewnder sensor

(10) Info button

(11) Access lamp

(12) <Q/0> Quick Control/Setting

button

(13) <M> Menu button

(14) <F> Remote control terminal

(15) <D> HDMI mini OUT

terminal

(16) <Y> External microphone IN

terminal

(17) <g> Digital terminal

(18) <n> Headphone terminal

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Part Names

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(9)

(1) Accessory positioning hole

(2) Screen

(3) Tripod socket

(4) <W><X><Y><Z>: <V> cross

keys

(5) Serial number

(6) Accessory positioning hole

(7) Speaker

(8) <A> AE lock/FE lock button

(9) <S/u> AF point/Index/Magnify/

Reduce button

(10) Strap mount

(11) Card slot

(12) Battery compartment

(13) Card slot/Battery compartment

cover lock

(14) Card slot/Battery compartment

cover

(15) <L> Erase button

(16) <x> Playback button

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Part Names

Mode Dial

The Mode dial includes Basic Zone modes, Creative Zone modes, and

movie recording mode.

(1)

(1) Basic Zone

All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to suit the

subject or scene for shooting.

A : Scene Intelligent Auto (=68)

8 : Special scene (=75)

2Portrait (=77) 4Close-up (=84)

qGroup Photo (=78) PFood (=85)

3Landscape (=79) 6Night Portrait (=86)

5Sports (=80) FHandheld Night Scene (=87)

CKids (=81) GHDR Backlight Control (=88)

rPanning (=82) ISilent Mode (=89)

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Part Names

(2)

(3)

(4)

(2) Creative Zone

These modes give you more control for shooting various subjects as

desired.

tFlexible-priority AE (=104)

dProgram AE (=96)

sShutter-priority AE (=98)

fAperture-priority AE (=100)

aManual exposure (=102)

FBulb (=106)

(3) Custom shooting modes

You can assign <t>, <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F>, AF operation,

menu functions, and more to <w>, <x>, or <y> (=408).

(4) k: Movie recording (=239)

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Part Names

Viewnder Information Display

Information displayed varies depending on

camera status.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Part Names

Battery Charger LC-E17E

Charger for Battery Pack LP-E17 (=40).

(4)

(5)

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1) Battery pack slot

(2) Full-charge lamp

(3) Charge lamp

(4) Power cord

(5) Power cord socket

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Part Names

Attaching the Strap

Pass the end of the strap through the

camera’s strap mount eyelet from the bottom.

Then pass it through the strap’s buckle as

shown in the illustration. Pull the strap to take

up any slack and make sure the strap will not

loosen from the buckle.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Preparation and Basic

Operations

This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting

and the basic camera operations.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Charging the Battery

Detach the protective cover

provided with the battery.

Fully insert the battery in the

charger.

zDo the opposite to remove the battery.

Recharge the battery.

zConnect the power cord to the charger

and insert the plug into a power outlet.

gRecharging starts automatically and the

charge lamp (1) lights up in orange.

gWhen the battery is fully recharged, the

full-charge lamp (2) will light up in green.

zIt takes approx. 2 hr. to fully charge

a completely exhausted battery at

room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The

time required to charge the battery will

vary greatly depending on the ambient

temperature and the battery’s remaining

capacity.

zFor safety reasons, charging in low

temperatures (5–10°C / 41–50°F) will

take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Charging the Battery

zUpon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.

Charge the battery before use.

zCharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be

used.

Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its

capacity.

zAfter charging the battery, remove it and disconnect the

charger from the power outlet.

zWhen not using the camera, remove the battery.

If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount

of power current will keep being released, resulting in excess discharge

and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover

attached. Storing the battery when it is fully charged may lower the

battery performance.

zThe battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.

The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz

power source. If necessary, attach a commercially available plug adapter

for the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage

transformer to the battery charger. Doing so may damage the battery

charger.

zIf the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after having

been fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its

service life.

Check the battery’s recharge performance (=381) and purchase a new

battery.

oAfter disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for

approx. 5 sec.

oThe provided charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-

E17.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card

Insert a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17 into the camera. The camera

can use SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory cards (sold separately). UHS-II/

UHS-I SDHC and SDXC cards are also supported. The captured images

are recorded onto the card.

oMake sure the card’s write-protect switch (1) is set upward to enable

writing and erasing.

Insertion

(1)

Slide the card slot/battery

compartment cover lock and open

the cover.

Insert the battery.

zInsert the end with the electrical

contacts.

zInsert the battery until it locks in place.

Insert the card.

zInsert the card with the label facing the

back of the camera as shown until it

clicks in place.

Close the cover.

zPress the cover until it snaps shut.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card

oYou cannot use batteries other than the Battery Pack LP-E17.

oAfter opening the card slot/battery compartment cover, be careful not to swing

it back any further. Otherwise, the hinge may break.

Removal

(1)

Open the card slot/battery

compartment cover.

zSet the power switch to <2>.

zCheck that the access lamp (1) is o󰀨,

then open the cover.

zIf [Saving...] is displayed on the screen,

close the cover.

Remove the battery.

zPress the battery lock lever as shown by

the arrow and remove the battery.

zTo prevent short-circuits, always attach

the included protective cover (=40)

to the battery.

Remove the card.

zGently push in the card, then let it go to

eject.

zPull the card straight out.

Close the cover.

zPress the cover until it snaps shut.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Inserting/Removing the Battery and Card

Formatting the Card

If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera

or computer, format the card with this camera (=367).

oThe number of possible shots varies depending on the remaining capacity of

the card, the settings of image quality, ISO speed, etc.

oSetting [z: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent you from

forgetting to insert a card (=182).

oWhen the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are

being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being

transferred. Do not open the card slot/battery cover compartment. Also,

never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking.

Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.

• Removing the card.

• Removing the battery.

• Shaking or striking the camera.

• Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power outlet

accessories (sold separately) are used).

oIf the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not start

from 0001 (=363).

oIf a card-related error message is displayed on the screen, remove and

reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a di󰀨erent card.

If you can transfer images on the card to a computer, transfer all the images

and then format the card with the camera (=367). The card may then return

to normal.

oDo not touch the card’s contacts with your ngers or metal objects. Do not

expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the contacts,

contact failure may result.

oMultimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used. (Card error will be displayed.)

oUse of UHS-II microSDHC/SDXC cards with a microSD to SD adapter is not

recommended. When using UHS-II cards, use SDHC/SDXC cards.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Using the Screen

You can change the direction and angle of the screen.

Flip out the screen.

zHold at the top and bottom and pull out

as shown.

175°

180°

90°

Rotate the screen.

zWhen the screen is swung out, you can

rotate it up, down, or over 180° to face

the subject.

zThe indicated angle is only approximate.

Face it toward you.

zNormally, use the camera with the

screen facing you.

oBe careful not to forcefully rotate the screen, putting much power on the

rotating axis (hinge).

oWhen a cable is connected to a camera terminal, the rotation angle range of

the ipped-out screen will be limited.

oWhen not using the camera, close the screen facing inward. You can protect

the screen.

oA mirror image (right/left reversed) of subjects is displayed when the screen

faces subjects in front of the camera.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Turning on the Power

z<1>

The camera turns on.

z<2>

The camera is turned o󰀨 and does not

function. Set the power switch to this

position when not using the camera.

Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone

If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting screen

appears, see =374 to set the date/time/zone.

Changing the Interface Language

To change the interface language, see =377.

Automatic Sensor Cleaning

zSensor cleaning, which may make a small noise, is performed

automatically whenever you set the power switch to <2> or attach

or detach lenses. To enable automatic sensor cleaning when the power

switch is set to <1> as well, you can set this in [5: Sensor cleaning]

(=383).

oIf you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to

the card, [Saving...] will be displayed and the power will turn o󰀨 after the

recording nishes.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Turning on the Power

Battery Level Indicator

: Battery level is su󰀩cient.

: Battery level is low, but the camera

can still be used.

: Battery will be exhausted soon.

(Blinks)

: Charge the battery.

oDoing any of the following will exhaust the battery faster:

• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.

• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.

• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.

• Using the Wi-Fi function or Bluetooth function.

oThe number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual shooting

conditions.

oThe lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Certain lenses may

exhaust the battery faster than others.

oIn low ambient temperatures, shooting may not be possible even with a

su󰀩cient battery level.

oSee [5: Battery info.] to check the battery status (=381).

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Attaching a Lens

Remove the caps.

zRemove the rear lens cap and the body

cap by turning them as shown by the

arrows.

Attach the lens.

zAlign the red mount index on the lens

with the red mount index on the camera

and turn the lens as shown by the arrow

until it clicks in place.

Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <AF>.

z<AF> stands for autofocus.

z<MF> stands for manual focus.

Autofocus will not operate.

zFor RF lenses without a focus mode

switch, set to [AF] or [MF] in the camera

menu, in [z: Focus mode].

Remove the front lens cap.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Attaching and Detaching a Lens

Detaching the Lens

While pressing the lens release

button, turn the lens as shown by

the arrow.

zTurn the adapter until it stops, then

detach it.

zAttach the rear lens cap to the detached

lens.

oDo not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of

vision.

oWhen attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to <2>.

oIf the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do not

touch the rotating part.

oFor instructions on how to use the lens, refer to the Lens Instruction Manual

(=4).

Tips for Avoiding Smudges and Dust

When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.

When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the body

cap to the camera.

Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses

All EF and EF-S lenses can be used by attaching the optional Mount

Adapter EF-EOS R. The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.

Attaching a Lens

Remove the caps.

zRemove the rear lens cap and the body

cap by turning them as shown by the

arrows.

(2)(1)

Attach the lens to the adapter.

zAlign the red or white mount index on

the lens with the corresponding mount

index on the adapter and turn the lens

as shown by the arrow until it clicks into

place.

(1) Red index

(2) White index

(3)

Attach the adapter to the camera.

zAlign the red mount indexes (3) on the

adapter and camera and turn the lens

as shown by the arrow until it clicks into

place.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Attaching and Detaching EF/EF-S Lenses

Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <AF>.

z<AF> stands for autofocus.

z<MF> stands for manual focus.

Autofocus will not operate.

Remove the front lens cap.

Detaching the Lens

While pressing the lens release

button, turn the adapter as shown

by the arrow.

zTurn the adapter until it stops, then

detach it.

Detach the lens from the adapter.

zHold down the lens release lever

on the adapter and turn the lens

counterclockwise.

zTurn the lens until it stops, then detach

it.

zAttach the rear lens cap to the detached

lens.

oFor lens precautions, see =49.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Using the Viewfinder

Look through the viewnder to activate it. You can also restrict display to

either the screen or viewnder (=394).

Adjusting the Viewnder Clarity

Turn the dioptric adjustment knob.

zTurn the knob left or right to make the

viewnder display look sharp.

oThe viewnder and screen cannot be activated at the same time.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Basic Operations

Holding the Camera

zViewing the Screen as You Shoot

As you shoot, you can tilt the screen to adjust it. For details, see =45.

High angleNormal angle Low angle

zShooting Through the Viewnder

To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera shake.

Horizontal shooting Vertical shooting

1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip rmly.

2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.

3. Rest your right index nger lightly on the shutter button.

4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.

5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.

6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewnder.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Basic Operations

Shutter Button

The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway.

Then you can further press the shutter button completely.

Pressing Halfway

This activates autofocusing and the

automatic exposure system that sets the

shutter speed and aperture.

The exposure setting (shutter speed and

aperture) is displayed on the screen or in

the viewnder for approx. 8 sec. or as set

for the metering timer.*

* By default, the metering timer is set to 8 sec.

Pressing Completely

This action shoots.

zPreventing Camera Shake

Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called

camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,

note the following:

Hold the camera steady.

Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the

shutter button completely.

oIf you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway rst, or if

you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately,

the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.

oEven during menu display or image playback, you can go back to shooting-

ready state by pressing the shutter button halfway.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Basic Operations

AF Start Button

In Creative Zone modes, has the same

e󰀨ect as pressing the shutter button

halfway.

Multi-Function Button

By pressing the button and turning

the <5> dial, you can set the ISO speed,

drive mode, AF operation, white balance,

and ash exposure compensation.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Basic Operations

<6> Main Dial

(1) After pressing a button, turn the

<6> dial.

Press a button such as , then turn

the <6> dial.

If you press the shutter button halfway,

the camera will go back to shooting-ready

state.

(2) Turn only the <6> dial.

While looking at the screen or viewnder,

turn the <6> dial.

Use this dial to set the shutter speed,

aperture, etc.

oStep (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the Multi-

function lock (=58).

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Basic Operations

<5> Quick Control Dial

(1) After pressing a button, turn the

<5> dial.

Press a button such as , then turn

the <5> dial.

If you press the shutter button halfway,

the camera will go back to shooting-ready

state.

(2) Turn only the <5> dial.

While looking at the screen or viewnder,

turn the <5> dial.

Use this dial to set the exposure

compensation amount, the aperture setting

for manual exposures, etc.

oStep (1) can be performed even when controls are locked with the Multi-

function lock (=58).

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Basic Operations

<R> Multi-Function Lock Switch

To avoid accidentally changing settings from the Main dial, Quick control

dial, control ring, or touch-screen panel, congure [5: Multi function lock]

and set the <R> switch to <R>.

For [5: Multi function lock] details, see =407.

<T> Control Ring

By default, the aperture value can be set

by turning the control ring of RF lenses or

mount adapters while pressing the shutter

button halfway in <t>, <f>, <a>, or

<F> mode. Otherwise, you can assign

a di󰀨erent function to the control ring by

customizing operations in [C.Fn III-6:

Customize dials] (=542).

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Basic Operations

INFO Button

Each press of the button changes

the information shown.

The following sample screens are for still

photos.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Menu Operations and Settings

(1)

(7)

(5)

(3)

(2)

(4)

(6)

(1) <M> button

(2) button

(3) Screen

(4) <V> cross keys

(5) <0> button

(6) Quick control dial

(7) Main dial

Basic Zone Modes Menu Screen

* In Basic Zone modes, some tabs and menu items do not appear.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Menu Operations and Settings

Creative Zone Modes Menu Screen

(2)

(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(1)

(3) (9)

(1) Main tabs

(2) Secondary tabs

(3) Menu items

(4) z : Shooting

(5) 3 : Playback

(6) 5 : Set-up

(7) 8 : Custom Functions

(8) 9 : My Menu

(9) Menu settings

Menu Setting Procedure

Display the menu screen.

zPress the <M> button.

Select a tab.

zPress the button to switch

between main tabs.

zTurn the <6> dial to select a

secondary tab.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Menu Operations and Settings

Select an item.

zTurn the <5> dial to select an item,

then press <0>.

Select an option.

zTurn the <5> dial to select an option.

zThe current setting is indicated in blue.

Set an option.

zPress <0> to set it.

Exit the setting.

zPress the <M> button to nish and

prepare for shooting.

oThe description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have pressed

the <M> button to display the menu screen.

oYou can also tap on the menu screen or press the <V> cross keys to operate

the menu.

oTo cancel the operation, press the <M> button.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Menu Operations and Settings

Dimmed Menu Items

Example: Highlight tone priority

Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The

menu item is dimmed if another function

setting is overriding it.

You can see the overriding function by

selecting the dimmed menu item and

pressing <0>.

If you cancel the overriding function’s

setting, the dimmed menu item will become

settable.

oYou may not be able to see the overriding function for certain dimmed menu

items.

oWith [5: Clear all camera settings], you can reset the menu functions to the

default settings (=410).

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Touch-Screen Operation

You can operate the camera by tapping or dragging on the screen (touch-

screen panel) with your nger.

Tap

Sample screen (Quick Control)

zUse your nger to tap on (touch briey

and then remove your nger from) the

screen.

zFor example, when you tap on [Q],

the Quick Control screen appears. By

tapping on [2], you can return to the

preceding screen.

Drag

Sample screen (Menu screen)

zSlide your nger while touching the

screen.

oIf [5: Beep] is set to [Touch ], the beep will not sound for touch operations

(=380).

oTouch control responsiveness can be adjusted (=379).

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Quick Control

You can directly select and set the settings displayed on the screen. This is

called Quick Control (except in <A> mode).

Press the <Q> button (7).

Select a setting item.

zPress the <W> <X> keys for selection.

zWhen the screen at left is displayed,

press the <W> <X> <Y> <Z> keys for

selection.

Select an option.

zTurn the <6> or <5> dial, or press

the <Y> <Z> keys to change the

setting. There are also functions that are

set by pressing a button following these

operations.

zPress <0> to nalize the setting and

return to the previous screen.

oYou can also tap on the screen for Quick Control settings (=64).

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Basic Shooting

This chapter describes how to use the Basic Zone modes on the

Mode dial for best results.

With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot, and the

camera sets everything automatically.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent

Auto)

<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene

and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust focus

automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the motion of

the subject (=71).

Set the Mode dial to <A>.

Press <0>.

zRead the message and select [OK].

Aim the camera at what you will

shoot (the subject).

zA frame may be displayed around the

subject, under some shooting conditions.

zWhen an AF point is displayed on the

screen, aim it over the subject.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Focus on the subject.

zPress the shutter button halfway to

focus.

zYou can also focus by touching a

person’s face or another subject on

the screen (Touch AF) when [z:

Continuous AF] is set to [Disable].

zUnder low light, the AF-assist beam

(=201) is automatically activated if

needed.

gFor stationary subjects, the AF point is

displayed in green when the subject is in

focus, and the camera beeps (One-Shot

AF).

gFor moving subjects, the AF point is

displayed in blue and tracks subject

movement. The camera does not beep

(Servo AF).

Take the picture.

zPress the shutter button completely to

take the picture.

gThe image just captured will be

displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the

screen.

oSubject movement (whether subjects are still or moving) may not be detected

correctly for some subject or shooting conditions.

oIf you normally prefer to shoot with One-Shot AF, set [z: A Auto servo] to

[Disable].

oAF operation (One-Shot AF or Servo AF) is set automatically when you press

the shutter button halfway. Note that AF operation cannot be switched during

shooting.

oThe <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,

and sunset scenes. If you do not obtain the desired color tones, change the

mode to a Creative Zone mode (=35) and select a Picture Style other than

<D>, then shoot again (=148).

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Minimizing Blurred Photos

zUse a sturdy tripod that can bear the weight of the shooting equipment.

Mount the camera securely on the tripod.

zUsing a remote switch (sold separately, =219) or a wireless remote

control (sold separately, =217) is recommended.

FAQ

zFocusing is not possible (indicated by an orange AF point).

Aim the AF point over an area with good contrast, then press the shutter

button halfway (=54). If you are too close to the subject, move away

and shoot again.

zMultiple AF points are displayed simultaneously.

If multiple AF points are displayed simultaneously, all of these positions

are in focus. As long as one AF point is displayed on the subject, you can

take the picture.

zPressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the

subject.

If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus), set it

to <AF> (autofocus).

zThe shutter speed display is blinking.

Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject due

to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EL/EX series Speedlite (sold

separately, =220) is recommended.

zWhen the external ash was used, the bottom part of the

picture came out unnaturally dark.

If a hood is attached to the lens, it may obstruct the ash light. If the

subject is close, detach the hood before taking the picture with ash.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent

Auto)

Recomposing the Shot

Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right

to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better

perspective.

Pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the

focus on that subject. Recompose the shot while keeping the shutter button

pressed halfway, and then press the shutter button completely to take the

picture. This is called “focus lock”.

Shooting a Moving Subject

After you press the shutter button halfway and a blue AF point appears, the

camera detects subject movement and focuses using Servo AF. Keep the

subject on the screen as you hold down the shutter button halfway, and at

the decisive moment, press the shutter button completely.

If you prefer to shoot with One-Shot AF, set [z: A Auto servo] to

[Disable].

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Scene Icons

The camera detects the scene type and

sets everything automatically to suit the

scene. The detected scene type is indicated

on the upper left of the screen. For icon

details, see =595.

Adjusting Settings by Touching the Screen

By touching icons, you can adjust settings

for drive mode, image quality, Touch

Shutter, and Creative Assist.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

Shooting with E󰀨ects Applied (Creative Assist)

You can shoot with your selected e󰀨ects applied.

Press the <Q> button.

zRead the message and select [OK].

Select an e󰀨ect.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select an

e󰀨ect, then press <0>.

Select the e󰀨ect level and other

details.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to set it, then

press <0>.

zTo reset the setting, press the <A>

button, then select [OK].

Creative Assist E󰀨ects

z[] Preset

Select one of the preset e󰀨ects.

Note that [Saturation], [Color tone 1], and [Color tone 2] are not

available with [B&W].

z[ ] Background blur

Adjust background blur. Choose higher values to make backgrounds

sharper, or lower values to make them blurrier. [Auto] adjusts background

blurring to match the brightness. Depending on lens brightness (f/ number),

some positions may not be available.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

z[ ] Brightness

Adjust image brightness.

z[ ] Contrast

Adjust contrast.

z[ ] Saturation

Adjust the vividness of colors.

z[ ] Color tone 1

Adjust amber/blue color tone.

z[ ] Color tone 2

Adjust green/magenta color tone.

z[ ] Monochrome

Set the toning e󰀨ect for monochrome shooting. Set to [O󰀨] to shoot in

color. [Saturation], [Color tone 1], and [Color tone 2] are not available

with options other than [O󰀨].

o[Background blur] is not available when the ash is used.

oThese settings are reset when you switch shooting modes or set the power

switch to <2>. To save the settings, set [z: Retain Creative Assist data]

to [Enable].

Saving Favorite Settings

To save the current setting to the camera, press the button on the

Creative Assist setting screen, then select [OK]. Up to three presets can be

saved as [USER*]. After three have been saved, an existing [USER*] preset

must be overwritten to save a new one.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Special Scene Mode

The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when you

select a shooting mode for your subject or scene.

* <8> stands for Special Scene.

Set the Mode dial to <8>.

Press the <0> button.

Select a shooting mode.

zPress the <W> <X> keys to select the

shooting mode, then press <0>.

zYou can also select the shooting mode

by turning the <6> or <5> dial.

oCautions on each shooting mode are listed together (=90). Read the

cautions before shooting.

oThe Quick Control screen appears after step 2 when [5: Mode guide] is set

to [Disable]. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the shooting mode.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Special Scene Mode

Available Shooting Modes in the 8 Mode

Shooting mode Page Shooting mode Page

2Portrait =77 4Close-up =84

qGroup Photo =78 PFood =85

3Landscape =79 6Night Portrait =86

5Sports =80 FHandheld Night Scene =87

CKids =81 GHDR Backlight Control =88

rPanning =82 ISilent Mode =89

oYou can also set the shooting mode from [z: Shooting mode] after setting

the Mode dial to <8>.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shooting Portraits

The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human subject

stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer.

Shooting Tips

zSelect the location where the distance between the subject

and the background is the farthest.

The further the distance between the subject and background, the more

blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand out better

against an uncluttered dark background.

zUse a telephoto lens.

If you have a zoom lens, use the telephoto end to ll the frame with the

subject from the waist up.

zFocus on the face.

As you focus, make sure the AF point on the face is lit in green before

you shoot. When shooting close-ups of the face, you can set [z: Eye

Detection AF] to [Enable] to shoot with the subject’s eyes in focus.

oThe default setting is (Low-speed continuous shooting). If you keep

holding down the shutter button, you can shoot continuously to capture

changes in the subject’s facial expression and pose.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shooting Group Photos

Use the <q> (Group Photo) mode to shoot group photos. You can take a

picture in which both the people in the front and people in the back are all in

focus.

Shooting Tips

zUse a wide-angle lens.

When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to make it easy to get

all the people in the group in focus at once, from the front row to the back.

Also, if you place a little distance between the camera and the subjects (so

that the subjects’ entire bodies are in the shot), the focus range increases

in depth.

zTake multiple shots of the group.

It is recommended to shoot multiple photos in case some people close

their eyes.

oWhen shooting indoors or in low-light, hold the camera steady or use a tripod

to prevent camera shake.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shooting Landscapes

Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for expansive scenery or to have

everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and very

sharp and crisp images.

Shooting Tips

zWith a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end.

When using a zoom lens, set the lens to the wide-angle end to make the

objects near and far in focus. It also adds breadth to landscapes.

zShooting night scenes.

Shooting with <3> while handholding the camera may cause camera

shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shooting Moving Subjects

Use the <5> (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a running

person or a moving vehicle.

(1)

Shooting Tips

zUse a telephoto lens.

Use of a telephoto lens is recommended to enable shooting from a

distance.

zTrack the subject with the Area AF frame.

By default, [z: AF method] is set to [u+Tracking]. An Area AF frame (1)

appears when you press the shutter button halfway. Once the subject is

in focus, the AF point turns blue.

zShoot continuously.

The default setting is [o] (High-speed continuous shooting). At the

decisive moment, press the shutter button completely to take the shot. To

track the subject and capture changes as it moves, keep holding down

the shutter button to shoot continuously.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Photographing Children

To photograph the children running around, use <C> (Kids). Skin tones will

look healthy.

(1)

Shooting Tips

zTrack the subject with the Area AF frame.

By default, [z: AF method] is set to [u+Tracking]. An Area AF frame (1)

appears when you press the shutter button halfway. Once the subject is

in focus, the AF point turns blue.

zShoot continuously.

The default setting is [o] (High-speed continuous shooting). At the

decisive moment, press the shutter button completely to take the shot.

To track the subject and capture changes in facial expression and

movement, keep holding down the shutter button to shoot continuously.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Panning

If you want to take a picture with the feel of speed and a blurred motion

e󰀨ect on the subject’s background, use <r> (Panning). If you use a

lens supporting the <r> mode, subject blur is detected, corrected, and

reduced.

Shooting Tips

zTurn the camera to follow the moving subject.

When shooting, turn the camera smoothly as you track the moving

subject. Aim the AF point over the part of the moving subject where you

want to focus, then press the shutter button halfway and keep holding

it down as you turn the camera to match the subject’s speed and

movement. Press the shutter button completely while moving the camera

to take the picture. Keep tracking the subject with the camera.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Panning

zSet the level of background motion blur.

With [E󰀨ect], you can set the level of background motion blur. The [Max]

setting will set a slower shutter speed to increase the background motion

blur around the subject. If the subject blur is noticeable, set [E󰀨ect] to

[Med] or [Min] to reduce the blur.

oFor details on lenses compatible with <r> mode, visit the Canon website.

oWith lenses that support <r> mode, the camera automatically corrects

subject blur and (based on the [E󰀨ect] setting) adjusts shutter speed,

regardless of the lens IS setting.

oThe AF method can only be set to [1-point AF] or [Zone AF]. By default, it is

set to [Zone AF], with the zone in the center of the screen selected.

oTo prevent camera shake, it is recommended that you hold the camera with

both hands, tighten your arms close to your body, and track the subject’s

movement smoothly to take pictures.

oThis e󰀨ect is most e󰀨ective with trains, cars, etc. that move at a constant

speed in one direction.

oTaking test shots or checking the image by playing it back immediately after

shooting is recommended.

oBy default, (Low-speed continuous shooting) is set. At the decisive

moment, press the shutter button completely to take the picture. You can track

moving subjects by panning the camera as you keep holding down the shutter

button to shoot continuously.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shooting Close-ups

When you want to shoot owers or small things up close, use the <4>

(Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a macro

lens (sold separately).

Shooting Tips

zUse a simple background.

A simple background makes small objects such as owers stand out

better.

zMove in as close as possible to the subject.

Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. The lens minimum

focusing distance is measured from the <V> (focal plane) mark on the

top of the camera to the subject. Focusing is not possible if you are too

close.

zWith a zoom lens, use the telephoto end.

If you have a zoom lens, using the telephoto end will make the subject

look larger.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shooting Food

When you want to take pictures of food, use (Food). The photo will

look bright and appetizing. Also, depending on the light source, the reddish

tinge will be suppressed in the pictures taken under tungsten lights, etc.

Shooting Tips

zChange the color tone.

You can change [Color tone]. To increase the food’s reddish tinge, set it

toward [Warm]. Set it toward [Cool] if it looks too red.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod)

When you want to photograph people at night and obtain a natural-looking

night scene in the background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode. Note

that an external Speedlite is required for shooting. Using a tripod is

recommended.

Shooting Tips

zUse a wide-angle lens and a tripod.

When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide night

view. Also, since camera shake is prone to occur with handheld shooting,

use a tripod.

zCheck the image brightness.

Note that it is recommended to play back the captured image on location

to check the image brightness. If the subject looks dark, move nearer and

shoot again.

zAlso shoot in other shooting modes.

Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also with

<A> and <F> is recommended.

oIf you use the self-timer together with an external Speedlite, the self-timer

lamp will light up briey after the picture is taken.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)

Using a tripod when shooting a night scene gives the best results. However,

the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot night scenes

even while handholding the camera. In this shooting mode, four shots are

taken consecutively for each picture, and the resulting one image with

reduced camera shake is recorded.

Shooting Tips

zHold the camera rmly.

During shooting, hold the camera rmly and steadily. In this mode, four

shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if there is

signicant misalignment in any of the four shots due to camera shake,

they may not align properly in the nal image.

zFor portraits, use an external Speedlite.

If you are to include people in the picture, use an external Speedlite.

To take a nice portrait, the rst shot will use ash. Tell the subject not to

move until all four consecutive shots are taken.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shooting Backlit Scenes

When shooting a scene having both the bright and dark areas, use the

<G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this

mode, three consecutive shots are taken at di󰀨erent exposures. This results

in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the clipped

shadows caused by backlighting.

* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.

Shooting Tips

zHold the camera rmly.

During shooting, hold the camera rmly and steadily. In this mode, three

shots are aligned and merged into a single image. However, if there is

signicant misalignment in any of the three shots due to camera shake,

they may not align properly in the nal image.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shooting Quiet Scenes

Where silence is needed, you can shoot without beeps such as shutter

release sounds.

Shooting Tips

zTake some test shots.

It is recommended to take a few test shots in advance, because under

some shooting conditions, lens aperture adjustment may be audible.

oAs you shoot, a white frame is momentarily displayed around the screen.

oThe drive mode can only be set to , <m>, or <l>.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Cautions for the <SCN> Modes

q: Group Photo

oThe angle of view changes slightly, due to distortion correction.

oDepending on the shooting conditions, focus may not be attained for everyone

from the front to the back of the image.

5: Sports

oUnder low light where camera shake tends to occur, the shutter speed value in

the lower left will blink. Hold the camera steady and shoot.

oUsing an external Speedlite will decrease the continuous shooting speed.

C: Kids

oUsing an external Speedlite will decrease the continuous shooting speed.

r: Panning

oThe shutter speed will become slower. Therefore, this mode is not suitable for

any shooting except for panning.

oBy default, is set. Note that <o> cannot be selected.

oExternal Speedlites cannot be used. (It will not re.)

oAlthough lens IS is applied to images captured with lenses supporting <r>

mode, the e󰀨ect is not shown on the screen as you shoot. (IS and subject blur

correction are activated when you shoot, regardless of the lens IS setting.)

oIf the lens does not support the <r> mode, subject blur will not be corrected.

However, the automatic shutter speed adjustment alone will take e󰀨ect

according to the setting of [E󰀨ect].

oWhen shooting under bright light such as a sunny summer day or when

shooting a slow subject, the set degree of panning e󰀨ect may not be obtained.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Cautions for the <SCN> Modes

r: Panning (continued)

oWith a lens supporting the <r> mode, subject blur may not be corrected

properly when shooting the following subjects or under the following shooting

conditions.

• Subjects with very low contrast.

• Subjects in low light.

• Strongly backlit or reective subjects.

• Subjects with repetitive patterns.

• Subjects with less patterns or monotonous patterns.

• Subjects with reections (images reected in glass, etc.).

• Subjects smaller than the Zone AF frame.

• When there are multiple subjects moving within the Zone AF frame.

• Subjects moving in irregular directions or at irregular speeds.

• Subjects whose movements are partly irregular. (For example, the vertical

movement of a runner.)

• Subjects whose speed changes dramatically. (For example, right after the

start of movement or while turning along a curve.)

• When you move the camera too fast or too slow.

• When the camera’s movement does not match the subject’s movement.

P: Food

oThe warm color cast of subjects may fade.

oWhen multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of

the picture may not be reduced.

oIf you use an external Speedlite, [Color tone] will be set to Standard.

oIf there are people in the picture, the skin tone may not be reproduced

properly.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Cautions for the <SCN> Modes

6: Night Portrait

oTell subjects to remain still for a moment after the ash res.

oFocusing may be di󰀩cult when subject faces look dark. In this case, set the

lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually.

oAutofocusing at night or in dark scenes may be di󰀩cult when points of light lie

within the AF point. In this case, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and

focus manually.

oShots will look slightly di󰀨erent from the image as displayed on the screen.

F: Handheld Night Scene

oCompared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.

oRAW image quality cannot be set.

oAutofocusing at night or in dark scenes may be di󰀩cult when points of light lie

within the AF point. In this case, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and

focus manually (=48, =51).

oShots will look slightly di󰀨erent from the image as displayed on the screen.

oIf you use an external Speedlite and the subject is close, overexposure may

result.

oIf you use an external Speedlite for a night scene with limited lighting, the

shots may not align correctly. This may result in a blurry picture.

oIf you use an external Speedlite with a human subject close to the background

that is also illuminated by the ash, the shots may not align correctly. This may

result in a blurry picture. Unnatural shadows and unsuitable colors may also

appear.

oFlash coverage angle with an external Speedlite:

• When using a Speedlite with automatic flash coverage setting, the zoom

position will be xed to the wide (wide-angle) end regardless of the lens’s

zoom position.

• When using a Speedlite requiring manual flash coverage setting, set the

ash head to the normal position.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Cautions for the <SCN> Modes

F: Handheld Night Scene (continued)

oIf you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages

or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.

oThe image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,

stripes, etc.), at or single-tone images, or images signicantly misaligned due

to camera shake.

oIt takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after

shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not

possible until processing is nished.

G: HDR Backlight Control

oCompared to other shooting modes, the image area will be smaller.

oRAW image quality cannot be set.

oExternal Speedlites cannot be used. (It will not re.)

oNote that the image may not be rendered with a smooth gradation and may

look irregular or have signicant noise.

oHDR Backlight Control may not be e󰀨ective for excessively backlit scenes or

extremely high-contrast scenes.

oWhen shooting subjects that are su󰀩ciently bright as they are, for example for

normally lit scenes, the image may look unnatural due to the HDR e󰀨ect.

oIf you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages

or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark.

oThe image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,

stripes, etc.), at or single-tone images, or images signicantly misaligned due

to camera shake.

oIt takes some time to record images to the card since they are merged after

shooting. [BUSY] is displayed as images are processed, and shooting is not

possible until processing is nished.

I: Silent Mode

oBe responsible when using silent shooting, and respect subject privacy and

portrait rights.

oImages of fast-moving subjects may look distorted.

oBands of light may be displayed and stripes from di󰀨erences in brightness

may be captured in images if you shoot in Silent Mode under ickering light

sources (such as uorescent lights) or when another camera’s ash res.

oContinuous shooting and ash photography are not available.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Creative Zone

Creative Zone modes give you the freedom

to shoot in a variety of ways by setting your

preferred shutter speed, aperture value,

exposure, and more.

zTo clear the shooting mode description displayed when you turn

the Mode dial, press <0> (=369).

oMake sure the Multi-function lock feature is o󰀨.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Program AE

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the

subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.

* <d> stands for Program.

* AE stands for Auto Exposure.

Set the Mode dial to <d>.

Focus on the subject.

zAim the AF point over the subject and

press the shutter button halfway.

gOnce the subject is in focus, the AF

point turns green (with One-Shot AF).

gThe shutter speed and aperture are set

automatically.

Check the display.

zAs long as the exposure value is not

blinking, standard exposure will be

obtained.

Take the picture.

zCompose the shot and press the shutter

button completely.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Program AE

oIf the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number blink,

it indicates underexposure.

Increase the ISO speed or use ash.

oIf the “1/4000” shutter speed and the highest f/number

blink, it indicates overexposure.

Lower the ISO speed or use an ND lter (sold

separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the

lens.

Di󰀨erences Between <d> and <A> Modes

oIn <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF method and metering mode,

are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can set

are limited. On the other hand, with <d> mode, only the shutter speed and

aperture are set automatically. You can freely set the AF method, metering

mode, and other functions.

Program Shift

oIn <d> mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and aperture

combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while maintaining the

same exposure. This is called Program shift.

oTo shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the <6> dial

until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.

oProgram shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer ends

(exposure setting display turns o󰀨).

oProgram shift cannot be used with ash.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shutter-Priority AE

In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets

the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the

subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed can freeze

the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create a blurred

e󰀨ect, giving the impression of motion.

* <s> stands for Time value.

Blurred motion

(Slow speed: 1/30 sec.)

Frozen motion

(Fast speed: 1/2000 sec.)

Set the Mode dial to <s>.

Set the desired shutter speed.

zTurn the <6> dial to set it.

Focus on the subject.

zPress the shutter button halfway.

gThe aperture is set automatically.

Check the display and shoot.

zAs long as the aperture is not blinking,

the standard exposure will be obtained.

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shutter-Priority AE

oIf the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure.

Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until

the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.

oIf the highest f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure.

Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until

the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.

Shutter Speed Display

oFor example, “0"5” indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"”, 15 sec.

100

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Aperture-Priority AE

In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter

speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject

brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/number (smaller

aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within

acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower f/number (larger aperture

hole) will make less of the foreground and background fall within acceptable

focus.

* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).

Blurred background

(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)

Sharp foreground and background

(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)

Set the Mode dial to <f>.

Set the desired aperture.

zTurn the <6> dial to set it.

Focus on the subject.

zPress the shutter button halfway.

gThe shutter speed is set automatically.

Check the display and shoot.

zAs long as the shutter speed is not

blinking, the standard exposure will be

obtained.

101

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Aperture-Priority AE

oIf the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates

underexposure.

Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (lower

f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a

higher ISO speed.

oIf the “1/4000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates

overexposure.

Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture (higher

f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a

lower ISO speed.

Aperture Value Display

oThe higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The

f/number displayed varies depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to the

camera, “F00” will be displayed for the aperture.

Depth-of-Field PreviewM

Press the button you have assigned to depth-of-eld preview (using [8C.

Fn III-5: Customize buttons], (=537)) to stop down the lens to the

current aperture setting and check the area in focus (depth of eld).

oThe larger the aperture value, the wider the area in focus, from the foreground

to the background.

oExposure is locked (AE lock) as you hold down the button assigned to depth-

of-eld preview.

102

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Manual Exposure

In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired.

To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator or use

a commercially available exposure meter. This method is called manual

exposure.

* <a> stands for Manual.

Set the Mode dial to <a>.

Set the ISO speed (=131).

zWith ISO Auto, you can set exposure

compensation (=103).

Set the shutter speed and aperture.

zTo set the shutter speed, turn the <6>

dial. To set the aperture, turn the <5>

dial.

(1)

(2)

Focus on the subject.

zPress the shutter button halfway.

gThe exposure setting will be displayed.

zCheck the exposure level mark <s> to

see how far the current exposure level is

from the standard exposure level.

(1) Standard exposure index

(2) Exposure level mark

Set the exposure and take the

picture.

zCheck the exposure level indicator

and set the desired shutter speed and

aperture.

103

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Manual Exposure

Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto

If the ISO speed is set to [AUTO] for manual exposure shooting, you can

set exposure compensation (=128) as follows:

Touch the exposure level indicator

[z: Expo.comp./AEB]

Quick Control screen

oIf ISO Auto is set, the ISO speed setting will change to obtain the standard

exposure with the set shutter speed and aperture. Therefore, you may

not obtain the desired exposure e󰀨ect. In this case, set the exposure

compensation.

oWith the camera set to the <a> mode + ISO Auto + <q> (Evaluative

metering) and [8C.Fn I-7: AE lock meter. mode after focus] set to the

default setting (=529), holding down the shutter button halfway will lock the

ISO speed after focus is achieved with One-Shot AF.

oWhen ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO speed.

oTo compare the current exposure to the exposure when you pressed the

<A> button initially with a manually set ISO speed, press the <A> button,

recompose the shot, and check the exposure level indicator.

oWith ISO Auto set and [8C.Fn I-1: Exposure level increments] set to [1/2-

stop], any 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be implemented with the ISO

speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the shutter speed displayed will

not change.

104

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Flexible-Priority AE

In this mode, you can set shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed manually

or automatically and combine these settings with your choice of exposure

compensation. Shooting in <t> mode, with control over each of these

parameters, is equivalent to shooting in <d>, <s>, <f>, or <a>

mode.

* <t> stands for Flexible value.

Set the Mode dial to <t>.

Set the shutter speed, aperture,

and ISO speed.

zTurn the <5> dial to select an item to

set. A [6] icon appears to the left of

the selected item.

zTurn the <6> dial to set the option.

zTo reset the setting to [AUTO], press the

<W> or <Z> key.

Set the amount of exposure

compensation.

zTurn the <5> dial and select the

exposure level indicator. A [6] icon

appears to the left of the exposure level

indicator.

zTurn the <6> dial to set the option.

zTo reset the setting to [±0], press the

<W> or <Z> key.

105

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Flexible-Priority AE

Combinations of Functions in <t> Mode

Shutter

Speed Aperture ISO Speed Exposure

Compensation Shooting Mode

[AUTO] [AUTO]

[AUTO]

Available Similar to <d>

Manual

selection

Manual

selection [AUTO]

[AUTO]

Available Similar to <s>

Manual

selection

[AUTO] Manual

selection

[AUTO]

Available Similar to <f>

Manual

selection

Manual

selection

Manual

selection

[AUTO] Available

Similar to <a>

Manual

selection –

oBlinking values indicate that the values set will cause underexposure or

overexposure. Adjust the exposure until the value stops blinking.

oSlow-sync shooting is not used under low light when you have set up <t>

mode to resemble <f> or <d> mode, even when [Slow synchro] in [z:

External Speedlite control] is set to [1/180-30sec. auto].

oValues for shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed that are set to [AUTO] are

underlined.

oYou can set shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed to [AUTO] and exposure

compensation to [±0] in steps 2 or 3 by pressing the <X> or <Y> key.

106

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Long (Bulb) Exposures

In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter

button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter button. This

photographic technique is called “bulb exposure”. Use bulb exposures for

night scenes, reworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long

exposures.

Set the Mode dial to <F>.

Set the desired aperture.

zTurn the <6> dial to set it.

Take the picture.

zThe exposure will continue for as long

as you keep the shutter button pressed

completely.

gThe elapsed exposure time will be

displayed on the screen.

oDo not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an

intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the

camera’s internal components.

oLong bulb exposures produce more noise in the image than usual.

oIf ISO Auto is set, ISO 400 will be set (=582).

oWhen shooting bulb exposures with the self-timer instead of the bulb timer,

keep pressing the shutter button completely (for the self-timer time and bulb

exposure time).

107

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Long (Bulb) Exposures

oWith [z Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise generated

during long exposures (=159).

oFor bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended.

oYou can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold

separately, =219).

oYou can also use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) for bulb

exposures. When you press the remote control’s transmit button, the bulb

exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button again to stop

the bulb exposure.

Bulb TimerM

You can preset the bulb exposure’s exposure time. The bulb timer eliminates

the need to keep holding down the shutter button during the bulb exposure.

This reduces camera shake.

The bulb timer can be set only in the <F> (bulb exposure). It cannot be set

(or will not function) in any other mode.

Select [z: Bulb timer].

Select [Enable].

zSelect [Enable], then press the

button.

108

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Long (Bulb) Exposures

Set the desired exposure time.

zSelect the hour, minute, or second.

zPress <0> to display <r>.

zSet the desired number, then press

<0>. (Returns to <s>.)

Select [OK].

Take the picture.

gPress the shutter button completely, and

the bulb exposure will start and continue

until the set time elapses.

z[H] and the exposure time are

displayed on the screen during bulb

timer shooting.

zTo cancel the timer setting, set [Disable]

in step 2.

oWhile the bulb timer is operating, if you press the shutter button completely

and let go of it, the bulb exposure will stop.

oIf you keep pressing the shutter button completely after the exposure starts,

the bulb exposure will continue even after the set exposure time elapses. (The

bulb exposure will not stop automatically when the set exposure time elapses.)

oChanging shooting modes cancels the bulb timer and restores the setting to

[Disable].

109

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

109

Shooting

This chapter describes shooting and introduces menu settings on

the shooting ([z]) tab.

110

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

110

Shooting Still Photos

zA M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available

only in Creative Zone <t>, <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F> mode.

111

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting

zShooting 1

=116

=119

=122

=182

zShooting 2

=123

=222

zShooting 3

=129

=131

=286

=136

=137

=138

=139

112

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting

zShooting 4

=140

=143

=145

=147

=148, 152, 155

zShooting 5

=159

=157

=161

=163

=165

=171

=202

zShooting 6

=176

=106

=179

=181

113

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting

zShooting 7

=185

=188

=198

=199

=183

zShooting 8

=200

=201

=216

zShooting 9

=249

=257

=260

=280

=288

oWhen RF lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Focus mode] is

displayed.

114

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting

In Basic Zone modes, the following screens are displayed.

zShooting 1

=76

=116

=122

=182

zShooting 2

=73

=163

=176

zShooting 3

=188

=198

=199

=183

o[Shooting mode] and [AF method] are available in <8> mode.

o[Retain Creative Assist data] is available in <A> mode.

115

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Still Photo Shooting

zShooting 4

=201

=71

=216

zShooting 5

=249

=257

=260

=280

o[MF peaking settings] is available in <8> mode.

o[A Auto servo] is available in <A> mode.

116

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Image Quality

You can select the pixel count and the image quality. JPEG image quality

options include 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, and b. RAW image

quality options include 1 and F.

Select [z: Image quality].

Set the image quality.

zTo select the RAW quality, turn the

<6> dial, and to select the JPEG

quality, press the <Y> <Z> keys.

zPress <0> to set it.

oNumber of shots available as indicated by [****] on the image quality setting

screen always applies to a setting of [Full-frame], regardless of the actual

aspect ratio setting (=119).

oIf [–] is set for both the RAW image and JPEG image, 73 will be set.

oIf you select both RAW and JPEG, each time you shoot, the image will be

recorded simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the image-

recording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with the

same le numbers (le extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR3 for RAW).

ob is in 7 (Fine) quality.

oMeaning of image quality icons: 1 RAW, F Compact RAW, JPEG,

7 Fine, 8 Normal, 3 Large, 4 Medium, 6 Small.

117

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Image Quality

RAW Images

A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to digital

data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the quality as

follows: 1 or F. F produces RAW images with smaller le sizes

than 1.

RAW images can be processed using [3: RAW image processing]

(=325) and saved as JPEG images. (Just as for 1, all JPEG size

options are available for F.) As the RAW image itself does not change,

you can process the RAW image to create any number of JPEG images

with various processing conditions.

You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process RAW

images. You can make various adjustments to images depending upon how

they will be used and can generate JPEG or other types of images reecting

the e󰀨ects of those adjustments.

RAW Image Processing Software

oTo display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional

(hereafter DPP, EOS software) is recommended.

oPrevious versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken with this

camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your computer,

obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon website to update

it (=554). (The previous version will be overwritten.) Note that DPP Ver.3.x

or earlier cannot process RAW images taken with this camera.

oCommercially available software may not be able to display RAW images

taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the software

manufacturer.

Guidelines for Choosing Image Quality

For guidelines on le sizes, number of possible shots, and maximum burst

shots, see =583.

118

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Image Quality

Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting

The approximate maximum burst is shown

on the shooting screen and in the lower

right of the viewnder.

oIf the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99

or more shots continuously. The value starts decreasing once it reaches 98

or less. [BUSY] display indicates that internal memory is full and shooting

will stop temporarily. If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will

increase. After all the captured images are written to the card, you can resume

continuous shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed in the table on

=583.

119

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio

Normally with RF or EF lenses, images are captured at the sensor size

of approx. 36.0×24.0 mm in full-frame shooting, but in cropped shooting,

you can isolate and magnify the center of the image approx. 1.6x (APS-C

size) as if using a telephoto lens, or you can set an aspect ratio to suit your

shooting application before shooting.

For EF-S lenses, a 3:2 aspect ratio in the center is captured, magnied

approx. 1.6x (APS-C size).

Select [z: zCropping/aspect

ratio].

Select an item.

zSelect [Full-frame], [1.6x (crop)], [1:1

(aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or

[16:9 (aspect ratio)].

zWith EF-S lenses, [1.6x (crop)] is set

automatically, and no other option is

available.

o74/84/7a/8a image quality options are not available when [1.6x (crop)]

is set, or with EF-S lenses.

oCropped shooting with the image quality set to 74/84/7a/8a produces

73/83/b/b images, respectively.

oShooting with an EF-S lens when [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)],

or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] is set automatically clears the setting and shoots with

[1.6x (crop)] at a 3:2 aspect ratio.

120

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio

Setting examples

Y set

U set or EF-S lens

used

Take the picture.

zWhen [1.6x (crop)] is set or an EF-S

lens is used, an image magnied

approx. 1.6x is displayed.

zWhen [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect

ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)] is set,

the image within the black masked is

captured.

W set

121

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Cropping/Aspect Ratio

oAreas outside the cropped area are not recorded in RAW shooting when

[1.6x (crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses.

oThe [z: zCropping/aspect ratio] setting is not used as the basis for auto

ash zoom (auto ash coverage adjustment) by an external Speedlite.

oFor details on pixel counts when cropping or an aspect ratio is set, see

=584.

oNearly 100% eld of view coverage is maintained vertically and horizontally

when cropping or an aspect ratio is set.

oAspect ratio information is added to RAW images when an aspect ratio is set,

which are captured at full size. When the RAW images are played back, the

image area used for shooting is indicated by lines. Note that only the shooting

image area is shown in slideshows (=343).

122

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Image Review Time

You can set how long the image is displayed on the screen immediately

after shooting. To keep the captured image displayed, set [Hold]. To not

have the captured image displayed, set [O󰀨].

Select [z: Image review].

Set a time option.

oWhen [Hold] is set, images are displayed as long as the time set in [5:

Power saving].

123

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Correction of Lens Aberrations due to

Optical Characteristics

Vignetting, image distortion, and other issues may be caused by lens optical

characteristics. The camera can compensate for these phenomena by using

[Lens aberration correction].

Select [z: Lens aberration

correction].

Select an item.

Select [Enable].

zConrm that the name of the attached

lens and (except for di󰀨raction

correction) [Correction data available]

are displayed.

zIf [Correction data not available]

or [] is displayed, see “Digital Lens

Optimizer” (=125).

Take the picture.

zThe image captured will have lens

aberration corrected.

124

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics

Peripheral Illumination Correction

Vignetting (dark image corners) can be corrected.

oDepending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.

oThe higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.

oThe correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum correction

amount that applied with Digital Photo Professional (EOS software).

oPeripheral illumination is corrected automatically in Basic Zone modes when

correction data is registered on the camera.

Distortion Correction

Distortion (image warping) can be corrected.

oTo correct distortion, the camera captures a narrower image area than the

area seen when shooting, which crops the image a little and slightly lowers the

apparent resolution.

oSetting distortion correction may change the angle of view slightly.

oThe amount of image cropped may vary between still photos and movies.

oWhen you magnify images, distortion correction is not applied to the images

displayed.

oImages with distortion correction applied will not have the Dust Delete Data

(=161) appended.

oWith RF lenses, distortion correction during movie recording is supported.

oDistortion is corrected automatically when <8> mode is set to <q> and

correction data is registered on the camera.

125

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics

Digital Lens Optimizer

Various aberrations from lens optical characteristics can be corrected, along

with di󰀨raction and low-pass lter-induced loss of clarity.

If [Correction data not available] or [] is displayed by [Digital Lens

Optimizer], you can use EOS Utility to add the lens correction data to the

camera. For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.

oDepending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensied together with the

e󰀨ects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture

Style sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable] as needed

before shooting.

oThe higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.

oFor movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer] will not appear. (Correction is

not possible.)

oEnabling [Digital Lens Optimizer] corrects both chromatic aberration and

di󰀨raction, although these options are not displayed.

oDigital Lens Optimizer is applied automatically in Basic Zone modes when

correction data is registered on the camera.

126

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics

Chromatic Aberration Correction

Chromatic aberration (color fringing around subjects) can be corrected.

o[Chromatic aberr corr] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is

enabled.

Di󰀨raction Correction

Di󰀨raction (loss of sharpness caused by the aperture) can be corrected.

oDepending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensied together with the

e󰀨ects of correction.

oThe higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.

oFor movie recording, [Di󰀨raction correction] will not appear. (Correction is

not possible.)

oWith “Di󰀨raction correction”, degraded resolution due to the low-pass lter, etc.

is corrected in addition to di󰀨raction. Therefore, correction is e󰀨ective even at

an aperture close to the open aperture.

o[Di󰀨raction correction] is not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is

enabled.

127

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics

General Cautions for Lens Aberration Correction

oPeripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, distortion

correction, and di󰀨raction correction cannot be applied to JPEG images

already taken.

oWhen using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is

recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed.

oMagnifying the periphery of the image may display parts of the image that will

not be recorded.

oThe correction amount will be less (except for di󰀨raction correction) if the lens

used does not have distance information.

General Notes for Lens Aberration Correction

oThe e󰀨ect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens used

and shooting conditions. Also, the e󰀨ect may be di󰀩cult to discern depending

on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.

oIf the correction is di󰀩cult to discern, magnifying and checking the image after

shooting is recommended.

oCorrections can be applied even when an extender or life-size converter is

attached.

oIf the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the camera, the

result will be the same as when the correction is set to [Disable] (except for

di󰀨raction correction).

oIf necessary, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual as well.

128

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Desired Exposure

Compensation

Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken

(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.

Exposure compensation can be set in the <t>, <d>, <s>, <f>, and

<a> shooting modes. You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops

in 1/3-stop increments.

For details on exposure compensation when <a> mode and ISO Auto are

both set, see =103, and see =104 for <t> mode.

Check the exposure.

zPress the shutter button halfway and

check the exposure level indicator.

Increased exposure for a

brighter image

Decreased exposure for a

darker image

Set the compensation amount.

zSet it by looking at the screen as you

turn the <5> dial.

gA <O> icon is displayed to indicate

exposure compensation.

Take the picture.

zTo cancel exposure compensation, set

the exposure level indicator <N> to the

standard exposure index (<C>).

oIf [z: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (=136) is set to any setting other than

[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure

compensation for a darker image is set.

oThe exposure compensation amount will remain in e󰀨ect even after you set

the power switch to <2>.

129

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)

By changing the shutter speed, aperture, or ISO speed automatically, you

can bracket the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three

consecutive shots. This is called AEB.

* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.

Select [z: Expo.comp./AEB].

(1)

Set the AEB range.

zTurn the <6> dial to set the AEB

range (1). Press the <Y> <Z> keys to

set the exposure compensation level.

zPress <0> to set it.

gWhen you close the menu, the AEB

range will be displayed on the screen.

Standard exposure

Decreased exposure

Increased exposure

Take the picture.

zThree bracketed shots will be taken

according to the drive mode set in

this sequence: Standard exposure,

decreased exposure, and increased

exposure.

zAEB will not be automatically canceled.

To cancel AEB, follow step 2 to turn o󰀨

the AEB range display.

130

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)

oIf [z: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (=136) is set to any setting other than

[Disable], the e󰀨ect of AEB may be reduced.

o<A> blinks in the lower left of the screen during AEB shooting.

oIf the drive mode is set to , press the shutter button three times for each

shot. When <o> or is set and you hold down the shutter button

completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken consecutively and the

camera will automatically stop shooting. When <m> or <l> is set, the

three bracketed shots will be taken consecutively after a 10-sec. or 2-sec.

delay. When set to <q>, three times the specied number of shots are taken

in continuous shooting.

oYou can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.

oAEB cannot be used with ash, Multi Shot Noise Reduction, focusing

bracketing, or in HDR mode.

oAEB will be canceled automatically if you do any of the following: Setting the

power switch to <2> or when the ash is fully charged.

131

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos

Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient

light level. In Basic Zone modes, ISO speed is set automatically.

Regarding the ISO speed during movie recording, see =588.

Press the button (9).

zWith an image displayed on the screen,

press the button.

Select the ISO speed item.

zTurn the <5> dial to select the ISO

speed item.

Set the ISO speed.

zTurn the <6> dial to set it.

zISO speed can be set within ISO

100–40000 in 1/3-stop increments.

zSelect [AUTO] to set the ISO speed

automatically.

zFor details on the ISO Auto range, see

=582.

oTo expand the available ISO speed range from L (equivalent to ISO 50) to

H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) or H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400), adjust [ISO

speed range] under [z: zISO speed settings] (=133).

132

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos

ISO Speed Guide

zLow ISO speeds reduce image noise but may increase the risk of

camera/subject shake or reduce the area in focus (shallower depth of

eld), in some shooting conditions.

zHigh ISO speeds enable low-light shooting, a larger area in focus (deeper

depth of eld), and longer ash range but may increase image noise.

oAs H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) and H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) are

expanded ISO speed settings, noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) and irregular

colors will be more noticeable, and the resolution lower compared with the

standard setting.

oAs L (equivalent to ISO 50) is an expanded ISO speed setting, the dynamic

range will be somewhat narrower compared with the standard setting.

oIf [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced] (=137), L

(equivalent to ISO 50), ISO 100/125/160, H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and

H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) cannot be selected.

oWhen shooting with a high ISO speed, high temperature, long exposure, or

multiple exposure, image noise (rough grain, dots of light, banding, etc.),

irregular colors, or color shift may become noticeable.

oWhen shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise, such

as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long exposure,

images may not be recorded properly.

oIf you use a high ISO speed and ash to shoot a close subject, overexposure

may result.

133

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos

Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range

You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and

maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to ISO

50) to H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and the maximum limit within ISO 100

to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).

Select [z: z ISO speed settings].

Select [ISO speed range].

Set the minimum limit.

zSelect the minimum limit box, then press

<0>.

zSelect the ISO speed, then press

<0>.

Set the maximum limit.

zSelect the maximum limit box, then

press <0>.

zSelect the ISO speed, then press

<0>.

Select [OK].

134

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos

Setting the ISO Speed Range for ISO Auto

You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO

100–40000.

Select [Auto range].

Set the minimum limit.

zSelect the minimum limit box, then press

<0>.

zSelect the ISO speed, then press

<0>.

Set the maximum limit.

zSelect the maximum limit box, then

press <0>.

zSelect the ISO speed, then press

<0>.

Select [OK].

oThe [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also function as the minimum

and maximum speeds for ISO speed safety shift (=529).

135

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the ISO Speed for Still Photos

Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto

You can set the minimum shutter speed for ISO Auto.

This can help reduce camera shake and subject blur in <d> or <f>

mode when shooting moving subjects with a wide-angle lens, or when using

a telephoto lens.

Select [Min. shutter spd.].

Automatically set 2

Set the desired minimum shutter

speed.

zIf you select [Auto], turn the <6> dial

to set a slower or faster speed, then

press <0>.

Manually set

zIf you select [Manual], turn the <6>

dial to select the shutter speed, then

press <0>.

oIf a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed limit

set with [Auto range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min. shutter spd.] will

be set to obtain the standard exposure.

oThis function will not be applied to ash photography and movie recording.

oWhen [Auto(Standard)] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the

reciprocal of the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is

equivalent to a single stop of the shutter speed.

136

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Auto Correction of Brightness and

Contrast

Brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically if shots look dark or

contrast is too low or high. This function is called Auto Lighting Optimizer.

In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.

Select [z: Auto Lighting

Optimizer].

Set a correction option.

Take the picture.

gThe image will be recorded with the

brightness and contrast corrected as

necessary.

oNoise may increase and clarity may change, under some shooting conditions.

oIf the e󰀨ect of Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and results are not at your

preferred brightness, set to [Low] or [Disable].

oIf a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure compensation

or ash exposure compensation to darken the exposure, the image may still

come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set this function to [Disable].

oMaximum burst is lower with [High]. Image recording to the card also takes

longer.

oIn step 2, if you press the button and remove the checkmark [X] for

[Disabled in M or B modes] setting, the [z: Auto Lighting Optimizer] can

also be set even in <a> and <F> modes.

137

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Highlight Tone Priority

You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.

Select [z: Highlight tone priority].

Set an option.

z[Enable]: Improves gradation in

highlights. The dynamic range is

expanded from the standard 18% gray

to bright highlights. The gradation

between the grays and highlights

becomes smoother.

z[Enhanced]: Reduces overexposed

highlights even more than [Enable],

under some shooting conditions.

Take the picture.

gThe image will be recorded with highlight

tone priority applied.

oNoise may increase slightly.

oThe available ISO range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speeds cannot be

set.

o[Enhanced] is not available (not displayed) when recording movies.

oWith [Enhanced], results in some scenes may not look as expected.

138

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Metering Timer

You can set how long the metering timer runs (which determines the

duration of exposure display/AE lock) after it is triggered by an action such

as pressing the shutter button halfway.

Select [z: Metering timer].

Set a time option.

139

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Exposure Simulation

Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness (exposure)

of the actual image will look.

Select [z: Expo. simulation].

Set an option.

zEnable (g)

The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightness

(exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure compensation, the

image brightness will change accordingly.

zDuring e

Normally, the image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to

see (E). Image brightness will only be close to the actual brightness

(exposure) of the resulting image while you hold down the button you

have assigned to [Depth-of-eld preview] (using [8 C.Fn III-5:

Customize buttons], (=537)) (g).

zDisable (E)

The image is displayed at standard brightness, so it is easy to see. Even

if you set exposure compensation, the image is displayed at the standard

brightness.

140

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the White Balance

White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the

Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will obtain

the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with

Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it

manually by shooting a white object.

In Basic Zone modes, [Q] (Ambience priority) is set automatically. (In

mode, [Qw] (White priority) is set.)

Press the button (9).

zWith an image displayed on the screen,

press the button.

Select the white balance item.

zTurn the <5> dial to select the white

balance setting item.

Select a white balance setting.

zTurn the <6> dial to make a selection.

oFor [Q] and [Qw] setting instructions, see =142.

141

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the White Balance

(Approx.)

Display Mode Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)

QAuto (Ambience priority, =142) 3000–7000

QwAuto (White priority, =142)

WDaylight 5200

EShade 7000

RCloudy, twilight, sunset 6000

YTungsten light 3200

UWhite uorescent light 4000

DFlash Automatically set*

OCustom (=143) 2000–10000

PColor temperature (=144) 2500–10000

* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.

Otherwise, it will be xed to approx. 6000K.

White Balance

To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of

lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is decided

depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and then the color

is adjusted with software to make the white areas look white. With this

function, you can take the pictures with natural color tones.

142

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the White Balance

[Q] Auto White Balance

With [Q] (Ambience priority), you can slightly increase the intensity of the

image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you select

[Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the image’s warm

color cast.

If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS camera

models, select [Q] (Ambience priority).

Select [z: White balance].

Select [Q].

zWith [Q] selected, press the

button.

Select an item.

Cautions for Setting [Qw] (White priority)

oThe warm color cast of subjects may fade.

oWhen multiple light sources are included in the scene, the warm color cast of

the picture may not be reduced.

oWhen using ash, the color tone will be the same as with [Q] (Ambience

priority).

143

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the White Balance

[O] Custom White Balance

With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for

the specic light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform this

procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot.

Shoot a white object.

zAim the camera at a plain white subject,

so that white lls the screen.

zFocus manually and shoot with the

standard exposure set for the white

object.

zYou can use any of the white balance

settings.

Select [z: Custom White Balance].

Import the white balance data.

zPress the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

image captured in step 1, then press

<0>.

gSelect [OK] to import the data.

Select [z: White balance].

Select the custom white balance.

zSelect [O].

144

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the White Balance

oIf the exposure obtained in step 1 di󰀨ers greatly from the standard exposure, a

correct white balance may not be obtained.

oThe following images cannot be selected: Images captured with the Picture

Style set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure images, cropped images, and

images shot with another camera.

oInstead of shooting a white object, you can also shoot a gray chart or standard

18% gray reector (commercially available).

[P] Setting the Color Temperature

A value can be set representing the white balance color temperature.

Select [z: White balance].

Set the color temperature.

zSelect [P].

zTurn the <6> dial to set the desired

color temperature, then press <0>.

zThe color temperature can be set from

approx. 2500K to 10000K in 100K

increments.

oWhen setting the color temperature for an articial light source, set the white

balance correction (magenta or green bias) as necessary.

oIf you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially available color

temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate

for the di󰀨erence between the color temperature meter’s reading and the

camera’s color temperature reading.

145

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

White Balance Correction

You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have the

same e󰀨ect as using a commercially available color temperature conversion

lter or color compensating lter. Each color can be corrected to one of nine

levels.

White Balance Correction

Select [z: WB Shift/Bkt.].

Sample setting: A2, G1

Set the white balance correction.

zPress the <V> cross keys to move the

“■” mark to the appropriate position.

zB is for blue, A for amber, M for

magenta, and G for green. The image’s

color balance will be adjusted toward the

color in the direction of the move.

gOn the right of the screen, “Shift”

indicates the direction and correction

amount, respectively.

zPressing the <L> button will cancel all

the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.

zPress <0> to exit the setting.

oOne level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds

of a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Unit of measure for color

temperature used to indicate values such as the density of a color temperature

conversion lter.)

146

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

White Balance Correction

White Balance Auto Bracketing

White balance bracketing (WB Bkt.) enables you to capture three images

at once with di󰀨erent color tones. Based on the color temperature of the

current white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber

bias and magenta/green bias. White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3

levels in single-level increments.

B/A bias ±3 levels Set the white balance bracketing

amount.

zIn step 2 for “White Balance Correction”,

when you turn the <5> dial, the “■”

mark on the screen will change to “■ ■ ■” (3

points).

zTurning the dial clockwise sets

the B/A bracketing, and turning

it counterclockwise sets the M/G

bracketing.

gOn the right, “Bracket” indicates the

bracketing direction and correction

amount.

zPressing the <L> button will cancel all

the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.

zPress <0> to exit the setting.

oDuring white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting

will be lower.

oSince three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record the

image to the card.

oThe images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard white

balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard white balance,

2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.

oYou can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white

balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance

bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.

oThe white balance icon blinks when white balance bracketing is set.

o“Bracket” stands for bracketing.

147

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Color Space

The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this camera,

you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or Adobe RGB.

For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.

Select [z: Color space].

Set a color space option.

Adobe RGB

This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial

uses. Recommended when using equipment such as Adobe RGB-

compatible monitors or DCF 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or later) compatible printers.

oIf the still photo is shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the rst character in the

le name will be an underscore “_”.

oThe ICC prole is not appended. For the descriptions about the ICC prole,

refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (EOS software).

oIn Basic Zone modes, [sRGB] is set automatically.

148

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting a Picture Style

Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics

e󰀨ectively matching your photographic expression or the subject.

In Basic Zone modes, [D] (Auto) is set automatically.

Select [z: Picture Style].

Select a Picture Style.

149

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting a Picture Style

Picture Style Characteristics

z[D] Auto

The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors

will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature,

outdoor and sunset scenes.

oIf the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style.

z[P] Standard

The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose Picture

Style suitable for most scenes.

z[Q] Portrait

For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up portraits.

By changing the [Color tone] (=153), you can adjust the skin tone.

z[R] Landscape

For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. E󰀨ective for

impressive landscapes.

z[u] Fine Detail

Suited for detailed outline and ne texture description of the subject. The

colors will be slightly vivid.

z[S] Neutral

Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors and

subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.

150

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting a Picture Style

z[U] Faithful

Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a subject

that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K will be

adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For subdued images

with modest brightness and color saturation.

z[V] Monochrome

Creates black-and-white images.

oColor images cannot be recovered from JPEG images shot with the

[Monochrome] Picture Style.

z[W] User Dened 1–3

You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a Picture

Style le, etc. and adjust it as desired (=155). With any of the User

Dened Picture Style that has not yet been set, pictures will be taken with

the same characteristics settings as with the default settings of [Auto].

151

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting a Picture Style

Symbols

The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness], or

[Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other settings. The

numbers indicate the values for these settings specied for the respective

Picture Style.

Symbols

Sharpness

AStrength

BFineness

CThreshold

hContrast

iSaturation

jColor tone

kFilter e󰀨ect (Monochrome)

lToning e󰀨ect (Monochrome)

oDuring movie recording, an asterisk “*” will be displayed for both [Fineness]

and [Threshold] for [Sharpness]. [Fineness] and [Threshold] will not be

applied to movies.

152

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Customizing a Picture Style

You can customize the Picture Styles. You can adjust Picture Style

settings such as [Contrast] or [Sharpness] ([Strength], [Fineness], and

[Threshold]). To customize [Monochrome], see =154.

Select [z: Picture Style].

Select a Picture Style.

zSelect the Picture Style to adjust, then

press the button.

Select an item.

zSee the next page for details on the

settings and e󰀨ects.

153

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Customizing a Picture Style

Set the e󰀨ect level.

zPress the <M> button to save the

adjusted setting and return to the Picture

Style selection screen.

gAny settings you change from default

values are displayed in blue.

Settings and E󰀨ects

Sharpness

AStrength 0: Weak outline emphasis 7: Strong outline emphasis

BFineness*11: Fine 5: Grainy

CThreshold*21: Low 5: High

hContrast -4: Low contrast +4: High contrast

iSaturation -4: Low saturation +4: High saturation

jColor tone -4: Reddish skin tone +4: Yellowish skin tone

*1: Indicates the neness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the number,

the ner the outlines that can be emphasized.

*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast

between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the more

the outline will be emphasized when the contrast di󰀨erence is low. However, noise

tends to be more noticeable when the number is smaller.

oFor movie recording, [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] cannot be

set (not displayed).

oBy selecting [Default set.] in step 3, you can revert the parameter settings of

the respective Picture Style to their defaults.

oTo shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, rst select the adjusted Picture

Style, then shoot.

154

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Customizing a Picture Style

[V] Monochrome Adjustment

Besides the e󰀨ects described on the preceding page such as [Contrast], or

[Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness], you can also set

[Filter e󰀨ect] and [Toning e󰀨ect].

[k] Filter e󰀨ect

With a lter e󰀨ect applied to a monochrome

image, you can make white clouds or green

trees stand out more.

Filter Sample E󰀨ects

N: None Normal black-and-white image with no lter e󰀨ects.

Ye: Yellow The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look

crisper.

Or: Orange The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more

brilliant.

R: Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and

brighter.

G: Green Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look

crisper and brighter.

oIncreasing the [Contrast] will make the lter e󰀨ect more pronounced.

[l] Toning e󰀨ect

By applying a toning e󰀨ect, you can create

a monochrome image in the selected color.

E󰀨ective when you want to create more

impressive images.

155

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Registering a Picture Style

You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],

adjust it as desired, and register it under [User Def. 1], [User Def. 2], or

[User Def. 3]. Useful when creating several Picture Styles with di󰀨erent

settings.

Picture Styles that you have registered on the camera using EOS Utility (EOS

software) can also be modied here.

Select [z: Picture Style].

Select [User Def.].

zSelect [User Def. *], then press the

button.

Press <0>.

zWith [Picture Style] selected, press

<0>.

Select the base Picture Style.

zSelect the base Picture Style.

zAlso select styles this way when

adjusting styles registered to the camera

with EOS Utility (EOS software).

156

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Registering a Picture Style

Select an item.

Set the e󰀨ect level.

zFor details, see “Customizing a Picture

Style” (=152).

zPress the <M> button to save the

adjusted setting and return to the Picture

Style selection screen.

gThe base Picture Style will be indicated

on the right of [User Def. *].

gBlue style names indicate that you

have changed the settings from default

values.

oIf a Picture Style is already registered under [User Def. *], changing the base

Picture Style will clear the parameter settings of the previously registered User

Dened Picture Style.

oIf you perform [5: Clear all camera settings] (=410), all the [User Def. *]

settings will revert to their defaults.

oTo shoot with a registered Picture Style, select the registered [User Def. *],

then shoot.

oRegarding the procedure to register a Picture Style le to the camera, refer to

the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.

157

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Noise Reduction

High ISO Speed Noise Reduction

This function reduces the noise generated in the image. This function is

especially e󰀨ective when shooting at high ISO speeds. When shooting at

low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas)

can further be reduced.

Select [z: High ISO speed NR].

Set the level.

z[M] Multi Shot Noise Reduction

Applies the noise reduction with higher image quality than [High]. For a

single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned and merged

automatically into a single JPEG image.

If the image quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you cannot set [Multi

Shot Noise Reduction].

Take the picture.

gThe image will be recorded with noise

reduction applied.

158

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Noise Reduction

Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction

oIf there is signicant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the

noise reduction e󰀨ect may become smaller.

oIf you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake.

Using a tripod is recommended.

oIf you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages.

oAuto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,

stripes, etc.) or at, single-tone images.

oIf the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are taken,

irregular exposure in the image may result.

oAfter shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card after

performing noise reduction and merging the images. [BUSY] is displayed

as images are processed, and shooting is not possible until processing is

nished.

o[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available with bulb shooting, shooting

with AEB or WB bracketing, shooting RAW or RAW+JPEG images, or with

features such as long exposure noise reduction, multiple exposures, or HDR

mode.

oFlash photography is not possible. Note that the AF-assist beam of EOS-

dedicated, external Speedlites will be emitted according to the [z: AF-assist

beam ring] setting.

o[Multi Shot Noise Reduction] is not available (not displayed) when recording

movies.

oAutomatically switches to [Standard] if you set the power switch to <2>,

replace the battery or card, switch to a Basic Zone or shooting mode, or

switch to movie recording.

159

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Noise Reduction

Long Exposure Noise Reduction

For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and banding)

typical of long exposures can be reduced.

Select [z: Long exp. noise

reduction].

Set a reduction option.

z[AUTO] Automatic

For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed

automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [Auto]

setting is e󰀨ective enough in most cases.

z[ON] Enable

Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The

[Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with the [Auto]

setting.

Take the picture.

gThe image will be recorded with noise

reduction applied.

160

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Noise Reduction

oWith [Auto] or [Enable] set, the noise reduction process after the picture is

taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure.

oImages may look grainier with the [Enable] setting than with the [Disable] or

[Auto] setting.

o[BUSY] is displayed as noise is reduced, and the shooting screen is not

displayed until processing is nished, when you can shoot again.

161

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Appending Dust Delete Data

Dust Delete Data used to erase dust spots can be appended to images in

case sensor cleaning leaves dust on the sensor. The Dust Delete Data is

used by Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase the dust spots

automatically.

Preparation

zUse an RF or EF lens.

zPrepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.

zSet the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.

zSet the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to innity (∞).

If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to face toward you

and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.

Obtaining the Dust Delete Data

Select [z: Dust Delete Data].

Select [OK].

gAfter the automatic self-cleaning of

the sensor is performed, a message

will appear. Although there will be a

mechanical sound of the shutter during

the cleaning, no picture is taken.

162

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Appending Dust Delete Data

Shoot a plain white object.

zShoot with a plain white object (such

as a new sheet of white paper) lling

the screen, at a distance of 20–30 cm

(0.7–1.0 ft.).

zSince the image will not be saved, the

data can still be obtained even if there is

no card in the camera.

gWhen the picture is taken, the camera

will start collecting the Dust Delete Data.

When the Dust Delete Data is obtained,

a message will appear.

zIf the data is not obtained successfully,

an error message will appear. Follow

the “Preparation” procedure on the

preceding page, then select [OK]. Take

the picture again.

Dust Delete Data

The camera will append the Dust Delete Data obtained to all shots from

now on. Acquiring Dust Delete Data before shooting is recommended.

For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to erase

dust spots automatically, refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction

Manual.

File size is essentially una󰀨ected by Dust Delete Data appended to images.

oDust Delete Data is not obtained when EF-S lenses are used, or when [z:

zCropping/aspect ratio] is set to [1.6x (crop)].

oIf the object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and

a󰀨ect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS

software).

163

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shooting with the Touch Shutter

Just by tapping on the screen, you can focus and take the picture

automatically.

Enable the Touch Shutter.

zTap [y] on the screen’s bottom left.

zEach time you tap on the icon, it will

toggle between [y] and [x].

z[x] (Touch Shutter: Enable)

The camera will focus on the spot you

tap on, then the picture will be taken.

z[y] (Touch Shutter: Disable)

You can tap on a spot to perform

focusing on the spot. Press the shutter

button completely to take the picture.

Tap on the screen to shoot.

zTap on the face or subject on the screen.

gOn the point you tap, the camera will

focus (Touch AF) with the AF method

that was set (=188).

gWhen [x] is set, the AF point turns

green when focus is achieved, then the

picture is taken automatically.

gIf focus is not achieved, the AF point

turns orange and the picture cannot be

taken. Tap on the face or subject on the

screen again.

164

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Shooting with the Touch Shutter

oEven if you set the drive mode to <o> or , the camera will still shoot

in the single shooting mode.

oEven if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], tapping on the screen will focus

on the image with [One-Shot AF].

oTapping on the screen in magnied view will not focus or take the picture.

oIf you shoot by tapping on the screen with [z: Image review] set to [Hold],

you can press the shutter button halfway to take the next shot.

oTo shoot with bulb exposure, tap on the screen twice. The rst tap on

the screen will start the bulb exposure. Tapping it again will stop the bulb

exposure. Be careful not to shake the camera when tapping on the screen.

165

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Multiple Exposures

As you shoot multiple exposures (2–9), you can see how the images will be

merged into a single image.

Select [z: Multiple exposure].

Set a [Multiple exposure] option.

zSelect [Enable].

zTo exit shooting multiple exposures,

select [Disable].

Set [Multi-expos ctrl].

zAdditive

The exposure of each single image captured is added cumulatively.

Based on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure

compensation. Follow the basic guide below to set the exposure

compensation amount.

Exposure Compensation Setting Guide by Number of Exposures

Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures: -2

stops

zAverage

Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation is

set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot multiple

exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s background

will be automatically controlled to obtain the standard exposure.

166

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Multiple Exposures

Set the [No. of exposures].

zSelect the number of exposures, then

press <0>.

zYou can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.

Set a [Continue Mult-exp] option.

zWith [1 shot only], multiple-exposure

shooting will be canceled automatically

after the shooting ends.

zWith [Continuously], multiple-exposure

shooting continues until the setting in

step 2 is set to [Disable].

(1)

Shoot the rst exposure.

gThe captured image will be displayed.

zIn (1) on the screen, you can check the

number of exposures left.

zPressing the <x> button enables you

to view the captured image (=169).

Shoot the next exposures.

zImages captured so far are displayed

merged. For image-only display, press

the button repeatedly.

zMultiple-exposure shooting will end

when the set number of exposures are

taken.

oMultiple-exposure shooting may not be possible with some lenses.

oThe shooting information for the last shot will be recorded and appended to

the multiple-exposure image.

167

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Multiple Exposures

oThe image quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction,

color space, etc. set for the rst single exposure will also be set for the

subsequent exposures.

oIf [z: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for shooting.

oWith multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more noticeable

the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be.

oIf [Additive] is set, the image processing after taking the multiple exposures

will take time. (The access lamp will light up longer.)

oIn step 7, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image displayed

during shooting will be di󰀨erent from those of the nal multiple-exposure

image recorded.

oMultiple-exposure shooting is canceled if you set the power switch to <2>

or switch batteries or cards.

oMultiple-exposure shooting ends if you switch to a Basic Zone mode or to

<w/x/y>.

168

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Multiple Exposures

Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the

Card

You can select a RAW image recorded on the card as the rst single

exposure. The image data of the selected RAW image will remain intact.

Only 1 or F images can be used. JPEG images cannot be

selected. Images you can specify also vary depending on the lens attached.

For details, see the table below.

Select [Select image for multi.

expo.].

Select the rst image.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

rst image, then press <0>.

zSelect [OK].

gThe le number of the selected image

will be displayed at the bottom of the

screen.

Take the picture.

zWhen you select the rst image, the

number of remaining exposures as set

with [No. of exposures] will decrease

by 1.

zImages You Can Select

Lens Attached Cropped

Shooting Selectable Images

RF/

EF lens

O󰀨 RAW images captured at full size

On RAW images from cropped shooting or taken with an

EF-S lens

EF-S lens –

oThese images cannot be selected as the rst single exposure: Images

captured with [z: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] or [Enhanced], or

images captured with [z: zCropping/aspect ratio] not set to [Full-frame]

or [1.6x (crop)].

o[Disable] is applied for [z: Lens aberration correction] and [z: Auto

Lighting Optimizer] regardless of the settings of the image selected as the

rst single exposure.

169

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Multiple Exposures

oThe ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, color space,

etc. set for the rst image will also be applied for the subsequent images.

oIf Picture Style is [Auto] for the image selected as the rst image, [Standard]

will be applied for shooting.

oYou cannot select an image taken with another camera.

oImages captured using lenses incompatible with multiple-exposure shooting

cannot be selected (as the rst single exposure).

o[Select image for multi. expo.] is not available unless a lens is attached.

oYou can also select a RAW image used in multiple-exposure shooting.

oSelect [Deselect img] to cancel image selection.

Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting

Before you nish shooting your specied

number of exposures, you can press the

<x> button to view the multiple-exposure

image so far, check exposure, and see how

the images will be merged.

Pressing the <L> button will display

the operations possible during multiple-

exposure shooting.

Operation Description

2 Return to previous

screen

The screen before you pressed the <L> button will

reappear.

q Undo last image Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another image). The

number of remaining exposures will increase by 1.

W Save and exit Saves shots up to that point as a multiple-exposure image

and exits multiple-exposure shooting.

r Exit without saving The multiple-exposure shooting will end without saving the

image.

oDuring multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multiple-exposure

images.

170

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Multiple Exposures

FAQ

zAre there any restrictions on the image quality?

All single exposures and the multiple-exposure image are captured at

your specied image quality.

zCan I merge images recorded on the card?

With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the rst single

exposure from the images recorded on the card (=168). Note that you

cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.

zWill auto power o󰀨 take e󰀨ect during multiple-exposure

shooting?

As long as [Auto power o󰀨] under [5: Power saving] is not set to

[Disable], the camera automatically turns o󰀨 after approx. 30 min., which

ends multiple-exposure shooting and cancels multiple-exposure settings.

171

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reduced for a

high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is

e󰀨ective for landscape and still-life shots.

With HDR shooting, three images of di󰀨erent exposures (standard

exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured

consecutively for each shot and then merged together automatically.

The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.

* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.

Select [z: HDR Mode].

Set [Adjust dyn range].

zSelecting [Auto] will have the dynamic

range set automatically depending on

the image’s overall tonal range.

zThe higher the number, the wider the

dynamic range will be.

zTo exit HDR shooting, select [Disable

HDR].

Set [E󰀨ect].

172

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

E󰀨ects

z[P] Natural

For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and

shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and shadows

will be reduced.

z[A] Art standard

While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than with

[Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation atter to have the

picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark)

edges.

z[B] Art vivid

The colors are more saturated than with [Art standard], and the low

contrast and at gradation create a graphic art e󰀨ect.

z[C] Art bold

The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and the

picture looks like an oil painting.

z[D] Art embossed

The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are decreased to

make the picture look at. The picture looks faded and old. The subject

outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.

Art standard Art vivid Art bold Art embossed

Saturation Standard High Higher Low

Outline

emphasis Standard Weak Strong Stronger

Brightness Standard Standard Standard Dark

Tone Flat Flat Flat Flatter

oEach e󰀨ect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style

currently set (=148).

173

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

Set a [Continuous HDR] option.

zWith [1 shot only], HDR shooting will

be canceled automatically after the

shooting ends.

zWith [Every shot], HDR shooting

continues until the setting in step 2 is set

to [Disable HDR].

Set [Auto Image Align].

zFor handheld shooting, select [Enable].

When using a tripod, select [Disable].

Take the picture.

zWhen you press the shutter button

completely, three consecutive images

will be captured, and the HDR image will

be recorded to the card.

174

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

oRAW HDR images are captured in JPEG 73 image quality. RAW+JPEG HDR

images are captured in the specied JPEG image quality.

oHDR shooting is not possible with expanded ISO speeds (L, H1, H2). HDR

shooting is possible within ISO 100–40000 (varies depending on the settings

of [Minimum] and [Maximum] for [ISO speed range]).

oThe ash will not re during HDR shooting.

oAEB is not available.

oIf you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave afterimages.

oIn HDR shooting, three images are captured with di󰀨erent shutter speeds set

automatically. For this reason, even in <t>, <s>, and <a> modes, the

shutter speed will change, relative to your specied speed.

oTo prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.

175

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

oWhen shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable], AF

point display information (=352) and Dust Delete Data (=161) will not be

appended to the image.

oIf you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to

[Enable], image periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution will be slightly

lowered. Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to camera shake,

etc., auto image alignment may not take e󰀨ect. Note that when shooting with

excessively bright (or dark) exposure settings, auto image alignment may not

work properly.

oIf you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to

[Disable], the three images may not be properly aligned and the HDR e󰀨ect

may be reduced. Using a tripod is recommended.

oAuto image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice,

stripes, etc.) or at, single-tone images.

oThe color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced correctly.

Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.

oHDR shooting under uorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural color

reproduction of the illuminated areas.

oWith HDR shooting, the images will be merged, then saved to the card,

so it may take some time. [BUSY] appears on the screen as images are

processed, and shooting is not possible until processing is nished.

176

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Interval Timer Shooting

With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and number of

shots, so that the camera takes individual shots repeatedly according to

your interval until your specied number of shots are taken.

Select [z: Interval timer].

Select [Enable].

zSelect [Enable], then press the

button.

Set the shooting interval and

number of shots.

zSelect an item to set (hours : minutes :

seconds / number of shots).

zPress <0> to display <r>.

zSet the desired number, then press

<0>. (Returns to <s>.)

zInterval

Can be set in a range of [00:00:01]–[99:59:59].

zNumber of shots

Can be set in a range of [01]–[99]. To keep the interval timer on

indenitely until you stop it, set [00].

177

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Interval Timer Shooting

(1) (2)

Select [OK].

gThe interval timer settings will be

displayed on the menu screen.

(1) Interval

(2) Number of shots

Take the picture.

gFirst shot is taken and shooting

continues according to the interval timer

settings.

zDuring interval timer shooting, <H>

will blink.

zAfter the set number of shots are taken,

the interval timer shooting will stop and

be automatically canceled.

oUsing a tripod is recommended.

oTaking test shots in advance is recommended.

oEven during interval timer shooting, you can still shoot as usual by pressing

the shutter button completely. Note that the camera will prepare for the next

interval timer shot approx. 5 sec. in advance, which will temporarily prevent

operations such as adjusting shooting settings, accessing menus, and playing

back images.

oIf the next scheduled interval timer shot is not possible because the camera is

shooting or processing images, it will be skipped. For this reason, fewer shots

than specied will be taken.

oEven during interval timer operation, auto power o󰀨 is triggered after approx.

8 sec. of inactivity, as long as [Auto power o󰀨] under [5: Power saving]

is not set to [Disable]. The camera will automatically turn on again approx.

1 min. before the next shot.

oCan also be combined with AEB, white balance bracketing, multiple

exposures, and HDR mode.

oTo stop interval timer shooting, select [Disable] or set the power switch to

<2>.

178

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Interval Timer Shooting

oDo not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an

intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the

camera’s internal components.

oSetting the lens focus mode switch to <AF> prevents the camera from

shooting unless subjects are in focus. Setting it to <MF> and focusing

manually before shooting is recommended.

oWhen shooting over an extended period, consider using an optional household

power outlet accessory.

oShooting long exposures or using shutter speeds longer than the shooting

interval will prevent shooting at the specied interval. For this reason, fewer

shots than specied will be taken. Using shutter speeds nearly the same as

the shooting interval may also reduce the number of shots.

oIf the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to

the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be

taken with the set intervals.

oWhen using ash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than the

ash charge time. Intervals that are too short may prevent the ash from ring.

oIntervals that are too short may prevent shooting or autofocusing.

oInterval timer shooting will be canceled and reset to [Disable] if you set the

power switch to <2>, set the shooting mode to <w/x/y>, or use EOS

Utility (EOS software).

oDuring interval timer shooting, you cannot use remote control shooting

(=217) or remote-release shooting with a Speedlite.

179

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Reducing Flicker

If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such

as uorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes icker and the

image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used

under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may

result. Anti-icker shooting enables you to take pictures when exposure and

colors are less a󰀨ected by ickering.

Select [z: Anti-icker shoot.].

Select [Enable].

Take the picture.

zAfter setting to [Enable], or when the

light source changes, detect icker

before shooting by pressing the <Q>

button, selecting [Anti-icker shoot.],

then pressing the button.

zThe picture will be taken with reduced

unevenness of exposure or color tone

caused by the icker.

oWith [Enable] set, the shutter-release time lag is longer when you shoot under

a ickering light source. Also, the continuous shooting speed may become

slower, and the shooting interval may become irregular.

oFlicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.

Also, if the ickering frequency of the light source changes during continuous

shooting, e󰀨ects of the icker cannot be reduced.

180

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Reducing Flicker

oIn the <t>, <d>, or <f> mode, if the shutter speed changes during

continuous shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at

di󰀨erent shutter speeds, the color tone may become inconsistent. To avoid

inconsistent color tones, use <t>, <d>, or <f> mode at a xed shutter

speed.

oColor tone of captured images may vary between [Enable] and [Disable].

oShutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed may change when you start shooting

(even with AE lock).

oIf the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in the

image, icker may not be properly detected.

oFlicker reduction may not be possible under special lighting.

oDepending on the light source, icker may not be detected properly.

oDepending on the light sources or shooting conditions, the expected result

may not be obtained even if you use this function.

oTaking test shots in advance is recommended.

oDetect icker manually if the screen ickers (as when the light source

changes) by pressing the <Q> button, selecting [Anti-icker shoot.], then

pressing the button.

oFlicker is not reduced in Basic Zone modes.

oFlicker reduction also works with ash photography. However, the expected

result may not be obtained for wireless ash photography.

181

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the Display Speed for High-

Speed Continuous Shooting

High-speed display that switches between your shot and the live image

is available when shooting with an RF lens, with [z: AF operation]

set to [Servo AF], and with the drive mode set to <o> [High speed

continuous]. Display is more responsive, making it easier to follow fast-

moving subjects.

Select [z: High speed

display].

Select an item.

zSelect [Enable] for display that switches

between each shot and the live image.

oImages may waver or icker during high-speed display. This occurs more often

at high shutter speeds. However, this does not a󰀨ect shooting results.

oHigh-speed display is not performed under the following conditions. It may

also stop as you are shooting.

• Shutter speed slower than 1/30 sec., aperture larger than f/11, conditions

that make autofocusing di󰀩cult, and ash photography, and ISO expansion

o[Enable] is available when all of these conditions apply.

• With an RF lens, [AF operation] set to [Servo AF] (=185), drive mode

set to [High speed continuous] (=206), [Anti-flicker shoot.] set to

[Disable] (=179), [Expo. simulation] set to [Enable] (=139)

182

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Card Reminder

You can set the camera not to shoot unless there is a card in the camera.

The default setting is [Enable].

Select [z: Release shutter without

card].

Select [Disable].

183

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Touch & Drag AF

You can move the AF point or Zone AF frame by touching or dragging on

the screen as you look through the viewnder.

Enabling Touch & Drag AF

Select [z: Touch & drag AF

settings].

Select [Touch & drag AF].

zSelect [Enable].

Positioning Method

You can set how positions are specied by touching or dragging.

Set the positioning method.

z[Absolute]

The AF point moves to the touched or dragged position on the screen.

z[Relative]

The AF point moves in the direction you drag, by an amount

corresponding to the amount you drag, no matter where you touch the

screen.

184

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Touch & Drag AF

Active Touch Area

You can specify the area of the screen used for touch and drag operations.

Set the active touch area.

oTouching the screen when [u+Tracking] is set displays a round orange frame

<>. After you lift your nger at the position to move the AF point to, < > is

displayed and that subject is tracked. To cancel subject selection, press the

<L> button.

185

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Operation

You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting

conditions or subject.

Select [z: AF operation].

Select an item.

oIf focus cannot be achieved, the AF point will turn orange. If this occurs, the

picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely.

Recompose the shot and try to focus again. Or, see “Shooting Conditions that

Make Focusing Di󰀩cult” (=197).

186

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Operation

One-Shot AF for Still Subjects (ONE SHOT)

Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway,

the camera will focus only once.

zWhen focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will

sound.

zThe focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button halfway,

allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture.

zFor details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting,

see =206.

oIf [5: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus is

achieved.

Servo AF for Moving Subjects (SERVO)

This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down

the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the

subject continuously.

zWhen focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue.

zThe exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.

zFor details on the continuous shooting speed for continuous shooting,

see =206.

oDepending on the lens used, the distance to the subject and the subject’s

speed, the camera may not be able to achieve correct focus.

oZooming during continuous shooting may throw o󰀨 the focus. Zoom rst, then

recompose and shoot.

oWith Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.

oIn <A> mode, by default, the camera automatically switches to Servo AF in

response to subject movement. If you normally prefer to shoot with One-Shot

AF, set [z: A Auto servo] to [Disable].

187

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Operation

AF-Assist Beam

The AF-assist beam may re repeatedly when you press the shutter button

halfway under low light or in similar conditions, to make autofocusing easier.

oThe AF-assist beam does not re when [z: AF operation] is set to [Servo

AF].

oThe AF-assist beam does not re when Touch AF is used (when [z: Touch

Shutter] is set to [Disable]).

oWhen you are using an external ash unit, either the camera or the ash unit

res an AF-assist beam as needed. However, only the camera’s AF-assist

beam res when you are using a Speedlite 90EX, Macro Ring Lite, or Macro

Twin Lite.

oA small series of ashes is red even if you set the external ash’s AF-assist

beam emission method in the Personal Functions to infrared AF-assist beam

ring. To disable AF-assist beam ring, set [z: AF-assist beam ring] to

[Disable] (=201).

oFocus range with the AF-assist beam is generally no more than 3.5 m/11.5 ft.

188

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Method

You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject. The

camera attempts to focus on faces of any people in an AF point or Zone AF

frame. In <A> mode, [u+Tracking] is set automatically.

For instructions on selecting an AF method, see =190.

AF Method

: Face+Tracking

The camera detects and focuses on

people's faces. (an AF point) appears

over any face detected, which is then

tracked.

If no face is detected, the entire AF area is used for auto selection AF.

With Servo AF, you can set the initial position for Servo AF (=192). As

long as the Area AF frame can track the subject during shooting, focusing

will continue.

: Spot AF

The camera focuses in a narrower area

than 1-point AF.

: 1-point AF

The camera focuses using a single AF

point <S>.

189

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Method

: Expand AF area (Z)

Focusing uses one AF point <S> and

points above, below, and to the left and

right <w>. E󰀨ective for moving subjects,

which are di󰀩cult to track with 1-point AF.

Focusing on your preferred subject is easier than with Zone AF.

When Servo AF is used, rst you will focus using an AF point <S>.

: Expand AF area: Around

Focusing uses one AF point <S> and

surrounding points <w>, which makes it

easier to focus on moving subjects than

with Z AF point expansion.

Servo AF operation is the same as for Z

AF point expansion.

: Zone AF

Uses auto selection AF in Zone AF frames

to cover a larger area than AF point

expansion, which makes focusing easier

than with AF point expansion.

Prioritizes focusing on the nearest subject. Faces of any people in the Zone

AF frame are also given priority in focusing.

AF points in focus are displayed with <S>.

190

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Method

You can select the AF method to suit the shooting conditions or subject.

If you prefer to focus manually, see =214.

Select [z: AF method].

Select an item.

oIn <A> mode, [u+Tracking] is set automatically.

oIn <r> mode, only [1-point AF] or [Zone AF] can be set.

oOnly [u+Tracking] and [1-point AF] are available when 4K movie recording

is set.

oTo set the AF method, you can also access the AF method screen by pressing

the <S> button and then the button.

oThe descriptions on =191–=194 assume that [z: AF operation] is set

to [One-Shot AF] (=186). With [Servo AF] (=186) set, the AF point will

turn blue when focus is achieved.

oRegarding the Touch Shutter (AF and shutter release by touch operation), see

=163.

191

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Method

zu(face)+Tracking: c

The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the

AF point also moves to track the face.

Check the AF point.

g (an AF point) appears over any

face detected.

zYou can choose a face with the <Y>

<Z> keys when <h> appears after

you press the <S> button.

Focus on the subject.

zOnce you press the shutter button

halfway and the subject is in focus, the

AF point turns green and the camera

beeps twice.

gAn orange AF point indicates that the

camera could not focus on subjects.

Take the picture.

192

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Method

Tapping a Face for Focus

Tapping a face or subject to focus on changes the AF point to < > and

focuses where you tap.

Even if the face or subject moves on the screen, the AF point < > moves to

track it.

oIf the subject’s face is signicantly out of focus, face detection will not be

possible. Adjust the focus manually (=214) so that the face can be detected,

then perform AF.

oAn object other than a human face may be detected as a face.

oFace detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the picture, too

bright or too dark, or partially hidden.

oAF cannot detect subjects or people’s faces at the edges of the screen.

Recompose the shot to center the subject or bring the subject closer to the

center.

oThe may cover only a part of the face, not the whole face.

oThe size of the AF point changes depending on the subject.

Setting the Initial Servo AF Position

1. Set [8 C.Fn II-7: Initial Servo AF pt for c] to an option other than

[Automatic].

2. An Area AF frame (1) and AF point (2) are displayed.

(2)

(1)

3. Press the <S> button, then turn the <6> or <5> dial to move the

AF point to the position to focus on. You can also move the AF point by

touching the screen or pressing the <V> cross keys. Pressing the <L>

button will return the AF point to the screen center.

4. Press <0> to set the current position as the starting position for Servo

AF.

193

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Method

zSpot AF / 1-point AF / Expand AF area (Z) / Expand AF area:

Around / Zone AF

You can manually set the AF point or Zone AF frame. Here, 1-point AF

screens are used as an example.

(1)

Check the AF point.

gThe AF point (1) will appear.

zWith Expand AF area (Z) or Expand

AF area: Around, adjacent AF points are

also displayed.

zWith Zone AF, the Zone AF frame is

displayed.

Move the AF point.

zPress the <S> button.

zMove the AF point to where you want

to focus by turning the <6> dial to

move horizontally or <5> dial to move

vertically. (With some lenses, it may not

go to the edge of the screen.)

zYou can also move the AF point by

touching the screen or pressing the

<V> cross keys.

zTo center the AF point or Zone AF frame,

press the <L> button.

zTo magnify display, press the

button. Each press of the button

changes the magnication ratio.

194

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Method

Focus on the subject.

zAim the AF point over the subject and

press the shutter button halfway.

gWhen focus is achieved, the AF point

will turn green and the beeper will

sound.

gIf focus is not achieved, the AF point will

turn orange.

Take the picture.

oThe camera will keep moving the active AF point <S> to track subjects

for Zone AF when Servo AF operation is used, but under some shooting

conditions (such as when subjects are small), it may not be possible to track

the subject.

oFocusing may be di󰀩cult when using a peripheral AF point. In this case, select

an AF point in the center.

oWith [8C.Fn II-6: Orientation linked AF point], you can set separate AF

points for vertical and horizontal shooting (=534).

195

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Method

Magnied View

You can check the focus by magnifying display by approx. 5× or 10×.

Magnied view is not possible with [u+Tracking].

zMagnication is centered on the AF point for [Spot AF], [1-point AF],

[Expand AF area (Z)], and [Expand AF area: Around] and is centered

on the Zone AF frame for [Zone AF].

zAutofocusing is performed with magnied display if you press the shutter

button halfway when set to [1-point AF], and [Spot AF]. When set to

other AF methods, autofocusing is performed after restoring normal

display.

zWith Servo AF, if you press the shutter button halfway in the magnied

view, the camera will return to the normal view for focusing.

oIf focusing is di󰀩cult in the magnied view, return to the normal view and

perform AF.

oIf you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnied view,

accurate focus may not be achieved.

oAF speed di󰀨ers between normal view and magnied view.

oContinuous AF and Movie Servo AF are not available when display is

magnied.

oWith the magnied view, achieving focus becomes more di󰀩cult due to

camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.

196

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Method

Notes for AF

AF Operation

zEven when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will

focus again.

zImage brightness may change during autofocusing.

zDepending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to

focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease.

zIf the light source changes as you shoot, the screen may icker, and

focusing may be di󰀩cult. In this case, restart the camera and resume

shooting with AF under the light source you will use.

oIf focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually (=214).

oFor subjects at the edge of the screen that are slightly out of focus, try

centering the subject (or AF point, or Zone AF frame) to bring them into focus,

then recompose the shot before shooting.

oWith certain lenses, it may take more time to achieve focus with autofocus, or

accurate focusing may not be achieved.

197

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the AF Method

Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Di󰀩cult

zSubject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color at surfaces or

when highlight or shadow details are clipped.

zSubjects in low light.

zStripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal

direction.

zSubjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,

computer keyboards, etc.).

zFine lines and subject outlines.

zUnder a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps changing.

zNight scenes or points of light.

zThe image ickers under uorescent or LED lighting.

zExtremely small subjects.

zSubjects at the edge of the screen.

zStrongly backlit or reective subjects (Example: Car with a highly

reective body, etc.).

zNear and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal in a

cage, etc.).

zSubjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still due to

camera shake or subject blur.

zPerforming AF when the subject is very far out of focus.

zSoft focus e󰀨ect is applied with a soft focus lens.

zA special e󰀨ect lter is used.

zNoise (dots of light, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.

AF Range

The available autofocus range varies depending on the lens and aspect

ratio used and whether you are recording 4K movies or using features such

as Movie cropping or Movie digital IS.

198

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Focusing on People’s Eyes

With the AF method set to [u+Tracking], you can shoot with the subject’s

eyes in focus.

Select [z: Eye Detection AF].

Select [Enable].

Aim the camera at the subject.

n AF point is displayed around their eye.

zYou can tap the screen to select an eye

for focus.

Eyes to focus on are selected

automatically.

zDepending on the [Eye Detection AF]

setting, you can choose an eye or face

for focus with the <Y> <Z> keys when

<> appears after you press the <S>

button.

Take the picture.

oSubject eyes may not be detected correctly, depending on the subject and

shooting conditions.

oTo disable Eye Detection AF without using menu operations, press these

buttons, one after another: <S>, , and . To resume Eye

Detection AF, press the button again.

199

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Continuous AF

This function keeps subjects generally in focus. The camera is ready to

focus immediately when you press the shutter button halfway.

Select [z: Continuous AF].

Select [Enable].

oEnabling this function reduces the number of shots available, because the

lens is driven continuously and battery power is consumed.

200

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Lens Electronic MF

For RF, EF, or EF-S lenses equipped with electronic manual focusing, you

can specify how manual focus adjustment is used with One-Shot AF.

Select [z: Lens electronic MF].

Select an item.

z[] Disable after One-Shot

Manual focus adjustment after the AF operation is disabled.

z[] One-Shot→enabled

You can manually adjust the focus after the AF operation if you keep

holding down the shutter button halfway.

z[] One-Shot→enabled (magnify)

After the AF operation, you can keep holding down the shutter button

halfway as you turn the lens focusing ring to magnify the area in focus

and manually adjust the focus.

z[ ] Disable in AF mode

Manual focus adjustment is disabled when the lens’s focus mode switch

is set to <AF>.

oWith [One-Shot→enabled (magnify)], display may not be magnied even

if you turn the lens focusing ring while pressing the shutter button halfway

immediately after shooting. If so, you can magnify display by releasing the

shutter button, waiting for display, then pressing the shutter button

halfway as you turn the lens focusing ring.

oFor details on your lens’s manual focus specications, refer to the lens

instruction manual.

201

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting AF-Assist Beam Firing

You can specify how the AF-assist beam is used on the camera or a

Speedlite.

Select [z: AF-assist beam ring].

Select an item.

z[ON] Enable

Enables ring of the AF-assist beam, when needed.

z[OFF] Disable

Disables ring of the AF-assist beam. Set if you prefer not to re AF-

assist beams from the camera and external ash units.

z[LED] LED AF assist beam onlyM

An LED AF-assist beam is red by LED-equipped external ash units.

If your external ash unit is not LED-equipped, the camera’s AF-assist

beam is red instead.

oIf an external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam ring] Custom Function is set to

[Disable], this function’s setting will be overridden and the AF-assist beam will

not be emitted.

202

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Focus Bracketing

Focus bracketing* enables continuous shooting with the focal distance

changed automatically after a single shot. From these images, you can

create a single image in focus over a wide area by using an application

that supports depth compositing, such as Digital Photo Professional (EOS

software).

* “Bkt.” stands for bracketing.

Select [z: Focus bracketing].

Specify [Focus bracketing].

zSelect [Enable].

Set the number of images.

zSpecify the number of images captured

per shot.

zCan be set in a range of [2]–[999].

203

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Focus Bracketing

Set [Focus increment].

zSpecify how much to shift the focus.

This amount is automatically adjusted

to suit the aperture value at the time of

shooting.

Because larger aperture values increase

the focus shift, focus bracketing covers

a wider range under the same [Focus

increment] and [Number of shots]

settings in that case.

zAfter completing the settings, press the

<M> button.

zTo save your shots in a new folder, tap

[] and select [OK].

Set [Exposure smoothing].

zYou can suppress changes in image

brightness during focus bracketing

by setting [Exposure smoothing]

to [Enable], which compensates for

changes in the actual aperture value

(e󰀨ective f/number) at each focus

position.

Take the picture.

zFocus at the nearer end of your

preferred focal range, then press the

shutter button completely.

zOnce shooting begins, release the

shutter button.

zThe camera shoots continuously, shifting

the focal position toward innity.

zShooting ends after your specied

number of images, or at the far end of

the focal range.

204

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Focus Bracketing

oFocus bracketing is intended for still photo shooting on a tripod.

oShooting with a wider angle of view is recommended. After depth compositing,

you can crop the image if necessary.

oThe following lenses can be used (as of October 2018).

• RF35mm F1.8 MACRO IS STM

• RF50mm F1.2 L USM

• RF28-70mm F2 L USM

• RF24-105mm F4 L IS USM

• EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM

• EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM

• EF100mm f/2.8L MACRO IS USM

• EF180mm f/3.5L MACRO USM

• EF-S35mm f/2.8 MACRO IS STM

• EF-S60mm f/2.8 MACRO USM

oSet [Exposure smoothing] to [Disable] with the following lenses, because

they may cause changes in image brightness.

• EF100mm f/2.8L MACRO IS USM

• EF180mm f/3.5L MACRO USM

• EF-S60mm f/2.8 MACRO USM

oSuitable [Focus increment] settings vary by subject. An unsuitable [Focus

increment] setting may cause unevenness in composite images, or shooting

may take more time because more shots are taken. Take some test shots to

decide a suitable [Focus increment] setting.

oCombining images may take some time when the [Number of shots] setting

is high.

oFlash photography is not possible.

oShooting under ickering light may cause uneven images. In this case,

lowering the shutter speed may give better results.

oFocus bracketing is not available when the lens's focus mode switch is set to

<MF>.

oCanceling shooting in progress may cause exposure problems in the last

image. Avoid using the last image when combining the images in Digital Photo

Professional.

205

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Focus Bracketing

oUse of a tripod, remote switch (sold separately, =219), or wireless remote

control (sold separately, =217) is recommended.

oFor best results, set the aperture value in a range of f/5.6–11 before shooting.

oDetails such as shutter speed, aperture value, and ISO speed are determined

by conditions for the rst shot.

oIf [z: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for shooting.

oTo cancel shooting, press the shutter button completely again.

o[Focus bracketing] switches to [Disable] when the power switch is set to

<2>.

206

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the Drive Mode

Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive

mode suiting the scene or subject.

Press the button (9).

zWith an image displayed on the screen,

press the button.

Select the drive mode item.

zTurn the <5> dial to select the drive

mode item.

Select the drive mode.

zTurn the <6> dial to make a selection.

z[u] Single shooting

When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be

taken.

z[o] High-speed continuous shooting

When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot

continuously at max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec. while you keep holding it

down.

However, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become slower

under the following conditions:

When set to reduce icker:

The continuous shooting speed will be max. approx. 4.0 shots/sec.

207

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the Drive Mode

With Servo AF shooting:

When [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], the continuous shooting

speed of max. approx. 4.0 shots/sec. will be given priority.

In ash photography:

With EL or EX series Speedlites, the continuous shooting speed will

be max. approx. 2.3 shots/sec.

z[i] Low-speed continuous shooting

When you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot

continuously at max. approx. 2.6 shots/sec. while you keep holding it

down.

When [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], subject tracking with a

continuous shooting speed of max. approx. 2.6 shots/sec. is given

priority.

z[m] Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control

z[l] Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control

z[q] Self-timer: Continuous shooting

For self-timer shooting, see =209. For remote control shooting, see

=217.

oDuring <o> high-speed continuous shooting, the maximum continuous

shooting speed varies depending on the shooting conditions. For details, see

the next page.

208

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the Drive Mode

oApprox. 5.0 shots/sec. is the maximum <o> high-speed continuous

shooting speed (=206) under these conditions: shooting with a fully charged

battery in One-Shot AF mode at a 1/500 sec. or faster shutter speed and

maximum aperture (depending on the lens), Image Stabilizer o󰀨 (depending

on the lens), at room temperature (23°C / 73°F), with icker reduction, and

Digital Lens Optimizer disabled.

oThe continuous shooting speed for <o> high-speed continuous shooting

may be lower, depending on conditions such as these: battery level,

temperature, icker reduction, shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,

brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of ash, and shooting settings.

oWith Servo AF, the maximum continuous shooting speed may become slower

depending on subject conditions or the lens used.

oWith [z: Anti-icker shoot.] set to [Enable] (=179), shooting under

ickering light will decrease the maximum continuous shooting speed. Also,

the continuous shooting interval may become irregular and the release time

lag may become longer.

oEven with low-speed continuous shooting, the continuous shooting speed may

become slower depending on the shooting conditions.

oWhen internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the

continuous shooting speed may drop o󰀨 because shooting will be temporarily

disabled (=118).

209

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Using the Self-Timer

Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a

commemorative photograph.

Press the button (9).

zWith an image displayed on the screen,

press the button.

Select the drive mode item.

zTurn the <5> dial to select the drive

mode item.

Select the self-timer.

zTurn the <6> dial to select the self-

timer.

m (Q): Shoot in 10 sec.

l (k): Shoot in 2 sec.

q: Shoot continuously in 10 sec. for

the specied number of shots*

* To set the number of shots taken

continuously (2–10), select the [Drive mode]

item on the Quick Control screen, press the

button, then turn the <6> dial.

zQ and k icons are displayed when

the camera is paired with a wireless

remote control (sold separately,

=217).

210

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Using the Self-Timer

Take the picture.

zFocus on the subject, then press the

shutter button completely.

gTo check operation, look at the self-timer

lamp, listen for beeps, or watch the

countdown in seconds on the screen.

gSelf-timer lamp blinking accelerates and

the camera beeps quickly approx. 2 sec.

before the picture is taken.

oWith <q>, the shooting interval may become longer under some shooting

conditions, depending on image quality, use of external ash, and other

factors.

o<l> enables you to shoot without touching the camera mounted on a tripod.

This prevents camera shake if you shoot still-life or long exposures.

oAfter taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (=296) to check focus

and exposure is recommended.

oWhen using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (=71) on an

object at the same distance as where you will stand.

oTo cancel the self-timer after it starts, either tap the screen or press <0>.

oAuto power o󰀨 time may be extended when the camera is set for remote

shooting.

211

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the Metering Mode

You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness. In

Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically.

Press the <Q> button (7).

zWith an image displayed, press the

<Q> button.

Select the metering mode.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select the

item shown.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

metering mode.

[q]: Evaluative metering

[w]: Partial metering

[r]: Spot metering

[e]: Center-weighted average

metering

z[q] Evaluative metering

General-purpose metering mode suited even for backlit subjects. The

camera adjusts the exposure automatically to suit the scene.

z[w] Partial metering

E󰀨ective where there are much brighter lights around the subject due

to backlight, etc. Covers approx. 5.5% of the area at the center of the

screen. The partial metering area is indicated on the screen.

z[r] Spot metering

E󰀨ective when metering a specic part of the subject or scene. Covers

approx. 2.7% of the area at the center of the screen. The spot metering

area is indicated on the screen.

z[e] Center-weighted average metering

The metering across the screen is averaged, with the center of the screen

weighted more heavily.

212

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the Metering Mode

oBy default, the camera will set the exposure as follows.

With [q] (Evaluative metering), holding down the shutter button halfway will

lock the exposure setting (AE lock) after focus is achieved with One-Shot AF.

In the [w] (Partial metering), [r] (Spot metering), and [e] (Center-weighted

average metering) modes, the exposure is set at the moment the picture is

taken. (Pressing the shutter button halfway does not lock the exposure.)

oWith [8C.Fn I-7: AE lock meter. mode after focus], you can set whether or

not to lock the exposure (AE lock) when focus is achieved with One-Shot AF

(=529).

213

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE

Lock)

You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure

separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same exposure

setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and

take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is e󰀨ective for shooting backlit

subjects, etc.

Focus on the subject.

zPress the shutter button halfway.

gThe exposure setting will be displayed.

Press the <A> button (4).

gA <A> icon is displayed in the lower left

of the screen to indicate that exposure is

locked (AE lock).

zEach time you press the <A> button,

the current exposure setting is locked.

Recompose and take the picture.

zWhen you are to take more pictures

while maintaining the AE lock, keep

holding down the <A> button and

press the shutter button to take another

picture.

AE Lock E󰀨ects

Metering

Mode

AF Point Selection Method

Automatic Selection Manual Selection

qExposure centered on the AF point

in focus is locked.

Exposure centered on the selected

AF point is locked.

wre Exposure at the center of the screen is locked.

* In [q] mode with the lens’s focus mode switch set to <MF>, the exposure at the

center of the screen is locked.

214

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Focusing Manually

If focusing is not possible with autofocus, you can magnify the image and

focus manually.

Set the lens’s focus mode switch

to <MF>.

zTurn the lens focusing ring to focus

roughly.

Determine an area to magnify.

zPress the <S> button to activate

magnied display, then move it to where

you want to focus by using the <6> or

<5> dial or the <V> cross keys.

zTo center the magnied area, press the

<L> button.

(1) (2) (3)

Magnify the image.

zEach press of the button

changes the magnication ratio, as

follows.

1x → 5x → 10x

(1) AE lock

(2) Magnied area position

(3) Magnication (Approx.)

215

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Focusing Manually

Focus manually.

zWhile looking at the magnied image,

turn the lens focusing ring to focus.

zAfter focusing, press the button

or <0> to return to the normal view.

Take the picture.

oEven with manual focusing, you can use the Touch Shutter to take a picture.

216

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Focusing Manually

Setting MF Peaking (Outline Emphasis)

Edges of subjects in focus can be displayed in color to make focusing

easier. You can set the outline color and adjust the sensitivity (level) of edge

detection (except in <A> mode).

Select [z: MF peaking settings].

Select [Peaking].

zSelect [On].

Set the level and color.

zSet it as necessary.

oPeaking display is not shown during magnied display.

oMF peaking may be hard to discern at high ISO speeds, especially when ISO

expansion is set. If necessary, lower the ISO speed or set [Peaking] to [O󰀨].

oPeaking display shown on the screen is not recorded in images.

217

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Remote Control Shooting

Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) compatible with

Bluetooth® low energy technology enables remote control shooting.

Pairing

To use BR-E1, you must rst pair (connect and register) the camera

and remote control. For pairing instructions, see =399.

Do the following after the devices are paired.

Press the button (9).

zWith an image displayed on the screen,

press the button.

Select the drive mode item.

zTurn the <5> dial to select the drive

mode item.

Select the self-timer/remote

control.

zTurn the <6> dial to select <Q> or

<k>.

218

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Remote Control Shooting

Take the picture.

zBy pressing the <2> button on the

remote control, you can also autofocus.

zTo shoot, press the release button on

the remote control.

zFor detailed shooting instructions,

refer to the BR-E1 instruction manual.

oYou cannot use infrared remote control units such as Remote Controller RC-6.

oIf focusing is not possible with AF, focus manually before shooting (=214).

oAuto power o󰀨 time may be extended when the camera is set for remote

shooting.

o The remote control can also be used for movie recording (=285).

219

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Using a Remote Switch

You can shoot by connecting Remote

Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately).

For operating instructions, refer to the

remote switch instruction manual.

Open the terminal cover.

Connect the plug to the remote

control terminal.

220

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Flash Photography

EL/EX Series Speedlites for EOS Cameras

Using an EL/EX series Speedlite (sold separately) makes ash photography

easy.

For operation procedures, refer to the EL/EX series Speedlite’s

Instruction Manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the

features of EL/EX series Speedlites.

To set the ash functions and ash Custom Functions on the camera’s

menu screen, see =222.

zFlash exposure compensation

You can adjust ash output (ash exposure compensation). With an

image displayed on the screen, press the button, turn the <5>

dial to select the ash exposure compensation item, then turn the <6>

dial to set the ash exposure compensation. You can set ash exposure

compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

zFE lock

This enables you to attain an appropriate ash exposure for a specic

part of the subject. Aim the viewnder center over the subject, press the

camera’s <A> button, then compose the shot and take the picture.

oEven if you set negative ash exposure compensation (to keep images

darker), bright images may still be captured unless [z: Auto Lighting

Optimizer] (=136) is set to [Disable].

oYou can adjust the ash exposure compensation with Quick Control (=65)

or with [Flash function settings] under [z: External Speedlite control]

(=225).

oThe camera can turn on certain Speedlites automatically when the camera

is turned on. For details, refer to the instruction manual of Speedlites that

support this feature.

221

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Flash Photography

Canon Speedlites Other Than the EL/EX-Series

zWith an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL

autoash mode, the ash can be red at full output only.

Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> manual exposure or <f>

aperture-priority AE and adjust the aperture setting before shooting.

zWhen using a Speedlite that has manual ash mode, shoot in the manual

ash mode.

Non-Canon Flash Units

zSync Speed

The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact ash units at up to

1/180 sec. With large studio ash units, the ash duration is longer than

that of a compact ash unit and varies depending on the model. Before

shooting, conrm that ash is synced correctly at approx. 1/60–1/30 sec.

oIf the camera is used with a ash unit or ash accessory dedicated to another

camera brand, the camera not only may not operate properly, but malfunction

may result.

oDo not attach a high-voltage ash unit to the camera’s hot shoe. It may not be

red.

222

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Flash Function

With an EL/EX series Speedlite having compatible ash function settings,

you can use the camera’s menu screen to set the Speedlite’s functions and

Custom Functions. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the

Speedlite before setting the ash functions.

For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s Instruction

Manual.

Select [z: External Speedlite

control].

Select an item.

223

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Flash Function

Flash Firing

To enable ash photography, set to

[Enable]. To disable ash ring or enable

only the AF-assist beam, set to [Disable].

Otherwise, when a Speedlite that supports auto ash ring is attached, the

automatic ring is performed according to the shooting conditions.

For detailed shooting instructions, refer to the instruction manual of

Speedlites supporting auto ash ring.

E-TTL II Flash Metering

For normal ash exposures, set it to

[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the ash

exposure will be averaged for the entire

metered scene.

224

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Flash Function

Slow Synchro

You can set the ash-sync speed for ash

photography in <f> aperture-priority AE

mode or <d> Program AE mode.

z[ ] 1/180-30sec. auto

The ash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/180 sec. to

30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. Slow-sync shooting is used under

some shooting conditions, in low-light locations, and shutter speed is

automatically lowered.

z[ ] 1/180-1/60sec. auto

Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set automatically in low-light

conditions. It is e󰀨ective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.

However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the ash, the

background may come out dark.

z[] 1/180 sec. (xed)

The ash sync speed is xed at 1/180 sec. This more e󰀨ectively

prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/180-1/60sec. auto].

However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out darker than

with [1/180-1/60sec. auto].

oBy default, it is set to [1/180-1/60sec. auto]. To use slow-sync shooting in

<f> or <d> mode, set to [1/180-30sec. auto].

oHigh-speed sync is not available in <f> or <d> mode when set to [1/180

sec. (xed)].

225

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Flash Function

Safety FE

To avoid overexposure from the ash

ring during the day or at close range, the

camera can automatically lower the ISO

speed and shoot with standard subject

exposure when set to ISO Auto.

Flash Function Settings

The information displayed, position of display, and available options

vary depending on the Speedlite model, its Custom Function settings,

the ash mode, and other factors. For details on the Speedlite’s functions,

refer to the Speedlite’s Instruction Manual.

Sample display

(1)

(4)

(2)

(3)

(6)

(5)

(1) Flash mode

(2) Wireless functions /

Firing ratio control

(3) Flash zoom (Flash coverage)

(4) Shutter synchronization

(5) Flash exposure compensation

(6) Flash exposure bracketing

oFunctions are limited when using EX series Speedlites that are not compatible

with ash function settings.

226

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Flash Function

zFlash mode

You can select the ash mode to suit your desired ash photography.

[E-TTL II ash metering] is the standard

mode of EL/EX series Speedlites for

automatic ash photography.

[Manual ash] is for setting the Speedlite’s

[Flash output level] yourself.

[CSP] (continuous shooting priority mode) automatically decreases ash

output by one stop and increases ISO speed by one stop. Useful in

continuous shooting, and helps conserve ash battery power.

Regarding other ash modes, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite

compatible with the respective ash mode.

oAdjust exposure compensation (=128) as needed in case of overexposure

from ash photography with [CSP] in [t], [s], or [a] mode.

oWith [CSP], ISO speed is automatically set to [Auto]. [Safety FE] is also set

to [Enable] automatically. After canceling [CSP], check the ISO speed and

[Safety FE] setting.

227

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Flash Function

zWireless functions / Firing ratio control

Wireless (multiple) ash photography is

possible with radio or optical transmission.

For details on wireless ash, refer to

the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite

compatible with wireless ash photography.

With a macro ash (MR-14EX II, etc.)

compatible with ash function settings, you

can set the ring ratio between ash tubes

or ash heads A and B, or use wireless

ash with additional receiver units.

For details on ring ratio control, refer to

the macro ash’s Instruction Manual.

zFlash zoom (Flash coverage)

With Speedlites having a zooming ash

head, you can set the ash coverage.

Normally, set this to [AUTO] so that the

camera will automatically set the ash

coverage to match the lens focal length.

228

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Flash Function

zShutter synchronization

Normally, set this to [First-curtain

synchronization] so that the ash res

immediately after the exposure starts.

If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the ash will be red right

before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter speed,

you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night with a

more natural feel. When second-curtain synchronization is set together with

[E-TTL II ash metering], the ash will be red twice in a row: once when

you press the shutter button completely and once right before the end of the

exposure.

If [High-speed synchronization] is set, the ash can be used at all shutter

speeds. This is e󰀨ective when you want to shoot with background blur (open

aperture) in locations such as outdoors in daylight.

oWhen using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to

1/80 sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/90 sec. or faster, rst-curtain

synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain

synchronization] is set.

229

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Flash Function

zFlash exposure compensation

You can set ash exposure compensation

up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.

For details, refer to the Speedlite’s

Instruction Manual.

oIf ash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set the

ash exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both the camera

and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.

zFlash exposure bracketing

While changing the ash output

automatically, three shots will be taken.

For details, refer to the Instruction Manual

of a Speedlite equipped with ash exposure

bracketing.

230

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Flash Function

Flash Custom Function Settings

For details on the Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the Speedlite’s (sold

separately) Instruction Manual.

Select [Flash C.Fn settings].

Set the desired functions.

zSelect the number.

zSelect an item.

oWith an EL/EX series Speedlite, the Speedlite will always re at full output if

the [Flash metering mode] Custom Function is set to [TTL] (autoash).

oThe Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled on the

camera’s [z: External Speedlite control] screen. Set it directly on the

Speedlite.

Clearing Flash Function Settings / Flash C.Fn Settings

Select [Clear settings].

Select the settings to be cleared.

zSelect [Clear ash settings] or [Clear

all Speedlite C.Fn’s].

zOn the conrmation dialog, select [OK].

Then the ash settings or Custom

Function settings will all be cleared.

231

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

General Notes on Still Photo Shooting

Information Display

For details on the icons displayed for still photo shooting, see =591.

oWhen <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the image is displayed at

the brightness level closely matching that of the actual image to be captured.

oIf <g> is blinking, it indicates that the image is displayed at a brightness

that di󰀨ers from the actual shooting result because of low- or bright-light

conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reect the exposure

setting. Note that the noise may be more noticeable than the actual image

recorded.

oExposure simulation may not be performed under some shooting settings.

The <g> icon and histogram will be displayed in gray. The image will be

displayed on the screen at the standard brightness. The histogram may not be

properly displayed in low- or bright-light conditions.

oThe histogram can be displayed when [z: Expo. simulation] is set to

[Enable] (=139).

232

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

General Notes on Still Photo Shooting

oDo not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an

intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the

camera’s internal components.

oDefocused image areas may be incomplete when shooting near maximum

aperture at high shutter speeds. If you dislike the appearance of defocused

image areas, shooting as follows may give better results.

• Lower the shutter speed.

• Increase the aperture value.

Image Quality

oWhen you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding)

may become noticeable.

oShooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the

image.

oFrequent shooting over an extended period may cause the camera’s internal

temperature to rise and a󰀨ect image quality. When you are not shooting,

always turn o󰀨 the camera.

oIf you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is high,

image quality may decline. Stop shooting and wait a few minutes before

shooting again.

White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons

oIf the camera’s internal temperature rises from extended shooting or use in hot

environments, a white <s> or red <E> icon will appear.

oThe white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will decline.

Stop shooting for a while and allow the camera to cool down.

oThe red <E> icon indicates that shooting will soon end automatically.

Shooting will not be possible again until the camera cools down internally, so

stop shooting temporarily or turn o󰀨 the camera and let it cool down a while.

oShooting in hot environments over extended periods will cause the white <s>

or red <E> icon to appear sooner. When you are not shooting, always turn o󰀨

the camera.

oIf the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot with

a high ISO speed or long exposure may decline even before the white <s>

icon is displayed.

Shooting Results

oIf you take the picture in magnied view, the exposure may not come out as

desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.

oEven if you take the picture in magnied view, the image will be captured with

the image area of the normal view.

233

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

General Notes on Still Photo Shooting

Images and Display

oUnder low- or bright-light conditions, the displayed image may not reect the

brightness of the captured image.

oUnder low light, noise may be noticeable in image display even at low ISO

speeds, but there will be less noise in your shots, because image quality

varies between display and captured images.

oThe screen or exposure value may icker if the light source (lighting) changes.

In this case, stop shooting temporarily and resume under the light source you

will use.

oPointing the camera at di󰀨erent direction may momentarily prevent correct

display of brightness. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting.

oIf there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear

black on the screen. However, the actual captured image will correctly show

the bright area.

oIn low light, if you set the [5: Disp. brightness] to a bright setting, noise

or irregular colors may appear in the image. However, the noise or irregular

colors will not be recorded in the captured image.

oWhen you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more

pronounced than in the actual image.

Lens

oIf the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer

(IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if

you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer consumes

battery power and may decrease the number of possible shots depending on

the shooting conditions. When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as

when using a tripod, it is recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.

oWith EF lenses, focus preset during shooting is only available when using

(super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the

second half of 2011.

234

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

General Notes on Still Photo Shooting

oThe image’s eld of view coverage is approx. 100% (with image quality set to

JPEG 73).

oIf the camera is idle over an extended period, the screen will turn o󰀨

automatically after the time set in [Display o󰀨] or [Viewnder o󰀨] under [5:

Power saving]. The camera then turns o󰀨 automatically after the time set in

[Auto power o󰀨] (=372).

oWith the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the image

on a television (=308). Note that no sound will be output.

235

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

235

Recording Movies

For movie recording, set the Mode dial to <k>.

zA M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function is available

only for manual exposure recording (=241).

oYou can record movies by pressing the movie shooting button during still

photo shooting.

oYou can also specify movie recording mode from [z: Shooting mode] after

setting the Mode dial to <k>.

236

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Movie Recording

zShooting 1

=239

=249

=256

=257

=260

zShooting 2

=285

=262

=285

=274

zShooting 3

=138

=289

=128

=286

=136

=287

=288

237

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Movie Recording

zShooting 4

=142

=143

=145

=148

=157

=290

zShooting 5

=188

=198

=183

=280

zShooting 6

=200

=282

=283

=216

oWhen RF lenses without a focus mode switch are used, [Focus mode] is

displayed.

238

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Movie Recording

In [u] mode, the following screens are displayed.

zShooting 1

=239

=257

zShooting 2

=285

=274

zShooting 3

=188

=280

=198

=183

239

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Movies

k Autoexposure Recording

Autoexposure control will take e󰀨ect to suit the scene’s current brightness.

Set the Mode dial to <k>.

Press <0>.

Select [k].

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select [k

(Movie auto exposure)], then press

<0>.

zSelection is also possible by turning the

<6> or <5> dial.

Focus on the subject.

zBefore recording a movie, focus with

AF or manual focus (=190–=197,

=214).

zBy default, [z: Movie Servo AF] is set

to [Enable] so that the camera always

keeps focusing (=280).

zWhen you press the shutter button

halfway, the camera will focus with the

current AF method.

240

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Movies

(1)

(2)

Record the movie.

zPress the movie shooting button to start

recording a movie.

gWhile the movie is being recorded, the

“oREC” mark (1) will be displayed on

the upper right of the screen.

gSound is recorded by the microphones

at the positions indicated (2).

zTo stop recording the movie, press the

movie shooting button again.

oThe Quick Control screen appears after step 2 when [5: Mode guide] is set

to [Disable]. Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select [k].

oYou can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <A> button. After

applying AE lock during movie recording, you can cancel it by pressing the

<S> button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the <S> button.)

oExposure compensation can be set in a range of up to ±3 stops.

oISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture are not recorded in movie Exif

information.

oThe camera is compatible with Speedlite functionality to activate the LED light

automatically under low light when recording movies with auto exposure. For

details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the Speedlite equipped with an LED

light.

ISO Speed in [k] Mode

ISO speed is set automatically. For details on the ISO speed, see =588.

241

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Movies

M Manual Exposure Recording

You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie

recording.

Set the Mode dial to <k>.

Press <0>.

Select [M].

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select [M

(Movie manual exposure)], then press

<0>.

zSelection is also possible by turning the

<6> or <5> dial.

Set the ISO speed.

zPress the button.

zTurn the <5> dial to select the ISO

speed item.

zTurn the <6> dial to set it.

242

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Movies

(1)

(2)

Set the shutter speed (1) and

aperture (2).

zPress the shutter button halfway and

check the exposure level indicator.

zTo set the shutter speed, turn the <6>

dial. To set the aperture, turn the <5>

dial.

zShutter speed can be set in a range of

1/4000–1/8 sec.

Focus and record the movie.

zThe procedure is the same as steps 4

and 5 for “Autoexposure Recording”

(=239–=240).

oThe Quick Control screen appears after step 2 when [5: Mode guide] is set

to [Disable]. Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select [M].

243

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Movies

oFor movie recording, the ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent to

ISO 50).

oWhen switching from still photo shooting to movie recording, check the camera

settings again before recording movies.

oDuring movie recording, avoid changing the shutter speed or aperture. Doing

so may record the changes in the exposure or create more noise at high ISO

speeds.

oWhen recording a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of approx. 1/25

sec. to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less

smooth the subject’s movement will look.

oIf you change the shutter speed while recording under uorescent or LED

lighting, image icker may be recorded.

oWith ISO Auto, exposure compensation can be set in a range of ±3 stops.

oWhen ISO Auto is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO speed.

After locking the ISO speed during movie recording, you can cancel it by

pressing the <S> button. (ISO speed lock is maintained until you press the

<S> button.)

oIf you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the

exposure level di󰀨erence on the exposure level indicator compared to when

the <A> button was pressed.

oWith the camera ready to shoot in the [M] mode, you can display the

histogram by pressing the button.

ISO Speed in [M] Mode

You can set the ISO speed manually or select [AUTO] to set it automatically.

For details on the ISO speed, see =589.

244

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Movies

Still Photo Shooting

Still photos cannot be taken in movie recording mode. To shoot still

photos, turn the Mode dial to switch to another shooting mode.

Information Display (Movie Recording)

For details on the icons displayed for movie recording, see =593.

245

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Movies

Cautions for Movie Recording

oDo not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an

intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the

camera’s internal components.

oIf you shoot something that has ne detail, moire or false colors may result.

oIf <Q> or <Qw> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during

movie recording, the white balance may also change.

oIf you record a movie under uorescent or LED lighting, the movie image may

icker.

oIf you perform AF with a USM lens during movie recording in low light,

horizontal banding noise may be recorded in the movie. The same type of

noise may occur if you focus manually with certain lenses equipped with an

electronic focusing ring.

oShooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform zooming

during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may cause exposure

changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio level, or loss of

focus.

oLarge aperture values may delay or prevent accurate focusing.

oDuring movie recording, if you perform AF, any of the following may occur:

The focus is temporarily greatly thrown o󰀨, changes in movie brightness is

recorded, the movie recording stops momentarily, and the mechanical sound

of the lens is recorded.

oAvoid covering the built-in microphones (=240) with your ngers or other

objects.

o“General Movie Recording Cautions” are on =291–=292.

oIf necessary, also read “General Notes on Still Photo Shooting” on

=231–=234.

246

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Movies

Notes for Movie Recording

oEach time you record a movie, a new movie le is created on the card.

oThe movie’s eld of view coverage for recording 4K, Full HD, and HD movies

is approx. 100%.

oYou can also focus by pressing the button.

oTo enable starting or stopping movie recording by pressing the shutter button

completely, set [Fully-press] for [5: Shutter btn function for movies] to

[Start/stop mov rec].

oStereo sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (=240).

oAny external microphones such as Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold

separately) connected to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal are

used instead of the built-in microphones (=258).

oMost external microphones equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug can be

used.

oWith EF lenses, focus preset during movie recording is available when using

(super) telephoto lenses equipped with this function released in and after the

second half of 2011.

oYCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color space are

used for 4K, Full HD, and HD movies.

247

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording HDR Movies

You can record high dynamic range movies that retain detail in highlights of

high-contrast scenes.

Set the Mode dial to <k>.

Press <0>.

Select [u].

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select [u

(HDR Movie)], then press <0>.

zSelection is also possible by turning the

<6> or <5> dial.

Record an HDR movie.

zRecord the movie in the same way as

normal movie recording.

zFor details on le sizes and the

recording time available, see the table

on =586.

248

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording HDR Movies

o[z: Movie cropping] is not available.

oSince multiple frames are merged to create an HDR movie, certain parts of

the movie may look distorted. During handheld recording, camera shake may

make the distortion look more noticeable. Using a tripod is recommended.

Note that even if a tripod is used for recording, afterimages or noise may

become more noticeable when the HDR movie is played back frame-by-frame

or in slow-motion compared to normal playback.

oImage color and brightness may change signicantly for a moment if you

change settings for HDR movie recording. Also, the movie will not be updated

for a moment, and the frame stops momentarily. Be aware of this when

recording movies to external devices via HDMI.

oThe recording size is L6X (NTSC) or L5X (PAL). Note that

movies are recorded in HD when EF-S lenses are used.

oISO speed is set automatically when you record HDR movies.

249

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Movie Recording Size

Under the [z: Movie rec. size] tab, set the image size, frame rate, and

compression method. The movie will be recorded as an MP4 le.

The frame rate displayed on the [Movie rec. size] screen switches

automatically depending on the [5: Video system] setting (=378).

oThe card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording movies

(card performance requirements) vary depending on the movie recording

size. Before recording movies, see =585 to check the performance

requirements of the card.

Image Size

z[H] 3840×2160

The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.

Not available unless the Mode dial is set to <k>.

z[L] 1920×1080

The movie will be recorded in Full High-Denition (Full HD) quality. The

aspect ratio is 16:9.

z[w] 1280×720

The movie is recorded in High-Denition (HD) quality. The aspect ratio is

16:9.

250

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Movie Recording Size

oIf you change the [5: Video system] setting, also set [z: Movie rec. size]

again.

oNormal playback of 4K and L8/7 movies may not be possible on

other devices, because playback is processing-intensive.

oClarity and noise vary slightly depending on movie recording size, cropped

shooting settings, and the lens used.

oMovies cannot be recorded in VGA quality.

4K Movie Recording

zRecording 4K movies requires a high-performance card. For details, see

“Cards that Can Record Movies” on =585.

zRecording 4K movies greatly increases the processing load, which may

cause the camera’s internal temperature to increase faster or become

higher than for regular movies. If a red E icon appears during movie

recording, the card may be hot, so stop recording the movie and let

the camera cool down before removing the card. (Do not remove the

card immediately.)

zFrom a 4K movie, you can select any frame to save as an approx.

8.3-megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still image to the card (=306).

oContrast detection is used to focus when recording 4K movies. Focusing may

take longer than when recording HD or Full HD movies.

251

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Movie Recording Size

Movie-Recording Coverage

Image sensor coverage for movies varies depending on movie recording

size, cropped shooting settings, and the lens used.

With EF-S lenses, movies are cropped around the center of the image.

zRF or EF lenses: With [z: Movie cropping] set to [Disable]

(1)

(2)

(1) Full HD

4K time-lapse

Full HD time-lapse

(2) 4K

zRF or EF lenses: With [z: Movie cropping] set to [Enable]

zEF-S lenses

(4)

(3)

(3) HD

4K time-lapse

Full HD time-lapse

(4) 4K

oFull HD movies cannot be recorded with EF-S lenses, or with [z: Movie

cropping] set to [Enable].

oRecording with Movie digital IS (=260) further crops the image around the

center of the screen.

252

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Movie Recording Size

zFrame rate (fps: frame per second)

[8] 59.94fps / [6] 29.97fps

For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan,

South Korea, Mexico, etc.).

[7] 50.00fps / [5] 25.00fps

For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,

Australia, etc.).

[4] 23.98fps

Mainly for motion pictures. 4 (23.98fps) is available when [5:

Video system] is set to [For NTSC].

zCompression method

[X] IPB (Standard)

Compresses multiple frames at a time e󰀩ciently for recording.

[ ] IPB (Light)

Since the movie is recorded at a bit rate lower than with IPB (Standard),

the le size will be smaller than with IPB (Standard) and the playback

compatibility will be higher. This will make the possible recording

time longer than with IPB (Standard) (with a card having the same

capacity).

zMovie recording format

[C] MP4

All movies you shoot with the camera are recorded as movie les in

MP4 format (le extension “.MP4”).

253

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Movie Recording Size

Cards that Can Record Movies

For details on cards you can use for various movie recording sizes, see

=585.

When recording movies, use a high-capacity card with a writing/reading

speed (as specied in card performance requirements) shown in the

table on =585 or higher than the standard specication. Test cards by

recording a few movies to make sure they can record correctly at your

specied size (=249).

oFormat cards before recording 4K movies (=367).

oIf you use a slow-writing card when recording movies, the movie may not be

recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card with a slow reading

speed, the movie may not be played back properly.

oWhen recording movies, use high-performance cards with a writing speed

su󰀩ciently higher than the bit rate.

oWhen movies cannot be recorded normally, format the card and try again.

If formatting the card does not resolve the problem, refer to the card

manufacturer’s website, etc.

oTo obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the

camera before recording movies is recommended (=367).

oTo check the card’s writing/reading speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s

website, etc.

254

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Movie Recording Size

Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB

Even if you record a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep recording without

interruption.

zUsing SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera

If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will format

it in FAT32.

With a FAT32-formatted card, if you record a movie and the le size

exceeds 4 GB, a new movie le will be created automatically.

When you play back the movie, you will have to play back each movie

le individually. Movie les cannot be played back automatically in

consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next movie

and play it back.

zUsing SDXC cards formatted with the camera

If you use the camera to format an SDXC card, the camera will format it

in exFAT.

When using an exFAT-formatted card, even if the le size exceeds 4 GB

during movie recording, the movie will be saved as a single le (rather

than being split into multiple les).

oWhen importing movie les exceeding 4 GB to a computer, use either EOS

Utility or a card reader (=557). It may not be possible to save movie les

exceeding 4 GB if you attempt this using standard features of the computer’s

operating system.

255

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Movie Recording Size

Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute

For details on le sizes and the recording time available at each movie

recording size, see =586.

Movie Recording Time Limit

The maximum recording time per movie is 29 min. 59 sec. Once 29 min.

59 sec. is reached, recording automatically stops. You can start recording

a movie again by pressing the movie shooting button (which records the

movie as a new le).

256

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Movie Cropping

With RF or EF lenses, movies can be cropped around the center of the

image, as if using a telephoto lens.

Recording movies with EF-S lenses has the same e󰀨ect as this movie

cropping feature.

Select [z: Movie cropping].

Select [Enable].

gThe center area is magnied.

oFull HD movies cannot be recorded with movie cropping.

oThe center of the screen is further cropped, reducing the shooting area, when

[z: Movie digital IS] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced].

oThe shooting area available with movie cropping is the same as when

recording movies with EF-S lenses.

o4K movies are always recorded with the center of the recording screen

cropped, and enabling [z: Movie cropping] does not change the recording

angle of view.

oFor details on the shooting area, see =251.

257

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Sound Recording

You can record movies while recording

sound with the built-in stereo microphone

or an external stereo microphone. You can

also freely adjust the sound-recording level.

Use [z: Sound recording] to set sound

recording functions.

Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level

zAuto

The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level control will

take e󰀨ect automatically in response to the sound level.

zManual

You can adjust the sound-recording level as needed.

Select [Rec. level] and press the <Y> <Z> keys while looking at the

level meter to adjust the sound-recording level. Look at the peak hold

indicator, and adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up on the

right of the “12” (–12 dB) mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”,

the sound will be distorted.

zDisable

Sound will not be recorded.

Wind Filter

Set to [Auto] to reduce wind noise automatically when there is wind

outdoors. Only activated when the camera’s built-in microphone is used.

When the wind lter function takes e󰀨ect, part of the low bass sounds will

also be reduced.

258

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Sound Recording

Attenuator

Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even if

[Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for recording, sound distortion

may still result if there is a very loud sound. In this case, setting it to [Enable]

is recommended.

zUsing a microphone

Normally, the camera’s built-in microphone records in stereo.

If an external microphone equipped with a miniature stereo plug (3.5 mm

diameter) is connected to the camera’s external microphone IN terminal,

the external microphone will be given the priority. Using the Directional

Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended.

zUsing headphones

By connecting commercially available headphones with a 3.5 mm mini

plug to the headphone terminal, you can listen to the sound as movies

are recorded. To adjust headphone volume, press the <Q> button, select

[n], then turn the <6> dial for adjustment.

You can also use headphones during movie playback.

259

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Sound Recording

oSounds from Wi-Fi operations may be captured with built-in or external

microphones. During sound recording, using the wireless communication

function is not recommended.

oWhen connecting an external microphone or headphones to the camera, be

sure to insert the plug all the way in.

oIf AF operations are performed or you control the camera or lens during movie

recording, the camera’s built-in microphone may also record mechanical

sounds of the lens or sounds of camera/lens operations. In this case, using

an external microphone may reduce these sounds. If the sounds are still

distracting with an external microphone, it may be more e󰀨ective to remove

the external microphone from the camera and position it away from the

camera and lens.

oDo not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera’s

external microphone IN terminal.

oNoise reduction is not applied to the audio played through headphones. Thus,

the audio recorded with the movie will be di󰀨erent.

oDo not change the [Sound recording] settings when listening with

headphones. This may cause sudden loud output that may hurt your ears.

oIn [u] mode, the settings available for [Sound recording] are [On] or [O󰀨].

Set to [On] for automatic adjustment of the recording level.

oAudio is also output when the camera is connected to televisions via HDMI,

except when [Sound rec.] is set to [Disable].

oThe sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be adjusted.

oSound is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.

260

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Movie Digital IS

In-camera image stabilization electronically corrects camera shake during

movie recording. This function is called “Movie digital IS”. With Movie

digital IS, images can be stabilized even when using a lens without Image

Stabilizer. When using a lens with built-in optical Image Stabilizer, set the

lens’s Image Stabilizer switch to <1>.

Select [z: Movie digital IS].

Select an item.

zDisable (v)

Image stabilization with Movie digital IS is disabled.

zEnable (w)

Camera shake will be corrected. The image will be slightly magnied.

zEnhanced (x) (Not displayed for still photos shooting)

Compared to when [Enable] is set, stronger camera shake can be

corrected. The image will be more magnied.

261

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Movie Digital IS

Combination IS

Even more e󰀨ective correction is possible by recording movies with Movie

digital IS and a Combination IS-compatible lens, which will combine optical

and digital image stabilization by the lens and camera.

oMovie digital IS will not function when the lens’s optical Image Stabilizer switch

is set to <2>.

oAlthough movies can also be recorded with Movie digital IS when using EF-S

lenses or movie cropping, the shooting area is further reduced.

oWith a lens whose focal length is longer than 800 mm, Movie digital IS will not

function.

oStabilization by Movie digital IS may be less e󰀨ective at some movie recording

sizes.

oThe wider the angle of view (wide angle), the more e󰀨ective the image

stabilization will be. The narrower the angle of view (telephoto), the less

e󰀨ective the image stabilization will be.

oWhen using a tripod, setting Movie digital IS to [Disable] is recommended.

oDepending on the subject and shooting conditions, the subject may blur

noticeably (the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the e󰀨ects of

the Movie digital IS.

oWhen using a TS-E lens, sh-eye lens, or non-Canon lens, setting Movie

digital IS to [Disable] is recommended.

oSince Movie digital IS magnies the image, the image looks more grainy.

Noise, dots of light, etc. may also become noticeable.

oCertain lenses do not support Movie digital IS. For details, refer to the Canon

website.

oFor details on lenses compatible with Combination IS, visit the Canon website.

o“+” is added to the Movie digital IS icon (=260) when a lens compatible with

Combination IS is used.

262

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Time-lapse Movies

Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically to

create a 4K or Full HD time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how

a subject changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time

it took. It is e󰀨ective for a xed-point observation of changing scenery,

growing plants, celestial motion, etc.

Time-lapse movies will be recorded in MP4 format at the following

quality: H6W (NTSC)/H5W (PAL) for 4K shooting, and L

6 W (NTSC)/L 5 W (PAL) for Full HD shooting.

Note that the frame rate will be switched automatically according to the [5:

Video system] setting (=378).

Select a shooting mode.

zSelect [k] (=239) or [M] (=241).

Select [z: Time-lapse movie].

Select [Time-lapse].

Select a scene.

zSelect a scene to suit the shooting

situation.

zFor greater freedom when setting the

shooting interval and number of shots

manually, select [Custom].

263

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Time-lapse Movies

(1) (2)

Set the shooting interval.

zSelect [Interval] (sec.). Use the <Y>

<Z> keys to set a value, then press

<0>.

zRefer to [k: Time required] (1) and

[3: Playback time] (2) to set the

number.

When [Custom] is set

zSelect [Interval] (min.:sec.). (An interval

of once per second is not available.)

zPress <0> to display <r>.

zSet the desired number, then press

<0>. (Returns to <s>.)

zSelect [OK] to register the setting.

Set the number of shots.

zSelect [No. of shots]. Use the <Y>

<Z> keys to set a value, then press

<0>.

zRefer to the [k: Time required] and

[3: Playback time] to set the number.

When [Custom] is set

zSelect the digit.

zPress <0> to display <r>.

zSet the desired number, then press

<0>. (Returns to <s>.)

zCheck that [3: Playback time] is not

displayed in red.

zSelect [OK] to register the setting.

oWith [Scene**], available intervals and numbers of shots are restricted, to suit

the type of scene.

oFor cards that can record time-lapse movies (card performance requirements),

see =585.

oIf the number of shots is set to 3600, the time-lapse movie will be approx.

2 min. in NTSC and approx. 2 min. 24 sec. in PAL.

264

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Time-lapse Movies

Select the desired movie recording

size.

zH (3840×2160)

The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame

rate is 29.97 fps (6) for NTSC and 25.00 fps (5) for PAL, and

movies are recorded in MP4 (C) format with ALL-I (W) compression.

zL (1920×1080)

The movie will be recorded in Full High-Denition (Full HD) quality. The

aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame rate is 29.97 fps (6) for NTSC and

25.00 fps (5) for PAL, and movies are recorded in MP4 (C) format

with ALL-I (W) compression.

265

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Time-lapse Movies

Congure [Auto exposure].

zFixed 1st frame

When taking the rst shot, metering is performed to set the exposure

automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the rst

shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related settings

for the rst shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.

zEach frame

Metering is also performed for each subsequent shot to set the exposure

automatically to match the brightness. Note that if functions such as

Picture Style and white balance are set to [Auto], they will be set

automatically for each subsequent shot.

Congure [Screen auto o󰀨].

zDisable

Even during time-lapse movie recording, the image will be displayed. (The

screen turns o󰀨 only at the time of shooting.) Note that the screen will

turn o󰀨 when approx. 30 min. elapse after the shooting started.

zEnable

Note that the screen will turn o󰀨 when approx. 10 sec. elapse after the

shooting started.

oDuring time-lapse movie recording, you can press the button to turn

on/o󰀨 the screen.

266

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Time-lapse Movies

Set the beeper.

zSelect [Beep as img taken].

zIf [Disable] is set, the beeper will not

sound for shooting.

(1) (2)

Check the settings.

(1) Time required

Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the set

interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.

(2) Playback time

Indicates the movie recording time (time required to play back the movie)

when creating the time-lapse movie in 4K movie or Full HD movie from

the still photos taken with the set intervals.

Close the menu.

zPress the <M> button to turn o󰀨 the

menu screen.

267

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Time-lapse Movies

Read the message.

zRead the message and select [OK].

Take test shots.

zAs with still photo shooting, set the

exposure and shooting functions, then

press the shutter button halfway to

focus.

zPress the shutter button completely to

take test shots. The still photos will be

recorded to the card.

zIf there are no problems with the test

shots, go to the next step.

zTo take test shots again, repeat this

step.

oTest shots are captured in JPEG 73 quality.

oYou can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in [k] mode or in [M] mode

with ISO Auto, in [aMax for Auto] under [z: kISO speed settings]

(=286).

oIf you have set [Half-press] under [5: Shutter btn function for movies] to

[Meter.+k Servo AF], it is automatically changed to [Meter.+One-Shot AF]

when you set up time-lapse movie recording.

268

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Time-lapse Movies

Press the movie shooting button.

gThe camera will be ready to start

recording a time-lapse movie.

zTo return to step 14, press the movie

shooting button again.

(1) (2)

Record the time-lapse movie.

zPress the button and check

again the “Time required (1)” and

“Interval (2)” displayed on the screen.

zPress the shutter button completely

to start recording the time-lapse

movie.

zAF will not work during time-lapse movie

recording.

zWhile the time-lapse movie is recorded,

“oREC” is displayed.

gWhen the set number of shots are taken,

the time-lapse movie recording ends.

zTo cancel recording time-lapse

movies, set [Time-lapse] to [Disable].

269

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Time-lapse Movies

oUsing a tripod is recommended.

oTaking test shots as in step 14 and recording test movies for time-lapse

movies beforehand is recommended.

oThe movie’s eld of view coverage for both the 4K and Full HD time-lapse

movie recording is approx. 100%.

oTo cancel the time-lapse movie recording in progress, either press the shutter

button completely or press the movie shooting button. The time-lapse movie

shot so far will be recorded on the card.

oIf the time required for shooting is more than 24 hours but not more than

48 hours, “2 days” will be indicated. If three or more days are required, the

number of days will be indicated in 24-hour increments.

oEven if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie le

will still be created. For [Playback time], “00'00"” will be displayed.

oIf the shooting time is long, using the household power outlet accessories (sold

separately) is recommended.

oYCbCr 4:2:0 (8-bit) color sampling and the Rec. ITU-R BT.709 color space are

used for 4K/Full HD time-lapse movies.

oIf the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of shots,

[Playback time] will be displayed in red. Although the camera can continue

shooting, the shooting will stop when the card becomes full.

oIf the movie le size exceeds 4 GB with the [No. of shots] settings and the

card is not formatted in exFAT (=368), [Play back time] will be displayed

in red. If you keep shooting in this condition and the movie le size reaches

4 GB, the time-lapse movie recording will stop.

270

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Time-lapse Movies

oDo not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an

intense articial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the

camera’s internal components.

oTime-lapse movies cannot be recorded when the camera is connected to a

computer with the interface cable, or when an HDMI cable is connected.

oMovie Servo AF will not function.

oIf the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie may not

be displayed properly (may di󰀨er from that of the resulting movie).

oDo not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie recording. Zooming the lens

may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change, or the lens

aberration correction not to function properly.

oWhen recording a time-lapse movie under a ickering light, noticeable image

ickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be recorded.

oImages that are displayed while time-lapse movies are being recorded

may look di󰀨erent from the resulting movie. (For example, there may be

inconsistent brightness from ickering light sources, or noise from a high ISO

speed.)

oWhen recording a time-lapse movie under low light, the image displayed

during shooting may look di󰀨erent from what is actually recorded in the movie.

In such cases, the <g> icon will blink.

oIf you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving subject

during time-lapse movie recording, the image may look extremely distorted.

oDuring time-lapse movie recording, auto power o󰀨 will not take e󰀨ect. Also,

you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function settings, play back

images, etc.

oSound is not recorded for time-lapse movies.

oWith time-lapse movie recording, you can press the shutter button completely

to start or stop the movie recording regardless of the [5: Shutter btn

function for movies] setting.

oWith [Interval] set to less than 3 sec. and [Auto exposure] set to [Each

frame], if the brightness di󰀨ers greatly from the preceding shot, the camera

may not shoot at the set interval.

271

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Time-lapse Movies

oIf the shutter speed exceeds the shooting interval (such as for long

exposures), or if a slow shutter speed is set automatically, the camera may

not be able to shoot at the set interval. Shooting may also be prevented by

shooting intervals nearly the same as the shutter speed.

oIf the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may shorten

the recording time of the created time-lapse movie.

oIf the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the shooting interval due to

the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the shots may not be

taken with the set intervals.

oEven if [Screen auto o󰀨] is set to [Disable], the screen will turn o󰀨 during the

exposure. Also note that images may not be displayed if the interval between

shots is too brief.

oThe captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel the

time-lapse movie recording after only one shot is taken, it will be recorded as

a movie le.

oIf you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable and use EOS

Utility (EOS software), set [z: Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If an option

other than [Disable] is selected, the camera cannot communicate with the

computer.

oDuring time-lapse movie recording, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not operate.

oTime-lapse movie recording ends if the power switch is set to <2>, for

example, and the setting is changed to [Disable].

oEven if a ash is used, it will not re.

oThe following operations cancel standby for time-lapse movie recording and

switch the setting to [Disable].

• Selecting either [Clean nowf] under [5: Sensor cleaning] or selecting

[5: Clear all camera settings].

• Turning the Mode dial.

272

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Time-lapse Movies

oIf you start time-lapse movie recording while the white <s> temperature

warning (=291) is displayed, the image quality of the time-lapse movie may

decline. It is recommended that you start time-lapse movie recording after the

white <s> disappears (camera’s internal temperature decreases).

oWith [Auto exposure] set to [Each frame], ISO speed, shutter speed, and

aperture may not be recorded in the time-lapse movie Exif information in some

modes.

273

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Time-lapse Movies

oYou can use Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) to start and

stop the time-lapse movie recording.

With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1

• First pair the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 with the camera (=399).

• Set [z: Remote control] to [Enable].

• Take test shots, then when the camera is ready to shoot (as in step 15 on

=268), set the BR-E1’s release mode/movie shooting switch to <o>

(immediate release) or <2> (release after 2-sec. delay).

• If the remote control’s switch has been set to <k>, the time-lapse movie

recording cannot start.

Camera status/remote

control setting

<o> Immediate

release

<2> 2-sec. delay

<k> Movie

recording

Test-shooting screen Test-shooting To shooting-ready

Shooting-ready Starts shooting To test-shooting

screen

During time-lapse movie

recording Ends recording Ends recording

Approx. Time Available for Recording Time-lapse Movies

For guidelines on how long you can record time-lapse movies (until the

battery runs out), see =587.

274

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Video Snapshots

Record a series of short video snapshots, each a few seconds long, and

the camera will combine them to create a video snapshot album that shows

these highlights of your trip or event.

Video snapshots are available when the movie recording size is set to

L6X (NTSC) or L5X (PAL).

Video snapshot albums can also be played back with background music

(=336).

Creating a Video Snapshot Album

Video

snapshot 1

Video

snapshot 2

Video

snapshot **

Video snapshot album

Setting Recording Time Per Video Snapshot

Select a shooting mode.

zSelect [k] (=239) or [M] (=241).

Select [z: Video snapshot].

Select [Enable].

275

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Video Snapshots

Select [Album settings].

Select [Create a new album].

zRead the message and select [OK].

Specify the playback time.

zSpecify playback time per video

snapshot.

Specify the playback e󰀨ect.

zThis setting determines how fast albums

are played back.

(1)

Check the required recording time.

zThe time required to record each video

snapshot is indicated (1), based on the

playback time and e󰀨ect.

276

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Video Snapshots

(2)

Close the menu.

zPress the <M> button to close the

menu.

gA blue bar is displayed to indicate the

recording time (2).

zGo to “Creating Video Snapshot

Albums”.

Creating Video Snapshot Albums

Record the rst video snapshot.

zPress the movie shooting button to start

recording.

gThe blue bar indicating recording time

gradually decreases, and after the

specied time elapses, recording stops

automatically.

gA conrmation message is displayed

(=277).

Save as a video snapshot album.

zSelect [J Save as album].

zThe clip is saved as the rst video

snapshot in the album.

Record your next video snapshots.

zRepeat step 10 to record the next video

snapshot.

zSelect [J Add to album].

zTo create another album, select [W

Save as a new album].

zRepeat step 12 as needed.

277

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Video Snapshots

Stop recording video snapshots.

zSet [Video snapshot] to [Disable]. To

return to normal movie recording, be

sure to specify [Disable].

zPress the <M> button to close

the menu and return to normal movie

recording.

Options in Steps 11 and 12

Function Description

J Save as album (step 11) Saves the clip as the rst video snapshot in an

album.

J Add to album (step 12) Adds the current video snapshot to the album

recorded most recently.

W Save as a new album (step 12)

Creates a new album and saves the clip as the rst

video snapshot. This album le is di󰀨erent from the

one recorded most recently.

W Playback video snapshot

(steps 11, 12) Plays the video snapshot just recorded.

r Do not save to album (step 11)

r Delete without saving to album

(step 12)

Deletes the recently recorded video snapshot

without saving it to an album. Select [OK] on the

conrmation dialog.

oIf you prefer to record the next video snapshot immediately, set [Show

conrm msg] under [z: Video snapshot] to [Disable]. This setting enables

you to record the next video snapshot immediately, without a conrmation

message.

278

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Video Snapshots

Adding to an Existing Album

Select [Add to existing album].

zFollow step 5 on =275 to select [Add

to existing album].

Select an existing album.

zTurn the <5> dial to select an existing

album, then press <0>.

zSelect [OK].

gSome video snapshot settings will be

updated to match settings of the existing

album.

Close the menu.

zPress the <M> button to close the

menu.

gThe video snapshot recording screen is

displayed.

Record a video snapshot.

zRecord the video snapshot, referring

to “Creating Video Snapshot Albums”

(=276).

oYou cannot select an album taken with another camera.

279

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Recording Video Snapshots

General Video Snapshot Precautions

oNo sound is recorded when you set [Playback e󰀨ect] to [1/2x speed] or [2x

speed].

oRecording time per video snapshot is only approximate. It may di󰀨er slightly

from the actual recording time indicated during playback, due to the frame rate

and other factors.

280

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Movie Servo AF

With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously

during movie recording.

Select [z: Movie Servo AF].

Select [Enable].

zWhen [Enable] is set:

The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you are

not pressing the shutter button halfway.

To keep the focus at a specic position, or if you prefer not to record

mechanical sounds from the lens, you can temporarily stop Movie

Servo AF by touching [Z] in the lower left of the screen.

When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie recording after

operations such as pressing the <M> or <x> button or changing

the AF method, Movie Servo AF will resume.

zWhen [Disable] is set:

Press the shutter button halfway or press the button to focus.

281

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Movie Servo AF

Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]

oRecording Conditions that Make Focusing Di󰀩cult

• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.

• A subject moving at a close distance to the camera.

• When shooting with a higher f/number.

• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Di󰀩cult” on =197.

oSince the lens is driven continuously and the battery power is consumed, the

possible movie recording time (=586) will be shortened.

oIf AF operations are performed or you control the camera or lens during movie

recording, the camera’s built-in microphone may also record mechanical

sounds of the lens or sounds of camera/lens operations. In this case, using

an external microphone may reduce these sounds. If the sounds are still

distracting with an external microphone, it may be more e󰀨ective to remove

the external microphone from the camera and position it away from the

camera and lens.

oMovie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnied view.

oDuring movie recording, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the

camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie

image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image magnication).

282

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Movie Servo AF

Movie Servo AF Track Sensitivity

You can adjust the tracking sensitivity (to one of seven levels), which a󰀨ects

responsiveness if the subject strays from the AF point during Movie Servo

AF, as when interfering objects move across AF points or when you pan.

Select [z: Movie Servo AF track

sens.].

zLocked on: –3/–2/–1

With this setting, the camera is less

likely to track a di󰀨erent subject if the

main subject strays from the AF point.

The closer the setting is to the minus (–)

symbol, the less the camera is inclined

to track a di󰀨erent subject. It is e󰀨ective

when you want to prevent the AF points

from rapidly tracking something that is

not the intended subject during panning

or when an obstacle cuts across the AF

points.

Responsive: +1/+2/+3

This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject that

covers the AF point. The closer the setting is to the plus (+) symbol,

the more responsive the camera is. It is e󰀨ective when you want

to keep tracking a moving subject as its distance from the camera

changes or to rapidly focus on another subject.

oHas no e󰀨ect (setting is disabled) when 4K movie recording is set.

oAvailable when [z: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [z: AF

method] is set to [1-point AF].

oOperation when [z: AF method] is set to an option other than [1-point AF]

is equivalent to a setting of [0].

283

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Movie Servo AF

Movie Servo AF Speed

You can set the Movie Servo AF’s AF speed and its operation conditions.

The function is enabled when using a lens supporting slow focus transition

during movie recording*.

Select [z: Movie Servo AF speed].

zWhen active:

You can set [Always on] to have the AF

speed take e󰀨ect at all times for movie

recording (before and during movie

recording) or set [During shooting]

to have the AF speed take e󰀨ect only

during movie recording.

zAF speed:

You can adjust the AF speed (focus

transition speed) from the standard

speed (0) to slow (one of seven levels)

or fast (one of two levels) to obtain the

desired e󰀨ect for the movie creation.

* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie

recording

USM and STM lenses released in and after 2009 are compatible. For

details, refer to the Canon website.

284

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Movie Servo AF

oWith certain lenses, even if you adjust the AF speed, the speed may not

change.

oHas no e󰀨ect (setting is disabled) when 4K movie recording is set.

oAvailable when [z: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [z: AF

method] is set to [1-point AF].

oOperation when [z: AF method] is set to an option other than [1-point AF]

is equivalent to setting [AF speed] to [Standard (0)].

oAn asterisk to the right of [z: Movie Servo AF speed] indicates that the

default setting has been modied.

285

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Other Menu Functions

[z2]

zLens aberration correction

Peripheral illumination, distortion, and chromatic aberration can be

corrected as you record movies. For details on lens aberration correction,

see =123.

zRemote control shooting

When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie recording using

Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately). First, pair the BR-E1

with the camera (=399).

With Wireless Remote Control BR-E1

Set the release mode/movie shooting switch to the <k> position, then

press the release button.

For details on Time-lapse movie recording, see =273.

286

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Other Menu Functions

[z3]

zk ISO speed settings

ISO speedM

In [M] mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also

select ISO Auto.

ISO speed range

When recording Full HD/HD movies or Full HD time-lapse movies,

you can set the manual ISO speed setting range (minimum and

maximum).

Range for H

When recording 4K or 4K time-lapse movies, you can set the manual

ISO speed setting range (minimum and maximum).

Max for Auto

You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in Full HD/HD movie

recording in [k] mode or in [M] mode with ISO Auto.

HMax for Auto

You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in 4K movie recording in

[k] mode or in [M] mode with ISO Auto.

aMax for Auto

You can set the maximum limit for ISO Auto in 4K time-lapse/Full HD

time-lapse movie recording in [k] mode or in [M] mode with ISO

Auto.

oExpanded ISO speeds (indicated by [H]) are ISO 32000/40000 for Full HD/HD

movies and ISO 16000/20000/25600/32000/40000 for 4K movies.

287

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Other Menu Functions

zHighlight tone priority

You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights as you record movies.

For details on Highlight tone priority, see =137.

o[Enhanced] is not available (not displayed) when recording movies with [z:

Highlight tone priority] set.

288

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Other Menu Functions

zk Auto slow shutter

You can choose whether to shoot movies

that are brighter and less a󰀨ected by

image noise than when set to [Disable]

by automatically slowing the shutter speed

under low light.

Available in [k] shooting mode. Applies

when the frame rate of the movie recording

size is 8 or 7.

Disable

Enables you to record movies with smoother, more natural movement,

less a󰀨ected by subject shake than when set to [Enable]. Note that

under low light, movies may be darker than when set to [Enable].

Enable

Enables you to shoot brighter movies, less a󰀨ected by image noise,

than when set to [Disable] by automatically reducing the shutter

speed to 1/30 sec. (NTSC) or 1/25 sec. (PAL) under low light.

oSetting to [Disable] is recommended when recording moving subjects under

low light, or when afterimages such as trails may occur.

289

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Other Menu Functions

zk Av 1/8-stop incrementsM

You can set aperture values on a ner

scale when recording movies with an RF

lens.

Available in [M] shooting mode.

Select [Enable] to change the aperture

increment from 1/3 stop (or 1/2 stop) to 1/8

stop.

o[kAv 1/8-stop incr.] is not available (not displayed) when EF or EF-S lenses

are used.

oWhen set to [Enable], setting options in [8C.Fn I-1: Exposure level

increments] are disabled and have no e󰀨ect.

290

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Other Menu Functions

[z4]

zHDMI info disp

You can congure information display for

image output via an HDMI cable.

zWith info

The image, shooting information, AF points, and other information is

shown on the other device via HDMI. Note that the camera screen goes

o󰀨.

Recorded movies are saved to the card.

zClean / H output

HDMI output consists solely of 4K movies. Shooting information and AF

points are also displayed on the camera, but no image is recorded to the

card. Note that Wi-Fi communication is not available.

zClean / L output

HDMI output consists solely of Full HD movies. Shooting information and

AF points are also displayed on the camera, but no image is recorded to

the card. Note that Wi-Fi communication is not available.

291

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

General Movie Recording Cautions

Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icon

oIf the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie

recording or under a high ambient temperature, a red <E> icon will appear.

oThe red <E> icon indicates that movie recording will soon be terminated

automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the

camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn o󰀨 the power and let the

camera rest for a while.

oRecording a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the

red <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, always turn o󰀨

the camera.

Recording and Image Quality

oIf the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer

(IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if

you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer consumes

battery power and may shorten the total movie recording time depending on

the shooting conditions. When the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, such as

when using a tripod, it is recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.

oIf the brightness changes as you record a movie with auto exposure, the

movie may appear to stop momentarily. In this case, record movies with

manual exposure.

oIf there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may appear

black on the screen. Movies are recorded almost exactly as they appear on

the screen.

oImage noise or irregular colors may occur when shooting at high ISO speeds,

high temperatures, low shutter speeds, or under low light. Movies are recorded

almost exactly as they appear on the screen, except in time-lapse movie

recording.

oIf you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may

decline or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support MP4

format).

292

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

General Movie Recording Cautions

Recording and Image Quality

oIf you use a card with a slow writing speed, an indicator

may appear on the right of the screen during movie

recording. It indicates how much data has not yet been

written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal

bu󰀨er memory). The slower the card, the faster the

indicator will climb upward. If the indicator (1) becomes

full, movie recording will stop automatically.

oIf the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will

either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First, shoot a

few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.

oIf the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie recording stops

automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded

properly.

oIf the card’s writing speed is slow (due to fragmentation) and the indicator

appears, formatting the card may make the writing speed faster.

(1)

Audio Restrictions

oNote that the following restrictions apply when [Movie rec. size] is set to

L6V (NTSC) or L5V (PAL), when [8C.Fn III-9: Audio

compression] is set to [Enable], and for HDR movies.

• Sound will not be recorded for approx. the last two frames.

• When you play back movies on Windows, movie images and sound may

become slightly out of synchronization.

293

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

293

Playback

This chapter covers topics related to playback—playing back

captured still photos and movies—and introduces menu settings

on the Playback ([x]) tab.

Images shot and saved with another device

Normal display or selection on this camera may not be possible for

images captured on other cameras, or images from this camera that

have been edited or renamed on a computer.

294

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Playback

zPlayback 1

=310

=313

=314

=318

=322

zPlayback 2

=325

=331

=333

=334

zPlayback 3

=337

=339

=340

=343

=345

=347

o[3: RAW image processing] and [3: Quick Control RAW processing]

are not displayed in Basic Zone modes.

295

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Playback

zPlayback 4

=349

=351

=352

=353

=354

=355

296

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Image Playback

Single-Image Display

Play back the image.

zPress the <x> button.

Select an image.

zTo play back newer images, press the

<Z> button, and to play back older

images, press the <Y> button.

zEach time you press the button,

the display will change.

No information Basic information

display

Shooting information display

Exit the image playback.

zPress the <x> button to exit the image

playback.

297

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Image Playback

Shooting Information Display

With the shooting information screen displayed, you can press the <W>

<X> keys to change the information displayed. You can also customize the

information displayed, in [x: Playback information display] (=349).

298

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Image Playback

Touch Playback

The camera features a touch-screen panel that you can touch to control

playback. Supported touch operations are like those used with smartphones

and similar devices. First, press the <x> button to prepare for touch

playback.

Image browsing

Magnied view

Index displayJump display

oYou can also magnify display by double-tapping with one nger.

299

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Magnifying Images

You can magnify your captured images.

(1)

Magnify the image.

zDuring image playback, press the

button.

gThe magnied view will appear. The

magnied area position (1) and [6u]

will be displayed on the lower right of the

screen.

zTo magnify images, turn the <6> dial

clockwise.

zTo reduce magnication, turn the <6>

dial counterclockwise. For index display

(=300), keep turning the dial.

Scroll the image.

zPress the <V> cross keys to scroll the

image vertically and horizontally.

zTo cancel the magnied view, press the

button.

300

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)

Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or 100

images on one screen.

Press the button.

zDuring image playback, press the

button.

g[6u] will be displayed on the lower

right of the screen.

Switch to the index display.

zTurn the <6> dial counterclockwise.

gThe 4-image index display will appear.

The selected image is highlighted with

an orange frame.

zTurning the <6> dial further

counterclockwise will switch the display

from 9 images, 36 images, and to 100

images. If you turn the dial clockwise,

it will rotate through 100, 36, 9, 4, and

single-image display.

BBBB

Select an image.

zPress the <V> cross keys to move the

orange frame and select the image.

zPress <0> in the index display to

display the selected image in the single-

image display.

301

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Playing Back Movies

Play back the image.

zPress the <x> button.

Select a movie.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

movie to play back.

zIn the single-image display, the

<s1> icon displayed on the upper

left indicates a movie.

zIn the index display, perforations at

the left edge of a thumbnail indicate a

movie. As movies cannot be played

back from the index display, press

<0> to switch to the single-image

display.

In the single-image display, press

<0>.

Press <0> to play back the

movie.

gThe movie will start playing back.

(1)

zYou can pause playback and display

the movie playback panel by pressing

<0>. Press it again to resume the

playback.

zYou can also adjust the volume during

movie playback by using the <W> <X>

keys.

(1) Speaker

302

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Playing Back Movies

Movie Playback Panel

Item Playback Operations

7 Play Pressing <0> toggles between playback and stop.

8 Slow motion

Adjust the slow motion speed with the <Y> <Z> keys. The

slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the

screen.

T Skip backward Skips backward 4 sec. each time you press <0>.

3 Previous frame Displays the previous frame each time you press <0>.

Holding <0> down will rewind the movie.

6 Next frame Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press

<0>. Holding <0> down will fast forward the movie.

v Skip forward Skips forward 4 sec. each time you press <0>.

X Edit Displays the editing screen (=304).

y Background music Plays back a movie with the selected background music

(=336).

I Frame Grab

Available when you play 4K or 4K time-lapse movies.

Enables you to extract the current frame and save it as a

JPEG still image (=306).

Playback position

mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)

Volume Use the <W> <X> keys to adjust the speaker volume

(=301).

303

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Playing Back Movies

Movie Playback Panel (Video Snapshot Albums)

Item Playback Operations

7 Play Pressing <0> toggles between playback and stop.

8 Slow motion

Adjust the slow motion speed with the <Y> <Z> keys. The

slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the

screen.

T Previous clip Displays the rst frame of the previous video snapshot.

3 Previous frame Displays the previous frame each time you press <0>.

Holding <0> down will rewind the movie.

6 Next frame Plays the movie frame-by-frame each time you press

<0>. Holding <0> down will fast forward the movie.

v Next clip Displays the rst frame of the next video snapshot.

L Erase clip Erases the current video snapshot.

X Edit Displays the editing screen (=304).

y Background music Plays back an album with the selected background music

(=336).

Playback position

mm’ ss” Playback time (minutes:seconds)

Volume Use the <W> <X> keys to adjust the speaker volume

(=301).

oAdjust the volume using television controls when the camera is connected to a

television for movie playback (=308). (Volume cannot be adjusted with the

<W> <X> keys.)

oMovie playback may stop if the card’s read speed is too slow or movie les

have corrupted frames.

oFor details on the movie recording time available, see =586.

304

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

You can edit out the rst and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.

increments.

Pause movie playback.

gThe movie playback panel will appear.

On the movie playback panel,

select [X].

Specify the part to be edited out.

zSelect either [U] (Cut beginning) or

[V] (Cut end).

zPress the <Y> <Z> keys for frame-by-

frame playback.

zAfter deciding which part to edit out,

press <0>. The portion indicated by

a line at the bottom of the screen will

remain.

Check the edited movie.

zSelect [7] to play the edited movie.

zTo change the edited part, go back to

step 3.

zTo cancel the editing, press the <M>

button.

305

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes

(1) (2)

Save the image.

zSelect [W] (1).

zThe save screen will appear.

zTo save it as a new movie, select [New

le]. To save it and overwrite the original

movie le, select [Overwrite].

zSelect [] (2) to save a compressed

version of the le. 4K movies are

converted to Full HD movies before

compression.

zOn the conrmation dialog, select [OK]

to save the edited movie and return to

the movie playback screen.

oBecause editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (at the position

indicated by [] at the bottom of the screen), the actual position where movies

are trimmed may di󰀨er from your specied position.

oMovies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.

oYou cannot edit a movie when the camera is connected to a computer.

oCompress and save is not available for movie recording sizes of L6V

(NTSC) or L5V (PAL).

oFor instructions on editing video snapshot albums, see “Editing Video

Snapshot Albums” (=334).

306

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies or 4K

Time-Lapse Movies

From 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies, you can select individual frames

to save as approx. 8.3-megapixel (3840×2160) JPEG still images. This

function is called “Frame Grab (4K frame capture)”.

Play back the image.

zPress the <3> button.

Select a 4K movie.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select a 4K

movie or 4K time-lapse movie.

zOn the shooting information screen

(=599), 4K movies and 4K time-lapse

movies are indicated by an [H] icon.

zIn index display, press <0> to switch

to single-image display.

In the single-image display, press

<0>.

Pause movie playback.

gThe movie playback panel will appear.

Select a frame to grab.

zUse the movie playback panel to select

the frame to grab as a still photo.

zFor movie playback panel instructions,

see =302.

Select [I].

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select [I].

307

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Grabbing a Frame from 4K Movies or 4K Time-Lapse Movies

Save the image.

zSelect [OK] to save the current frame as

a JPEG still image.

Select the image to display.

zCheck the destination folder and image

le number.

zSelect [View original movie] or [View

extracted still image].

oFrame grabbing is not possible with Full HD movies, Full HD time-lapse

movies, or with 4K movies or 4K time-lapse movies from a di󰀨erent camera.

308

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Playback on a TV

By connecting the camera to a television with an HDMI cable, you can play

back the captured still photos and movies on the television. Using the HDMI

Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended.

If the image does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [5: Video

system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the

video system of your television).

Connect the HDMI cable to the

camera.

zWith the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo

facing the front of the camera, insert it

into the <D> terminal.

Connect the HDMI cable to the

television.

zConnect the HDMI cable to the

television’s HDMI IN port.

Turn on the television and switch

the television’s video input to

select the connected port.

Set the camera’s power switch to

<1>.

Press the <x> button.

gThe image will appear on the TV screen.

(Nothing will be displayed on the camera

screen.)

zThe images will automatically be

displayed at the optimum resolution

matching the connected television.

309

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Playback on a TV

oAdjust movie sound volume with the television. The sound volume cannot be

adjusted with the camera.

oBefore connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and

television, turn o󰀨 the camera and television.

oDepending on the television, part of the image displayed may be cut o󰀨.

oDo not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>

terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

oCertain televisions may not display the images due to incompatibility.

oIt may take some time before images are displayed. To avoid delay, set [5:

HDMI resolution] to [1080p] (=386).

oTouch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is connected to

a television.

310

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Protecting Images

You can protect important images from being accidentally erased.

Protecting a Single Image

Select [3: Protect images].

Select [Select images].

Select an image.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

image to protect.

(1)

Protect the image.

zPress <0> to protect the selected

image. The <K> icon (1) will appear at

the top of the screen.

zTo cancel the image protection, press

<0> again. The <K> icon will

disappear.

zTo protect another image, repeat steps 3

and 4.

311

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Protecting Images

Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the rst

and last images for a range to protect all the specied images at once.

Select [Select range].

zSelect [Select range] in [3: Protect

images].

Specify the range of images.

zSelect the rst image (start point).

zNext, select the last image (end point).

gThe images in the specied range will

be protected and the <J> icon will

appear.

zTo select another image to be protected,

repeat step 2.

312

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Protecting Images

Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

When you select [All images in folder]

or [All images on card] in [3: Protect

images], all the images in the folder or on

the card will be protected.

To cancel the selection, select [Unprotect

all images in folder] or [Unprotect all

images on card].

If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]

(=345), the display will change to [All found images] and [Unprotect all

found].

If you select [All found images], all the

images ltered by the search conditions will

be protected.

If you select [Unprotect all found], the

protection of all the ltered images will be

canceled.

oIf you format the card (=367), the protected images will also be erased.

oOnce an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase

function. To erase a protected image, you must rst cancel the protection.

oIf you erase all the images (=317), only the protected images will remain.

This is convenient when you want to erase all unnecessary images at once.

313

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Rotating Images

You can use this feature to rotate the displayed image to the desired

orientation.

Select [3: Rotate image].

Select an image.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

image to rotate.

Rotate the image.

zEach time you press <0>, the image

will rotate clockwise as follows: 90° →

270° → 0°.

zTo rotate another image, repeat steps 2

and 3.

oIf you set [5: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (=366) before taking vertical

shots, you need not rotate the image with this function.

oIf the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during image

playback, set [5: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].

314

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Erasing Images

You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase

them in one batch. Protected images (=310) will not be erased.

oOnce an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no

longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important images

from being erased accidentally, protect them.

Erasing a Single Image

Select the image to be erased.

zPress the <x> button.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

image to erase.

Press the <L> button.

Erase the images.

JPEG or RAW Images or Movies

zSelect [Erase].

RAW+JPEG images

zSelect an item.

315

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Erasing Images

Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch

By adding checkmarks to the images to be erased, you can erase all those

images at once.

Select [3: Erase images].

Select [Select and erase images].

Select an image.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

image to erase, then press <0>.

zTo select another image to be erased,

repeat step 3.

Erase the images.

zPress the <M> button, then press

[OK].

316

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Erasing Images

Specifying the Range of Images to Be Erased

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the rst

and last images for a range to erase all the specied images at once.

Select [Select range].

zSelect [Select range] in [3: Erase

images].

Specify the range of images.

zSelect the rst image (start point).

zNext, select the last image (end point).

Press the <M> button.

Erase the images.

zSelect [OK].

317

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Erasing Images

Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

When [3: Erase images] is set to [All

images in folder] or [All images on card],

all the images in the folder or on the card

will be erased.

If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]

(=345), the display will change to [All found images].

If you select [All found images], all the

images ltered by the search conditions will

be erased.

oTo erase all the images including protected images, format the card (=367).

318

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on

the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection,

quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a

print order for a photonisher.

You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, le number

imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all the images specied

for printing. (They cannot be set individually for each image.)

Setting the Printing Option

Select [3: Print order].

Select [Set up].

Set the options as desired.

zSet the [Print type], [Date], and [File

No.].

Print type

KStandard Prints one image on one sheet.

LIndex Multiple thumbnail images are printed on one

sheet.

KBoth Prints both the standard and index prints.

Date On [On] imprints the recorded date of the captured image.

O󰀨

File number On [On] imprints the le number.

O󰀨

319

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Exit the setting.

zPress the <M> button.

zNext, select [Sel.Image] or [Multiple] to

specify the images to be printed.

oIf you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both]

setting (=318), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In

this case, resize the image (=339), then print the index print.

oEven if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or le number may not

be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer.

oWith [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On] at the

same time.

oWhen printing with DPOF, use the card for which print order specications are

set. You cannot print in the specied print order if you extract just the images

from the card for printing.

oCertain DPOF-compliant printers and photonishers may not be able to print

the images as you specied. Refer to the printer’s instruction manual before

printing, or check with your photonisher about compatibility when ordering

prints.

oDo not use this camera to congure print settings for images with DPOF

settings set up on another camera. All the print orders may be overwritten

inadvertently. Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the

image type.

320

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Specifying Images for Printing

zSelecting Images

Select and specify the images one by one.

Press the <M> button to save the print

order to the card.

(1) (2)

zStandard / Both

Press <0> to print a copy of the

displayed image. By pressing the <W>

<X> keys, you can set the number of

copies to be printed up to 99.

(1) Quantity

(2) Total images selected

(3) (4)

zIndex

Press <0> to add a checkmark to the

box [X]. The image will be included in

the index print.

(3) Checkmark

(4) Index icon

zSelecting Multiple Images

Select Range

Under [Multiple], select [Select range].

Selecting the rst and last images of the

range marks all the images in the range

with a checkmark [X], and one copy of

each image will be printed.

321

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

All Images in a Folder

Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one

copy of all the images in the folder will be specied.

If you select [Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order

for all the images in the folder will be canceled.

All Images on a Card

If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the

card will be specied for printing.

If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for all

the images on the card.

If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]

(=345) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [Mark all

found images] and [Clear all found images].

All Found Images

If you select [Mark all found images], one copy of all the images

ltered by the search conditions will be specied for printing.

If you select [Clear all found images], all the print order of the ltered

images will be cleared.

oRAW images or movies cannot be specied for printing. Note that RAW

images or movies will not be specied for printing even if you specify all

images with [Multiple].

oWhen using a PictBridge-compatible printer, do not specify more than 400

images for one print order. If you specify more than this, the images may not

all be printed.

322

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Specifying Images for a Photobook

You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When

you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to import images to a computer, the

specied images for a photobook will be copied to a dedicated folder. This

function is useful for ordering photobooks online.

Specifying One Image at a Time

Select [3: Photobook Set-up].

Select [Select images].

Select the image to be specied.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select an

image, then press <0>.

zTo select other images to be specied

for a photobook, repeat step 3.

323

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Specifying Images for a Photobook

Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the range

(start point to end point) of images to be specied for a photobook at once.

Select [Multiple].

zUnder [3: Photobook Set-up], select

[Multiple].

Select [Select range].

Specify the range of images.

zSelect the rst image (start point).

zNext, select the last image (end point).

gA checkmark [X] will be appended to

all the images within the range between

rst and last images.

324

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Specifying Images for a Photobook

Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once for a

photobook.

Under [x: Photobook Set-up], you can

set [Multiple] to [All images in folder]

or [All images on card] to specify all the

images in the folder or on the card for a

photobook.

To cancel the selection, select [Clear all in

folder] or [Clear all on card].

If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]

(=345) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [All found

images] and [Clear all found images].

If you select [All found images], all the

images ltered by the search conditions will

be specied for the photobook.

If you select [Clear all found images], all

the photobook order of the ltered images

will be cleared.

oRAW images or movies cannot be specied for the photobook. Note that RAW

images or movies will not be specied for the photobook even if you specify all

images with [Multiple].

oDo not use this camera to congure photobook settings for images with

photobook settings set up on another camera. All the photobook settings may

be overwritten inadvertently.

325

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

You can process 1 or F images with the camera to create JPEG

images. RAW images are not a󰀨ected, so di󰀨erent conditions can be

applied to create JPEGs.

You can also use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software) to process

RAW images.

Select [3: RAW image

processing].

Select an item, then select images.

zYou can select multiple images to

process at once.

Select images

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select

images to process, then press <0>.

zPress the <M> button.

Select range

zSelect the rst image (start point).

zNext, select the last image (end point).

zPress the <M> button.

326

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

Set the desired processing

conditions.

Use shot settings

zImages are processed using image

settings at the time of capture.

Customize RAW processing

zUse the <W> <X> <Y> <Z> keys to

select an item.

zTurn the <6> or <5> dial to switch

the setting.

zPress <0> to access the function

setting screen.

zTo return to the image settings at the

time of shooting, press the <L> button.

Comparison Screen

zYou can switch between the [After

change] and [Shot settings] screens

by pressing the button and

turning the <5> dial.

zItems in orange on the [After change]

screen have been modied since the

time of capture.

zPress the <M> button.

Save the image.

zWhen using [Customize RAW

processing], select [W] (Save).

zRead the message and select [OK].

zTo process other images, select [Yes]

and repeat steps 2–4.

327

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

Select the image to display.

zSelect [Original image] or [Processed

img.].

Magnied View

You can magnify images displayed for [Customize RAW processing] by

pressing the button. Magnication varies depending on the [Image

quality] setting. Using <V> cross keys, you can scroll the magnied image

vertically and horizontally.

To cancel the magnied view, press the button again.

Images with Aspect Ratio Setting

JPEG images at the specied aspect ratio are created when you process

RAW images with [z: zCropping/aspect ratio] (=119) set to [1:1

(aspect ratio)], [4:3 (aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect ratio)].

oSome settings cannot be changed when multiple-exposure 1 or F

images are processed.

328

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

RAW Image Processing Options

z[ ] Brightness adjustment

You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop increments.

z[ ] White balance (=140)

You can select the white balance. If you select [Q], you can select [Auto:

Ambience priority] or [Auto: White priority]. If you select [P], you

can set the color temperature.

z[ ] Picture Style (=148)

You can select the Picture Style. You can adjust the sharpness, contrast,

and other parameters.

z[ ] Auto Lighting Optimizer (=136)

You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer.

z[ ] High ISO speed noise reduction (=157)

You can set the noise reduction processing for high ISO speeds. If the

e󰀨ect is di󰀩cult to discern, magnify the image (=299).

z[73] Image quality (=116)

You can set the image quality when creating a JPEG image. Note that

only 73/83/b are available for RAW images captured in cropped

shooting or with EF-S lenses.

329

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

z[ ] Color space (=147)

You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera screen is

not compatible with Adobe RGB, the di󰀨erence in the image will hardly be

perceptible when either color space is set.

z[ ] Lens aberration correction

[ ] Peripheral illumination correction (=124)

A phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the

lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected

image will be displayed. If the e󰀨ect is di󰀩cult to discern, magnify

the image (=299) and check the four corners. The peripheral

illumination correction applied with the camera will be less pronounced

than that applied with the Digital Photo Professional (EOS software)

at maximum correction amount. If the e󰀨ects of correction are not

apparent, use Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral

illumination correction.

[ ] Distortion correction (=124)

Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If

[Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The image

periphery will be trimmed in the corrected image.

Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the

sharpness with the Picture Style’s [Sharpness] parameter setting as

necessary.

[ ] Digital Lens Optimizer (=125)

Correct lens aberration, di󰀨raction, and low-pass lter-induced loss

of sharpness by applying optical design values. Magnify images

(=299) to check the e󰀨ects of setting this option to [Enable].

Without magnication, the e󰀨ect of Digital Lens Optimizer is not

displayed. Selecting [Enable] corrects both chromatic aberration and

di󰀨raction, although these options are not displayed.

330

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Processing RAW Images with the Camera

[ ] Chromatic aberration correction (=126)

Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline) due

to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the

corrected image will be displayed. If the e󰀨ect is di󰀩cult to discern,

magnify the image (=299).

[] Di󰀨raction correction (=126)

The di󰀨raction by the lens aperture degrading the image sharpness

can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be

displayed. If the e󰀨ect is di󰀩cult to discern, magnify the image

(=299).

oProcessing RAW images in the camera will not produce exactly the same

results as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional (EOS

software).

oIf you perform [Brightness adjustment], noise, banding, etc. may be

intensied with the e󰀨ects of adjustment.

oWhen [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set, noise may be intensied together with

the e󰀨ects of correction. Image edges may also be emphasized. Adjust Picture

Style sharpness or set [Digital Lens Optimizer] to [Disable], as needed.

oThe e󰀨ect of the lens aberration correction varies depending on the lens used

and shooting conditions. Also, the e󰀨ect may be di󰀩cult to discern depending

on the lens used, shooting conditions, etc.

331

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Applying Your Favorite Effects (Creative

Assist)

You can process RAW images by applying your preferred e󰀨ects and saving

as JPEGs.

Select [3: Creative Assist].

Select an image.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select

images to process, then press <0>.

Select an e󰀨ect level.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

e󰀨ect.

zBy selecting [Preset] and pressing

<0>, you can choose [Vivid],

[Soft], or other preset e󰀨ects. [Auto

1], [Auto 2], and [Auto 3] are e󰀨ects

recommended by the camera based on

image conditions.

332

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Applying Your Favorite E󰀨ects (Creative Assist)

zYou can adjust e󰀨ects such as

[Brightness] or [Contrast] by pressing

<0> and then using the <Y> <Z>

keys.

zPress <0> when adjustment is

nished.

zTo reset the e󰀨ect, press the <L>

button.

zTo conrm the e󰀨ect, press the <S>

button.

Select [OK] to save the image.

333

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Selecting the Type of RAW Image

Processing

You can select the type of RAW image processing performed from the Quick

Control screen.

Select [3: Quick Control RAW

processing].

Select an item.

zCreative Assist

RAW processing that applies your

preferred e󰀨ect (=331).

zRAW image processing

RAW processing according to conditions

you specify (=325).

334

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Editing Video Snapshot Albums

You can rearrange, delete, or play back the video snapshots in an album.

Select [3: Create album].

Select an album to edit.

zPress <0> to add a checkmark [X].

zAfter selection, press the <M>

button.

Select [OK].

Select an editing option.

335

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Editing Video Snapshot Albums

Option Description

T Rearrange video

snapshots

Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select a video snapshot to move,

then press <0>. Use the <Y> <Z> keys to move it, then

press <0>.

Remove video

snapshot

Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select a video snapshot to delete,

then press <0>. Selected video snapshots are labeled [L].

To clear the selection and remove [L], press <0> again.

Play video

snapshot

Use the <Y> <Z> keys to select a video snapshot to play, then

press <0>. Use the <W> <X> keys to adjust the volume.

Finish editing.

zPress the <M> button when you are

nished editing.

zSelect [W] (Finish editing).

Save the image.

zTo play an album with background

music, use [Background music] to

select the music (=336).

zTo check your editing, select [Preview].

zSelecting [Save] saves the edited album

as a new album.

oVideo snapshot albums can only be edited once.

336

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Editing Video Snapshot Albums

Selecting Background Music

Albums and slideshows can be played with background music once you

copy the music to the card, using EOS Utility (EOS software).

Select [Background music].

zSet [Background music] to [On].

Select the background music.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select the

music, then press <0>. For [Slide

show], you can select multiple tracks.

Listen to a sample.

zTo listen to a sample, press the

button.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to adjust the

volume. Press the again to stop

playback.

zTo delete the music, use the <W> <X>

keys to select it, then press the <L>

button.

oFor instructions on copying background music to cards, refer to the EOS Utility

Instruction Manual.

337

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Cropping JPEG Images

You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image.

Cropping an image is possible only with JPEG images. Images shot in

RAW cannot be cropped.

Select [x: Cropping].

Select an image.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

image to crop.

Set the cropping frame.

zPress <0> to display the cropping

frame.

zThe image area within the cropping

frame will be cropped.

zChanging the Cropping Frame Size

Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size. The smaller the

cropping frame, the more magnied the cropped image will look.

zChanging the Aspect Ratio and Orientation

Turn the <5> dial to select <e>. Press <0> to change the cropping

frame’s aspect ratio.

338

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Cropping JPEG Images

zMoving the Cropping Frame

Press the <V> cross keys to move the frame vertically or horizontally.

Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area.

zCorrecting the Tilt

You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Turn the <5> dial to select <c>,

then press <0>. While checking the tilt against the grid, turn the <5>

dial (in 0.1° increments) or tap the left or right wedge (in 0.5° increments)

on the upper left of the screen to correct the tilt. After completing the tilt

correction, press <0>.

Check the image area to be

cropped.

zTurn the <5> dial to select .

gThe image area to be cropped will be

displayed.

Save the image.

zTurn the <5> dial to select <W>.

zSelect [OK] to save the cropped image.

zCheck the destination folder and image

le number, then select [OK].

zTo crop another image, repeat steps 2 to

oThe position and size of the cropping frame may change depending on the

angle set for tilt correction.

oOnce a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.

oAF point display information (=352) and Dust Delete Data (=161) will not

be appended to the cropped images.

339

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Resizing JPEG Images

You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it as

a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4, and a

images. JPEG b and RAW images cannot be resized.

Select [3: Resize].

Select an image.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

image to resize.

(1)

Select the desired image size.

zPress <0> to display the image sizes.

zSelect the desired image size (1).

zOnly resizing to b is available for JPEG

images captured in cropped shooting or

with EF-S lenses.

Save the image.

zSelect [OK] to save the resized image.

zCheck the destination folder and image

le number, then select [OK].

zTo resize another image, repeat steps 2

to 4.

oFor details on image sizes of resized images, see =590.

340

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Ratings

You can rate images on a scale of 1–5 (l/m/n/o/p). This function is

called rating.

Rating a Single Image

Select [3: Rating].

Select [Select images].

Select the image to be rated.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

image to rate.

Rate the image.

zPress <0>, and a blue highlight frame

will appear as shown in the screen

shown on the left.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select a

rating mark, then press <0>.

gWhen you append a rating mark to the

image, the number beside the set rating

will increase by one.

zTo rate another image, repeat steps 3

and 4.

341

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Ratings

Rating by Specifying the Range

While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the rst

and last images for a range to rate all the specied images at once.

Select [Select range].

zSelect [Select range] in [3: Rating].

Specify the range of images.

zSelect the rst image (start point).

zNext, select the last image (end point).

gA checkmark [X] will be appended to

all the images within the range between

rst and last images.

Press the <M> button.

Rate the image.

zTurn the <6> dial to select a rating

mark, then select [OK].

gAll the images in the specied range will

be rated (same rating) at once.

342

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Ratings

Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card

You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once.

Under [3: Rating], when you select [All

images in folder] or [All images on card],

all the images in the folder or on the card

will be rated.

Turn the <6> dial to select a rating, then

select [OK].

When you are not rating images or

cancelling the rating, select [OFF].

If the search conditions are set with [3: Set image search conditions]

(=345), the display will change to [All found images].

If you select [All found images], all the

images ltered by the search conditions will

be rated as specied.

oValues next to ratings are displayed as [###] if more than 1,000 images have

that rating.

oWith [3: Set image search conditions] and [3: Image jump w/6], you

can display only the images given a specic rating.

343

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Slide Show (Auto Playback)

You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.

Specify the images to be played

back.

zTo play back all the images on the card,

go to step 2.

zIf you want to specify the images to be

played back in the slide show, lter the

images with [3: Set image search

conditions] (=345).

Select [3: Slide show].

Set the playback as desired.

zSelect [Set up].

zSet the [Display time], [Repeat]

(repeated playback), and [Transition

e󰀨ect] (e󰀨ect when changing images)

for the still photos.

zTo play background music, use

[Background music] to select the

music (=336).

zAfter completing the settings, press the

<M> button.

344

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Slide Show (Auto Playback)

Display time Repeat

Transition e󰀨ect Background music

Start the slide show.

zSelect [Start].

gAfter [Loading image...] is displayed,

the slide show will start.

Exit the slide show.

zTo exit the slide show and return to

the setting screen, press the <M>

button.

oTo pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be displayed on

the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume the slide show.

oDuring the automatic playback of still photos, you can press the

button to switch the display format (=296).

oVolume during movie playback can be adjusted by pressing the <W> <X>

keys.

oDuring auto playback or pause, you can press the <Y> <Z> keys to view

another image.

oDuring auto playback, auto power o󰀨 will not take e󰀨ect.

oThe display time may di󰀨er depending on the image.

345

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Filtering Images for Playback

You can lter image display according to your search conditions. After

setting the image search conditions, you can play back and display only the

found images.

You can also protect, rate, erase, play a slide show, and apply other

operations to ltered images.

Select [3: Set image search

conditions].

(1)

Set the search conditions.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select an

item.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to set the

setting.

gA checkmark [X] (1) is appended to the

left of the item. (Specied as the search

condition.)

zIf you select the item and press the

button, the checkmark [X] will

be removed. (The search condition is

canceled.)

Item Description

9Rating Displays images with the selected (rating) condition.

dDate Displays images taken on the selected shooting date.

nFolder Displays images in the selected folder.

JProtect Displays images with the selected (protect) condition.

fType of le Displays images in the selected le type.

346

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Filtering Images for Playback

Apply the search conditions.

zPress <0> and read the message

displayed.

zSelect [OK].

gThe search condition is specied.

(2)

Display the found images.

zPress the <3> button.

gOnly the images that match the set

conditions (ltered) will be played back.

gWhen the images are ltered for display,

the screen will have an outer yellow

frame (2).

Clearing the Search Conditions

Access the screen in step 2, then press the <L> button to remove all the

checkmarks [X]. Press <0> to clear the search conditions.

oIf no images match the search conditions, [OK] is not available on the screen

in step 2.

oSearch conditions may be cleared if you perform power, card, or image editing

operations.

oAuto power o󰀨 time may be extended while the [3: Set image search

conditions] screen is displayed.

347

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Jump Display (Jumping Through Images)

In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through the

images forward or backward according to the jump method set.

Select [x: Image jump w/6].

Select the jump method.

oWith [Jump images by the specied number], you can turn the <6> dial

to select the number of images to jump by.

oWhen you select [Display by image rating], turn the <6> dial to specify the

rating (=340). If you browse images with 9 selected, all the rated images

will be displayed.

348

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Jump Display (Jumping Through Images)

(1) (2)

Browse by jumping.

zPress the <x> button.

zIn the single-image display, turn the

<6> dial.

gYou can browse by the set method.

(1) Jump method

(2) Playback position

oTo search images by shooting date, select [g: Date].

oTo search images by folder, select [h: Folder].

oIf the card contains both movies and still photos, select [i: Movies] or [j:

Stills] to display one or the other.

349

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Customizing Playback Information Display

You can specify screens and accompanying information displayed during

image playback.

Select [3: Playback information

display].

Add a checkmark [X] next to the

number of screens to display.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select a

number.

zPress <0> to add a checkmark [X].

zRepeat these steps to add a checkmark

[X] to the number of each screen to

display, then select [OK].

gYour selected information can be

accessed by pressing the

button during playback, or by pressing

the <W> <X> keys when shooting

information is displayed.

Histogram

The brightness histogram shows the

exposure level distribution and overall

brightness. The RGB histogram is for

checking the color saturation and gradation.

You can switch the histogram displayed by

pressing the button when <z>

is displayed in the lower left of the [x:

Playback information display] screen.

350

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Customizing Playback Information Display

z[Brightness] display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution

of the image’s brightness level. The horizontal

axis indicates the brightness level (darker on the

left and brighter on the right) while the vertical

axis indicates how many pixels exist for each

brightness level. The more pixels there are

toward the left, the darker the image. The more

pixels there are toward the right, the brighter the

image. If there are too many pixels on the left, the

shadow detail will be lost. If there are too many

pixels on the right, the highlight detail will be lost.

The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By

checking the image and its brightness histogram,

you can see the exposure level inclination and

the overall gradation.

Dark image

Normal brightness

Bright image

Sample Histograms

z[RGB] display

This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary

color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The

horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on the left

and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many

pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels there are

toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. The more pixels

there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there

are too many pixels on the left, the respective color information will be

lacking. If there are too many pixels on the right, the color will be too

saturated with no gradation. By checking the image’s RGB histogram,

you can see the color’s saturation and gradation condition, as well as

white balance inclination.

351

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Displaying the Highlight Alert

You can specify blinking display of overexposed highlights on the playback

screen. To obtain more detailed gradation in the blinking areas where

you want the gradation to be faithfully reproduced, set the exposure

compensation to a negative amount and shoot again for a better result.

Select [3: Highlight alert].

Select [Enable].

352

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Displaying AF Points

You can display the AF points that were used to focus, which will be outlined

in red on the playback screen. If automatic AF point selection is set, multiple

AF points may be displayed.

Select [3: AF point disp.].

Select [Enable].

353

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Displaying a Grid

You can display a grid over still photos shown in single-image display on

the playback screen. This function is convenient for checking the image’s

vertical or horizontal tilt as well as composition.

Select [3: Playback grid].

Select an item.

354

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Specifying Initial Image Display When

Playback Begins

You can specify which image is displayed rst when you start image

playback.

Select [3: View from last seen].

Select an item.

z[Enable]: Playback resumes from the

last image displayed (except when you

have just nished shooting).

z[Disable]: Playback resumes from your

most recent shot whenever the camera

is restarted.

355

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio and

Position

You can set the initial magnication ratio and position for the magnied view.

Select [3: Magnicatn (apx)].

Select an item.

z1x (no magnication)

The image is not magnied. The magnied view will start with the single-

image display.

z2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center)

The magnied view starts at the image center at the selected

magnication.

zActual size (from selected point)

The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The

magnied view starts at the AF point that achieved focus. If the photo is

taken with manual focus, the magnied view starts at the image center.

zSame as last magnication (from center)

The magnication will be the same as the last time you exited the

magnied view with the button. The magnied view starts at the

image center.

oThe magnied view may extend from the center of images even if [Actual size

(from selected pt)] is set.

356

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

357

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

357

Set-up

This chapter describes menu settings on the set-up ([5]) tab.

zA M icon to the right of a page title indicates that the function

is available only in <t>, <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F>

mode.

358

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Set-up

zSet-up 1

=361

=363

=366

=367

=369

=370

zSet-up 2

=371

=372

=373

=374

=377

zSet-up 3

=378

=379

=380

=381

=382

=386

=387

359

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Set-up

zSet-up 4

=388

=393

=394

=395

=397

zSet-up 5

=398

=402

zSet-up 6

=407

=408

=410

=411

=413

360

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Set-up

When you are recording movies, the following screen is

displayed for [54] and [56].

zSet-up 4

=388

=393

=394

=395

=397

zSet-up 6

=407

=410

=411

=413

In Basic Zone and [HDR Movie] modes, the following screen is

displayed for [56].

=407

=413

361

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Creating and Selecting a Folder

You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are

to be saved.

Creating a Folder

Select [5: Select folder].

Select [Create folder].

Select [OK].

362

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Creating and Selecting a Folder

Selecting a Folder

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

zSelect a folder on the folder selection

screen.

zCaptured images are stored in your

selected folder.

(1) Number of images in folder

(2) Lowest le number

(3) Folder name

(4) Highest le number

Folders

oA folder can contain up to 9999 images (le number 0001–9999). When a

folder becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one

is created automatically. Also, if manual reset (=365) is executed, a new

folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be

created.

Creating Folders with a Computer

oWith the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open

the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and

organize your images. The folder name must follow the format “100ABC_D”.

The rst three digits are always the folder number from 100 to 999. The last

ve characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case letters from

A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be used. Also

note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit folder number (for

example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”) even if the remaining ve characters

in each name are di󰀨erent.

363

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

File Numbering Methods

The captured images saved in a folder are

assigned a le number from 0001 to 9999.

You can change how the image les are

numbered.

Select [5: File numbering].

Set the item.

zSelect [Numbering].

zSelect [Continuous] or [Auto reset].

zIf you want to reset the le numbering,

select [Manual reset] (=365).

zSelect [OK] to create a new folder, and

the le number will start with 0001.

oIf the le number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible

even if the card still has storage capacity. The screen will display a message

telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.

(Example) IMG_0001.JPG

File number

364

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

File Numbering Methods

Continuous

When you wish to continue the le numbering sequence even after the

card is replaced or a new folder is created.

Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the le numbering

continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you want to save

images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in

multiple folders into one folder on a computer.

If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded

previously, the le numbering of the new images may continue from the le

numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want

to use continuous le numbering, it is recommended that you use a newly-

formatted card each time.

0051 0052

(1)

File numbering after replacing the card

100

0051

101

0052

File numbering after creating a folder

Card 2Card 1 Card 1

(1) Next sequential le number

365

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

File Numbering Methods

Auto Reset

When you wish to restart the le numbering from 0001 each time the

card is replaced or a new folder is created.

When you replace the card or create a folder, the le numbering restarts

from 0001 for the new images saved. This is useful if you want to organize

images by cards or folders.

If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded

previously, the le numbering of the new images may continue from the le

numbering of the existing images on the card or in the folder. If you want

to save images with the le numbering starting from 0001, use a newly

formatted card each time.

0051 0001

(1)

File numbering after replacing the card

100

0051

101

0001

File numbering after creating a folder

Card 2Card 1 Card 1

(1) File numbering is reset

Manual Reset

When you wish to reset the le numbering to 0001 or to start from le

number 0001 in a new folder.

When you reset the le numbering manually, a new folder is created

automatically and the le numbering of images saved to that folder starts

from 0001.

This is useful, for example, if you want to use di󰀨erent folders for the images

taken yesterday and the ones taken today.

366

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images

You can change the auto rotation setting that

straightens images shot in vertical orientation when

they are displayed.

Select [5: Auto rotate].

Select an item.

zOnzD

Automatically rotates images for display on both the camera and

computers.

zOnD

Automatically rotates images only for display on computers.

zO󰀨

oImages captured with auto rotation set to [O󰀨] will not rotate during playback

even if you later set auto rotation to [On].

oIf a picture is taken while the camera is pointing up or down, automatic rotation

to the proper orientation for viewing may not be performed correctly.

oIf images are not rotated automatically on a computer, try using EOS software.

367

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Formatting Memory Cards

If the card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another camera

or computer, format the card with this camera.

oWhen the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be

erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is

nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to a

computer, etc. before formatting the card.

Select [5: Format card].

Format the card.

zSelect [OK].

zFor low-level formatting, press the <L>

button to add a checkmark <X> to [Low

level format], then select [OK].

oThe card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller than

the capacity indicated on the card.

oThis device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

368

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Formatting Memory Cards

Format the Card in the Following Cases:

zThe card is new.

zThe card was formatted by a di󰀨erent camera or a computer.

zThe card is full of images or data.

zA card-related error is displayed (=581).

Low-Level Formatting

zPerform low-level formatting if the card’s writing or reading speed seems

slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card.

zSince low-level formatting will format all recordable sectors on the card,

the formatting will take longer than normal formatting.

zDuring low-level formatting, you can cancel formatting by selecting

[Cancel]. Even in this case, normal formatting will already be complete

and you can use the card as usual.

Card’s File Formats

zSD/SDHC cards will be formatted in FAT32. SDXC cards will be

formatted in exFAT.

zWhen recording a movie with a card formatted in exFAT, the movie will be

recorded in a single le (instead of being split into multiple les) even if it

exceeds 4 GB. (The movie le will exceed 4 GB.)

oIt may not be possible to use SDXC cards formatted with this camera in other

cameras. Also note that exFAT-formatted cards may not be recognized by

some computer operating systems or card readers.

oFormatting or erasing data on a card does not completely erase the data. Be

aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When disposing of cards,

take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically

destroying cards.

369

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Displaying the Shooting Mode Guide

A brief description of the shooting mode can be displayed when you switch

shooting modes.

Select [5: Mode guide].

Select [Enable].

Turn the Mode dial.

gA brief description of the selected

shooting mode is displayed.

zTo display more details, press the <X>

key.

zTo clear the mode guide, press <0>.

In <8> or <k> mode, the shooting

mode selection screen is displayed.

370

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Displaying the Feature Guide

A brief description of functions and items can be displayed when you use

Quick Control setting.

Select [5: Feature guide].

Select [Enable].

oTo clear a description, either tap it or continue performing operations.

371

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Eco Mode

Enables you to conserve battery power in shooting mode. When the camera

is not in use, the screen darkens to reduce battery consumption.

Select [5: Eco mode].

Select [On].

zThe screen darkens when the camera

is not used for approx. two seconds.

Approx. ten seconds after darkening, the

screen turns o󰀨.

zTo activate the screen and prepare for

shooting when the screen is o󰀨, press

the shutter button halfway.

372

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Power-Saving Features

You can adjust the timing of when the screen, camera, and viewnder turn

o󰀨 automatically (Display o󰀨, Auto power o󰀨, and Viewnder o󰀨).

Select [5: Power saving].

Select an item.

zEven when [Auto power o󰀨] is set to

[Disable], the screen will turn o󰀨 after

the time set in [Display o󰀨].

o[Display o󰀨] and [Auto power o󰀨] settings do not apply when Eco mode is

set to [On].

373

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Adjusting the Screen Brightness

Screen and viewnder brightness can be adjusted separately.

Select [5: Disp. brightness].

Make the adjustment.

zReferring to the gray chart, use the <Y>

<Z> keys to adjust the brightness, then

press <0>.

zWhen adjusting viewnder brightness,

look through the viewnder as you set it.

oTo check the image’s exposure, referring to the histogram (=349) is

recommended.

374

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone

When you turn on the power for the rst time or if the date/time/zone have

been reset, follow the steps below to set the time zone rst.

By setting the time zone rst, you can simply adjust this setting as needed

in the future and the date/time will be updated to match it.

Since the captured images will be appended with the shooting date

and time information, be sure to set your date/time.

Select [5: Date/Time/Zone].

Set the time zone.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select [Time

zone].

zPress <0>.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select the

time zone, then press <0>.

zIf your time zone is not listed, press the

<M> button, then set the di󰀨erence

from UTC in [Time di󰀨erence].

375

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select

a [Time di󰀨erence] item (+/–/hour/

minute), then press <0>.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to set it, then

press <0>.

zAfter entering the time zone or time

di󰀨erence, use the <Y> <Z> keys to

select [OK], then press <0>.

Set the date and time.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select an

item, then press <0>.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to set it, then

press <0>.

Set the daylight saving time.

zSet it as necessary.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select [Y],

then press <0>.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select [Z],

then press <0>.

zWhen the daylight saving time is set to

[Z], the time set in step 3 will advance

by 1 hour. If [Y] is set, the daylight

saving time will be canceled and the

time will go back by 1 hour.

Exit the setting.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select [OK].

376

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Date, Time, and Time Zone

oThe date, time, and time zone settings may be reset when the camera is

stored without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when

it is exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this

happens, set them once again.

oAfter changing [Zone/Time di󰀨erence], check that the correct date/time are

set.

oAuto power o󰀨 time may be extended while the [5: Date/Time/Zone] screen

is displayed.

377

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Interface Language

Select [5: LanguageK].

Set the desired language.

378

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Video System

Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting

determines the frame rates available when you record movies.

Select [5: Video system].

Select an item.

zNTSC

For areas where the TV system is NTSC

(North America, Japan, South Korea,

Mexico, etc.).

zPAL

For areas where the TV system is PAL

(Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.).

379

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Touch Control Response

Select [5: Touch control].

Select an item.

z[Standard] is the normal setting.

z[Sensitive] provides a more reactive

touch-screen panel response than

[Standard].

zTo disable touch operations, select

[Disable].

Cautions for Touch Control Operations

oDo not use sharp objects such as ngernails or ballpoint pens for touch

operations.

oDo not use wet ngers for touch operations. If the screen has any moisture or

if your ngers are wet, the touch-screen panel may not respond or malfunction

may occur. In this case, turn o󰀨 the power and wipe o󰀨 the moisture with a

cloth.

oAttaching any commercially available protective sheet or sticker on the screen

may degrade the touch operation response.

oIf you quickly perform touch operation when [Sensitive] is set, the touch

operation response may be poor.

380

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Disabling Beeps for Camera Operations

You can disable beeping when subjects are in focus or for other operations.

Select [5: Beep].

Select an item.

zTouch

The beeper will be silent only for touch

operations.

zDisable

Disables beeping when subjects are

in focus, when you shoot with the

self-timer, and when you use touch

operations.

381

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Checking the Battery Information

You can check the conditions of the battery you are using.

Select [5: Battery info.].

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(1) Battery position

(2) Model of battery or household power

outlet accessory used.

(3) Battery level (=47).

(4) Battery’s recharge performance level

is displayed.

(Green) : Battery’s recharge

performance is good.

(Green) : Battery’s recharge

performance is

slightly degraded.

(Red) : Purchasing a

new battery is

recommended.

oUsing a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E17 is recommended. If you use

batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full performance

may not be attained or malfunction may result.

oIf a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the instructions

in the message.

382

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sensor Cleaning

The camera’s sensor cleaning feature cleans the front of the image sensor.

Activating Immediate Cleaning

Select [5: Sensor cleaning].

Select [Clean nowf].

zSelect [OK] on the conrmation dialog.

383

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sensor Cleaning

Setting Auto Cleaning

Select [Auto cleaningf].

Select an item.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select an

item, then press <0>.

oFor best results, clean with the camera in a stable position on a desk or other

at surface.

oEven if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much. Note

that [Clean nowf] may not be available immediately after cleaning.

oDots of light may appear in captured images or on the shooting screen if

the sensor is a󰀨ected by cosmic rays or similar factors. By selecting [Clean

nowf], their appearance may be suppressed (=382).

384

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sensor Cleaning

Manual Sensor Cleaning

Dust that could not be removed by automatic cleaning can be removed

manually with a commercially available blower or similar tool.

The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to

be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is

recommended.

Setting the power switch to <2>.

Remove the lens and clean the

sensor.

End the cleaning.

zAttach the lens or body cap.

385

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sensor Cleaning

oDuring sensor cleaning, never set the power switch to <1>. This will

cause the shutter to move, which may damage the image sensor or

shutter curtains.

oThe surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor with

care.

oUse a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the

sensor.

oDo not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. This

may damage the shutter curtains.

oNever use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. Pressurized air may

damage the sensor, and sprayed gas may freeze on the sensor and scratch it.

oIf a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the sensor

cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

386

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the HDMI Output Resolution

Set the image output resolution used when the camera is connected to a

television or external recording device with an HDMI cable.

Select [5: HDMI resolution].

Select an item.

zAuto

The images will automatically be

displayed at the optimum resolution

matching the connected television.

z1080p

Output at 1080p resolution. Select if you

prefer to avoid display or delay issues

when the camera switches resolution.

387

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

RAW Playback on an HDR TV

You can view RAW images in HDR by connecting the camera to an HDR

TV.

Select [5: HDMI HDR output].

Select [On].

oImage operations such as RAW processing are not available during HDR

display.

oJPEG images are used for HDR display in the case of L (ISO 50-equivalent)

images or multiple-exposure RAW images.

oMake sure the HDR TV is set up for HDR input. For details on how to switch

inputs on the TV, refer to the TV manual.

oDepending on the TV used, images may not look as expected.

oSome image e󰀨ects and information may not be displayed on an HDR TV.

388

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Customizing Information Displayed When

Shooting

You can customize the details and screens of information shown on the

camera or in the viewnder when you shoot.

Select [5: Shooting info. disp.].

Customizing Information on the Screen

Select [Screen info. settings].

Select screens.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select

screens of information to show on the

camera.

zFor information you prefer not to display,

press <0> to clear the checkmark

[X].

zTo edit the screen, press the

button.

Edit the screen.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select items

to show on the screen.

zFor items you prefer not to display, press

<0> to clear the checkmark [X].

zSelect [OK] to register the setting.

389

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting

Customizing Information in the Viewnder

Select [VF info/toggle settings].

Select screens.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select

screens of information to show in the

viewnder.

zFor information you prefer not to display,

press <0> to clear the checkmark

[X].

zTo edit the screen, press the

button.

Edit the screen.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select items

to show in the viewnder.

zFor items you prefer not to display, press

<0> to clear the checkmark [X].

zSelect [OK] to register the setting.

390

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting

Vertical Viewnder Display

You can select how viewnder information is displayed when you are

shooting still photos vertically.

Select [VF vertical display].

Select an item.

zOn

Information is automatically rotated,

making it easier to read.

zO󰀨

Information is not automatically rotated.

Grid Display

A grid can be displayed on the screen and viewnder.

Select [Grid display].

Select an item.

391

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting

Setting the Histogram

You can select the content and display size of the histogram.

Select [Histogram disp].

Select an item.

zSelect the content ([Brightness] or

[RGB]) and display size ([Large] or

[Small]).

zPress <M> button to conrm the

setting.

Setting Focus Distance Display

You can display focus distance when using RF lenses. In focus distance

display, you can select the timing and unit of measurement.

Select [Focus distance disp].

Select the timing of display.

Select the unit of measurement.

zPress <M> button to conrm the

setting.

392

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Customizing Information Displayed When Shooting

Clearing Settings

You can restore [Shooting info. disp.] to the default settings.

Select [Reset].

Select [OK].

393

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting a Priority for Shooting Display

Performance

You can select the performance option to prioritize in viewnder display for

still photos.

Select [5: Viewnder performance].

Select an item.

Setting the Viewfinder Display Format

You can select the viewnder display format.

Select [5: VF display format].

Select an item.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select an

item.

zPress <0> to set it.

394

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Display Mode

You can select the display mode for shooting screens.

Select [5: Display settings].

Select an item.

zAuto

Normally use the screen for display, but

switch to the viewnder when you look

through it.

zManual

You can restrict display to the screen or

viewnder.

Select screen or viewnder display.

zPress <0> to set it.

395

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Customizing Shutter Button Functionality

for Movie Recording

You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway

or completely during movie recording.

Select [5: Shutter btn function for

movies].

Select an item.

zHalf-press

Specify the function performed by

pressing the shutter button halfway.

zFully-press (shown in <k> mode)

Specify the function performed by

pressing the shutter button completely.

With [Fully-press] set to [Start/stop mov rec], you can start/stop movie

recording not only by pressing the movie shooting button but also by

pressing the shutter button completely or by using Remote Switch RS-60E3

(sold separately, =219).

o[Half-press] switches from [Meter.+One-Shot AF] to [Meter.+k Servo AF]

when [Movie rec. size] is set to [H].

oEven if you set [Fully-press] to [No function], the camera will start or stop

recording time-lapse movies if the shutter button is pressed completely when

the camera is set up for time-lapse movies.

396

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Help

When [zHelp] is displayed below a menu, you can display a description

about the feature by pressing the button. Press it again to exit Help

display. To scroll the screen when a scrollbar (1) appears on the right, press

the <W> <X> keys or turn the <5> dial.

zExample: [z: High ISO speed NR]

(1)

zExample: [5: Multi function lock]

397

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Help

Help Display Text Size

You can change the text size for the Help display.

Select [5: Help text size].

Select an item.

398

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Wireless Features

You can connect the camera to a smartphone or computer wirelessly and

send your shots or control the camera remotely.

Select [5: Wireless communication

settings].

Set the item.

zFor details, see “Wi-Fi (Wireless

Communication) Functions”.

399

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Wireless Features

Shooting with a Remote Control

You can shoot remotely by pairing the camera via Bluetooth with Wireless

Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately), which supports Bluetooth low

energy technology.

Pairing

To use BR-E1, you must rst pair (connect and register) the camera and

remote control.

Select [5: Wireless communication

settings].

Select [Bluetooth function].

Select [Remote].

zIf the message “Register a nickname to

identify the camera.” appears, register a

nickname as described on =422.

400

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Wireless Features

Select [Pairing].

zSelect [Pairing].

zPress and hold the <W> button and <T>

button on the BR-E1 simultaneously for

3 sec. or more.

gPairing now begins. When pairing is

complete, BR-E1 is registered on the

camera.

When shooting still

photos

Set up the camera for remote

shooting.

zSelect [Q] or [k] as the drive mode

(=209).

When recording movies

zIn [z: Remote control], select

[Enable].

zFor instructions after the pairing

is complete, refer to the BR-E1’s

Instruction Manual.

oBluetooth connections consume battery power even after the camera’s auto

power o󰀨 is activated.

oWhen you do not use the Bluetooth function, setting it to [Disable] in step 4 is

recommended. To use the remote control again, select [Remote] again.

oAuto power o󰀨 time may be extended when the camera is set for remote

shooting.

401

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Wireless Features

Canceling the Pairing

Before pairing with a di󰀨erent BR-E1, clear the information about the

connected remote control.

Select [5: Wireless communication

settings].

Select [Bluetooth function].

Select [Check/clear connection

info].

Press the button.

Clear the connection information.

zSelect [OK].

402

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Geotagging Images

You can geotag images with GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) or a

Bluetooth enabled smartphone.

Using GP-E2

Attach GP-E2 to the camera.

zAttach GP-E2 to the camera’s hot shoe

and turn it on. For details, refer to the

GP-E2 Instruction Manual.

Select [5: GPS device settings].

Select [GPS receiver].

Take the picture.

zFor details on [Set up], refer to the GP-

E2 Instruction Manual.

Precautions When Using GP-E2

oBe sure to check the countries and regions where its use is allowed, and use

the function in accordance with the laws and regulations of the country or

region.

oMake sure the GP-E2 rmware is updated to Ver. 2.0.0 or later. Firmware

updating requires an interface cable. For updating instructions, visit the Canon

website.

oThe cable cannot be used to connect the camera to the GP-E2.

oThe digital compass cannot be used with the camera, and the shooting

direction is not recorded.

403

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Geotagging Images

Using a Smartphone

The dedicated app Camera Connect (free of charge) must be installed on

the smartphone. For details on installing Camera Connect, see =420.

Specifying the smartphone as the GPS device

On the smartphone, activate

location services.

Establish a Bluetooth connection.

zConnect the camera to a smartphone

via Bluetooth. For details, see =421.

Select [5: GPS device settings].

404

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Geotagging Images

Select [Smartphone].

zSelect [Smartphone] in [Select GPS

device].

gLocation information can now be

acquired from the smartphone.

zTo check acquired geotag information

(latitude, longitude, elevation, and

Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)),

select [GPS information display] on

the [GPS device settings] screen.

Take the picture.

zImages are geotagged with the

information from the smartphone.

405

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Geotagging Images

GPS connection display

You can check the status of smartphone location information acquisition in

the GPS connection icon on the screens for still photo or movie shooting

(=592 and =593, respectively).

Gray: Location services are o󰀨

Blinking: Location information cannot be acquired

On: Location information acquired

For details on how GPS connection status is indicated when the GP-E2 is

used, refer to the GP-E2 Instruction Manual.

Geotagging images as you shoot

Images you shoot while the GPS icon is on are geotagged.

Geotagging information

You can check the location information added to your shots on the shooting

information screen (=296, =349).

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1) Latitude

(2) Longitude

(3) Elevation

(4) UTC (Coordinated Universal

Time)

406

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Geotagging Images

oThe smartphone can acquire location information only while it is paired with

the camera via Bluetooth.

oDirection information is not acquired.

oAcquired location information may not be accurate, depending on traveling

conditions or smartphone status.

oIt may take some time to acquire location information from the smartphone

after you turn the camera on.

oLocation information is no longer acquired after any of the following

operations.

• Setting [Bluetooth function] to an option other than [Smartphone]

• Turning the camera o󰀨

• Quitting Camera Connect

• Deactivating location services on the smartphone

oLocation information is no longer acquired in any of the following situations.

• The camera power turns o󰀨

• The Bluetooth connection is ended

• The smartphone’s remaining battery level is low

oCoordinated Universal Time, abbreviated as UTC, is essentially the same as

Greenwich Mean Time.

oFor movies, the GPS information initially acquired is added.

407

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the Multi-Function Lock

Specify camera controls to lock when the Multi-function lock is enabled. This

can help prevent accidentally changing settings.

Select [5: Multi function lock].

Select camera controls to lock.

zPress <0> to add a checkmark [X].

zSelect [OK].

gSetting the <R> switch to <R>

locks the selected [X] camera controls.

oIn Basic Zone modes, only [Touch control] can be set.

oIf it is changed from the default setting, an asterisk “*” will be displayed on the

right edge of [5: Multi function lock].

408

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Registering Custom Shooting Modes

You can register current camera settings, such as shooting, menu, and

Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting modes assigned to <w> to

<y> modes.

Select [5: Custom shooting mode

(C1-C3)].

Select [Register settings].

zSelect the Custom shooting mode

to register, then select [OK] on the

registration screen.

gThe current camera settings are

registered to Custom shooting mode C*.

Automatic Update of Registered Settings

If you change a setting while shooting in Custom shooting mode, the mode

can be automatically updated with the new setting (Auto update). To enable

this automatic update, set [Auto update set.] to [Enable] in step 2.

Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes

If you select [Clear settings] in step 2, the settings of respective modes

can be reverted to the default settings with no Custom shooting modes

registered.

409

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Registering Custom Shooting Modes

oYou can also change shooting and menu settings in Custom shooting modes.

410

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Reverting the Camera to the Default

Settings

The camera’s settings for shooting functions and menu functions can be

reverted to their defaults.

Select [5: Clear all camera

settings].

Select [OK].

oFor details on clearing all Custom Function and customized control settings,

see =546.

411

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Copyright Information

When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as

Exif information.

Select [5: Copyright information].

Select an item.

Enter text.

zUse the <V> cross keys or <5> dial

to select a character, then press <0>

to enter it.

zBy selecting [], you can change the

input mode.

zTo delete single characters, select [ ]

or press the <L> button.

Exit the setting.

zPress the <M> button, then press

[OK].

412

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Copyright Information

Checking the Copyright Information

When you select [Display copyright info.]

in step 2, you can check the [Author] and

[Copyright] information that you entered.

Deleting the Copyright Information

When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can delete

the [Author] and [Copyright] information.

oIf the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed entirely

when you select [Display copyright info.].

oYou can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS

software).

413

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Checking Other Information

zDownloading instruction manuals

To download instruction manuals, select [5: Manual/software URL] and

scan the displayed QR code with a smartphone. Note that scanning QR

codes requires an app.

zDisplaying certication logosM

Select [5: Certication Logo Display] to display some of the logos of

the camera’s certications. Other certication logos can be found in this

Instruction Manual, on the camera body, and on the camera’s package.

zFirmware versionM

Select [5: Firmware] to update the rmware of the camera or current

lens.

414

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

415

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

415

Wi-Fi (Wireless

Communication) Functions

This chapter describes how to send images via Wi-Fi® from the

camera to a variety of compatible devices, and how to use Web

services.

416

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless

Communication) Functions

(CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY)

(4) Send images to

a Web service

(3) Print images using a

Wi-Fi printer

(1) Communicate

with a smartphone

(2) Use with EOS software

or other dedicated software

Important

Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or damage from

erroneous wireless communication settings when using the camera. In

addition, Canon cannot be held liable for any other loss or damage caused

by use of the camera.

When using wireless communication functions, establish appropriate

security at your own risk and discretion. Canon cannot be held liable for any

loss or damage caused by unauthorized access or other security breaches.

417

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions

(1) q Communicate with a smartphone (=419)

Control the camera remotely and browse images on the camera over

a Wi-Fi connection by using the dedicated Camera Connect app on

smartphones or tablets (collectively referred to as “smartphones” in

this manual).

(2) D Use with EOS software or other dedicated software

(=453)

Connect the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi and operate the camera

remotely using EOS Utility (EOS software). With the dedicated

application Image Transfer Utility 2, images on the camera can also

be sent to a computer automatically.

(3) l Print images using a Wi-Fi printer (=461)

Connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge (Wireless LAN)

via Wi-Fi to print images.

(4) R Send images to a Web service (=473)

Share images with friends or family on social media or the CANON

iMAGE GATEWAY online photo service for Canon customers after

you complete member registration (free of charge).

418

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

What You Can Do via Wi-Fi (Wireless Communication) Functions

Bluetooth® Features

By pairing the camera with a smartphone compatible with Bluetooth low

energy technology (hereafter, “Bluetooth”), you can:

zControl the camera remotely from a smartphone (=437)

zEstablish a Wi-Fi connection from either the smartphone or the camera,

by itself (=428, =441)

zEstablish a Wi-Fi connection with the camera even when it is o󰀨 (=430)

zGeotag images with GPS information acquired by the smartphone

(=403)

This camera can also be connected to Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold

separately) via Bluetooth for remote control shooting (=399).

Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points

To establish a Wi-Fi connection with smartphones or computers already on

a Wi-Fi network, see “Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points” (=488).

Interface Cable Connection Cautions

oOther devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by

connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected to

devices via Wi-Fi. Terminate the connection before connecting the interface

cable.

oWhen the camera is connected to a computer or another device with an

interface cable, you cannot select [5: Wireless communication settings].

Disconnect the interface cable before changing any settings.

Cards

oThe camera cannot be connected via Wi-Fi if there is no card in the camera

(except for [D]). Also, for [l] and Web services, the camera cannot be

connected via Wi-Fi if there are no images saved on the card.

Using the Camera with a Wi-Fi Connection Established

oWhen the Wi-Fi connection is most important, do not operate the power

switch, card slot/battery compartment cover, or other parts. Otherwise, the Wi-

Fi connection will be terminated.

419

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

This section describes how to directly connect the camera to a smartphone

via Wi-Fi.

Connecting to a smartphone via Wi-Fi enables you to perform the following:

zView images stored in the camera on a smartphone or save viewed

images to a smartphone.

zOperate the camera to take a picture or change camera settings using a

smartphone.

zSend images to a smartphone from the camera.

To establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi-Fi Connection

via Access Points” (=488).

Selecting the Wi-Fi Connection Method

Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi

(=421)

By connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone via Bluetooth in

advance, you can connect via Wi-Fi simply by performing an operation on

the camera or smartphone.

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi from the [Wi-Fi

function] Menu (=433)

You can use Wi-Fi to connect to a smartphone that is not compatible with

Bluetooth or a smartphone that cannot use its Bluetooth function.

Turning on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi on a Smartphone

Turn on Bluetooth and Wi-Fi from the smartphone settings screen. Note that

pairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone’s Bluetooth

settings screen.

420

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Installing Camera Connect on a Smartphone

To connect the camera to a smartphone, a smartphone on which Android

or iOS is installed is necessary. In addition, the dedicated app Camera

Connect (free of charge) must be installed on the smartphone.

zUse the latest version of the smartphone OS.

zCamera Connect can be installed from Google Play or App Store. Google

Play or App Store can also be accessed using the QR codes that appear

when the camera is paired or connected via Wi-Fi to a smartphone.

Android iOS

oFor the operating system versions supported by Camera Connect, refer to the

download site of Camera Connect.

oInterface or functions of the camera and Camera Connect are subject to

change for rmware update of the camera or application update of Camera

Connect, Android, iOS, etc. In this case, features of the camera or Camera

Connect may di󰀨er from sample screens or operation instructions in this

manual.

oAn application is required to read the QR codes.

421

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Connecting to a Bluetooth-compatible Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Make sure Camera Connect is installed on the smartphone, and that

Bluetooth and Wi-Fi are on.

Steps on the Camera (1)

Select [5: Wireless communication

settings].

Select [Bluetooth function].

Select [Smartphone].

422

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

zWhen using the displayed nickname,

press the <M> button.

zYou can change the nickname (=497).

Select [OK].

Select [Pairing].

423

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Select an item.

zIf Camera Connect is already installed,

select [Do not display].

zIf Camera Connect is not installed,

select [Android] or [iOS], scan the

displayed QR code with the smartphone

to access Google Play or App Store and

install Camera Connect.

gPairing now begins.

424

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Steps on the Smartphone (1)

Start Camera Connect.

Select the camera to pair with.

gIf you are using an Android smartphone,

go to step 12.

Tap on [Pair] (iOS only).

425

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Steps on the Camera (2)

Select [OK].

Press <0>.

zPairing is now complete, and the camera

is connected to the smartphone via

Bluetooth.

gA Bluetooth icon appears on the main

Camera Connect screen.

oPairing or Bluetooth connection is not possible if the camera is connected to a

computer or another device with an interface cable.

oThe camera cannot be connected to two or more devices at the same time via

Bluetooth.

oBluetooth connection consumes battery power even after the camera’s auto

power o󰀨 is activated. Therefore, the battery level may be low when you use

the camera.

Troubleshooting Pairing

oKeeping pairing records for previously paired cameras on your smartphone

will prevent it from pairing with this camera. Before you try pairing again,

remove pairing records for previously paired cameras from your smartphone’s

Bluetooth settings screen (=432).

oWith a Bluetooth connection established, you can operate the camera to send

images to the smartphone. For details, see =441.

426

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Steps on the Smartphone (2)

Select a Camera Connect function.

zIn iOS, select [Join] when a message is

displayed to conrm camera connection.

zFor the Camera Connect functions, see

=437.

gWhen a Wi-Fi connection is established,

the screen for the selected function will

appear.

gThe Bluetooth and Wi-Fi icons are lit on

the main Camera Connect screen.

The Wi-Fi connection to a Bluetooth-compatible smartphone is now

complete.

427

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

zFor how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating the Wi-Fi

Connection” (=449).

zTerminating the Wi-Fi connection will switch the camera to the Bluetooth

connection.

[qWi-Fi on] Screen

Disconnect,exit

zTerminates the Wi-Fi connection.

Conrm set.

zYou can check the settings.

Error details

zWhen a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of the

error.

428

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Connecting to a Bluetooth-connected Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Start Camera Connect.

Select a Camera Connect function.

zSelect the Camera Connect function you

want to use.

zIn iOS, select [Join] when a message is

displayed to conrm camera connection.

When a Wi-Fi connection is established,

the screen for the selected function will

appear.

zFor the Camera Connect functions, see

=437.

429

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

[Bluetooth function] Screen

On the [Bluetooth function] screen, you can change or check the

Bluetooth function settings.

Bluetooth function

zSelect the device to pair with the

camera.

zIf you will not use the Bluetooth function,

select [Disable].

Pairing

zPair the camera with the device selected

in [Bluetooth function].

Check/clear connection info

zYou can check the name and

communication status of the paired

device.

zTo remove registration of the paired

device, press the button.

For details, see “Removing a Paired

Device’s Registration” (=432).

Bluetooth address

zYou can check the camera’s Bluetooth

address.

430

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Stay conn. if o󰀨

zSelecting [Enable] lets you view images

on the camera and control it in other

ways by connecting via Wi-Fi even if the

camera is o󰀨.

Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection When the Camera Is O󰀨

Once the devices are paired, you can use a smartphone to connect via Wi-

Fi and transfer images from the camera even when it is o󰀨.

Congure [Stay conn. if o󰀨].

Select [Bluetooth function].

zSelect [Bluetooth function] on the

[Wireless communication settings]

screen.

Set [Stay conn. if o󰀨] to [Enable].

zOn the [Bluetooth function] screen, set

[Stay conn. if o󰀨] to [Enable].

Even when the camera is o󰀨, it will

remain paired with the smartphone via

Bluetooth.

431

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection

Start Camera Connect.

zStart Camera Connect on a smartphone

paired with the camera via Bluetooth.

Select [Images on camera].

zIn the Camera Connect menu, tap on

[Images on camera].

zIn iOS, select [Join] when a message is

displayed to conrm camera connection.

Images on the camera are listed when

the Wi-Fi connection is established.

Using Camera Connect

zYou can use Camera Connect to transfer images to the smartphone, and

you can delete or rate images from the camera.

zTo terminate the Wi-Fi connection, tap on [] on the main Camera

Connect screen (=449).

oThis feature is not available unless the camera and smartphone are

paired via Bluetooth.

oThis function can no longer be used if the wireless settings are reset or the

smartphone connection information is erased.

432

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Removing a Paired Device’s Registration

To pair the camera with a di󰀨erent smartphone, clear the paired device’s

registration on the [Bluetooth function] screen (=429).

Steps on the Camera

Select [Check/clear connection

info].

Press the button.

Clear the connection information.

zSelect [OK].

Steps on the Smartphone

Remove the camera registration.

zIn the Bluetooth settings of the

smartphone, select the nickname of the

camera to remove registration for.

433

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi from the [Wi-Fi

function] Menu

Steps on the Camera (1)

Select [5: Wireless communication

settings].

Select [Wi-Fi function].

zIf the [Nickname] screen is displayed,

Select [q] (Connect to

smartphone).

zIf the history (=493) is displayed,

switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>

keys.

Select [Register a device for

connection].

434

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Select an item.

zIf Camera Connect is already installed,

select [Do not display].

zIf Camera Connect is not installed,

select [Android] or [iOS] on the screen

on the left, scan the displayed QR

code with the smartphone, then access

Google Play or App Store and install

Camera Connect.

(1)

(2)

Check the SSID (network name)

and password.

zCheck the SSID (1) and password (2)

displayed on the camera screen.

zIn [Wi-Fi settings], if you set

[Password] to [None], the password

will not be displayed or required. For

details, see =516.

oBy selecting [Switch network] in step 6, you can establish a Wi-Fi connection

via an access point (=488).

435

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Steps on the Smartphone

Smartphone’s screen

(sample) 7

Operate the smartphone to

establish a Wi-Fi connection.

zActivate the smartphone’s Wi-Fi

function, then select the SSID (network

name) checked in step 6.

zFor the password, enter the password

checked in step 6.

Start Camera Connect.

zWhen the [Waiting to connect] screen

is displayed on the camera, start

Camera Connect on the smartphone.

Select the camera to connect to via

Wi-Fi.

zSelect and tap on the camera to connect

to via Wi-Fi from [Cameras] on Camera

Connect.

Steps on the Camera (2)

Establish a Wi-Fi connection.

zSelect [OK].

zTo specify viewable images, press the

button. See step 5 on =451

to set them.

436

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

gThe main window of Camera Connect

will be displayed on the smartphone.

The Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone is

now complete.

zOperate the camera using Camera

Connect. See =437.

zFor how to terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see “Terminating the Wi-Fi

Connection” (=449).

zTo reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (=493).

[qWi-Fi on] Screen

Disconnect,exit

zTerminates the Wi-Fi connection.

Conrm set.

zYou can check the settings.

Error details

zWhen a Wi-Fi connection error occurs, you can check the details of the

error.

oWhen connected via Wi-Fi, you can send images to a smartphone from the

Quick Control screen during playback. For details, see =441.

437

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Operating the Camera Using a Smartphone

The main functions of Camera Connect are described below.

Images on camera

zImages stored in the camera can be

viewed.

zImages stored in the camera can be

saved on a smartphone.

zOperations such as deletion can be

performed on images stored in the

camera.

Remote live view shooting

zThe camera’s Live View image can be viewed on a smartphone.

zYou can shoot with remote operation.

Auto transfer

zEnables camera and app setting adjustment to send shots to a

smartphone automatically as they are captured (=439).

Bluetooth remote controller

zYou can control the camera by using a smartphone paired via Bluetooth

as a remote control. (Not available when connected via Wi-Fi.)

Location information

zNot supported on this camera.

Camera settings

zCamera settings can be changed.

438

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

oIf the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote

shooting, the following will occur.

• Any movie recording in progress in movie recording mode will continue.

• Any movie recording in progress in still photo shooting mode will end.

oYou cannot use the camera to shoot after using Camera Connect to switch

from still photo shooting mode to movie recording mode.

oWith a Wi-Fi connection to a smartphone established, certain functions are

unavailable.

oIn remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.

oDepending on the communication status, image display or shutter release

timing may be delayed.

oWhen saving images to a smartphone, you cannot take a picture even if you

press the camera’s shutter button. Also, the camera screen may turn o󰀨.

oThe Wi-Fi connection will be terminated if you set the camera’s power switch

to <2> or open the card slot/battery compartment cover.

oRAW images cannot be saved to a smartphone. When a RAW image is

selected, it will be saved as a JPEG image.

oWith a Wi-Fi connection established, the camera’s auto power o󰀨 does not

function.

oWith a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power saving

function is recommended.

439

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Sending Images to a Smartphone Automatically as You

Shoot

Your shots can be sent automatically. Before following these steps, make

sure the camera and smartphone are connected via Wi-Fi.

Select [5: Wireless communication

settings].

Select [Wi-Fi settings].

Select [Send to smartphone after

shot].

Set [Auto send] to [Enable].

440

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Set [Size to send].

zSelect the image size, then press

<0>.

Take the picture.

441

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Sending Images to a Smartphone from the Camera

You can use the camera to send images to a smartphone paired via

Bluetooth (Android devices only) or connected via Wi-Fi.

Play back the image.

Press the <Q> button.

Select [q].

gIf you perform this step while connected

via Bluetooth, a message is displayed,

and the connection switches to a Wi-Fi

connection.

Select sending options and send

the images.

442

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

(1) Sending Images Individually

Select an image to send.

zPress the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the

<5> dial to select an image to send,

then press <0>.

zYou can press the button and

turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to

select the image using the index display.

Select [Send img shown].

zIn [Size to send], you can select the

image sending size.

zWhen sending movies, you can select

the image quality of movies to send in

[Quality to send].

443

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

(2) Sending Multiple Selected Images

Press <0>.

Select [Send selected].

Select images to send.

zPress the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the

<5> dial to select an image to send,

then press <0>.

zYou can press the button and

turn the <6> dial counterclockwise

to switch to the three-image display to

select the images. To return to the single

image display, also press the

button and operate the <6> dial.

zAfter selecting the images to send, press

the <M> button.

444

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Exit image selection.

zSelect [OK].

Select [Size to send].

zOn the displayed screen, select an

image size.

zWhen sending movies, select the image

quality in [Quality to send].

Select [Send].

(3) Sending a Specied Range of Images

Press <0>.

Select [Send range].

445

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Specify the range of images.

zSelect the rst image (start point).

zSelect the last image (end point).

zTo cancel the selection, repeat this step.

zYou can press the button and turn

the <6> dial to change the number of

images shown in the index display.

Conrm the range.

zPress the <M> button.

Select [Size to send].

zOn the displayed screen, select an

image size.

zWhen sending movies, select the image

quality in [Quality to send].

Select [Send].

446

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

(4) Sending All Images on the Card

Press <0>.

Select [Send all card].

Select [Size to send].

zOn the displayed screen, select an

image size.

zWhen sending movies, select the image

quality in [Quality to send].

Select [Send].

447

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

(5) Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions

Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image

search conditions] at once.

For [Set image search conditions], refer to “Filtering Images for Playback”

(=345).

Press <0>.

Select [Send all found].

Select [Size to send].

zOn the displayed screen, select an

image size.

zWhen sending movies, select the image

quality in [Quality to send].

448

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Select [Send].

Ending Image Transfer

Sending Images from the Camera When Paired via Bluetooth (Android)

zPress the <M> button on the image

transfer screen.

zSelect [OK] on the screen on the left

to end image transfer and the Wi-Fi

connection.

Sending Images from the Camera over a Wi-Fi Connection

zPress the <M> button on the image

transfer screen.

zTo terminate the Wi-Fi connection, see

“Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection”

(=449).

449

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

oDuring the image transfer operation, a picture cannot be taken even if the

camera’s shutter button is pressed.

oThe camera cannot be connected to multiple smartphones via Wi-Fi when it is

connected to another device via Wi-Fi.

oYou can cancel the image transfer by selecting [Cancel] during the transfer.

oYou can select up to 999 les at a time.

oWith a Wi-Fi connection established, disabling the smartphone’s power saving

function is recommended.

oSelecting the reduced size for still photos applies to all still photos sent at that

time. Note that b size still photos are not reduced.

oSelecting compression for movies applies to all movies sent at that time.

oWhen you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.

oWith a Wi-Fi connection established, the camera’s auto power o󰀨 does not

function.

Terminating the Wi-Fi Connection

To terminate the Wi-Fi connection, perform either of the following operations.

On the Camera Connect screen, tap

on [ ].

On the [qWi-Fi on] screen, select

[Disconnect,exit].

zIf the [qWi-Fi on] screen is not

displayed, select [Wi-Fi function] on

the [5: Wireless communication

settings] screen.

zSelect [Disconnect,exit], then select

[OK] on the conrmation dialog.

450

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Specifying Viewable Images

You can specify images viewable on a smartphone by operating the camera.

Images can be specied after the Wi-Fi connection is terminated.

Select [Wi-Fi function].

zSelect [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless

communication settings] screen.

Select [q].

zIf the history (=493) is displayed,

switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>

keys.

Select [Edit device information].

Select a smartphone.

zSelect the name of the smartphone on

which you want to make the images

viewable.

451

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

Select [Viewable imgs].

Select an item.

zSelect [OK] to access the setting

screen.

[All images]

All images stored on the card become viewable.

[Images from past days]

Specify viewable images on the shooting-

date basis. Images shot up to nine days

ago can be specied.

zWhen [Images shot in past days] is

selected, images shot up to the specied

number of days before the current date

become viewable. Use the <W> <X>

keys to specify the number of days, then

press <0> to conrm the selection.

zOnce you select [OK], the viewable

images are set.

oIf [Viewable imgs] is set to any setting other than [All images], remote

shooting is not possible.

452

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Smartphone via Wi-Fi

[Select by rating]

Specify viewable images depending on

whether a rating is appended (or not

appended) or by the type of rating.

zOnce you select the type of rating, the

viewable images are set.

[File number range] (Select range)

(1) (2)

Select the rst and last images from images

arranged by the le number to specify the

viewable images.

1. Press <0> to display the image

selection screen.

Select an image using the <Y> <Z>

keys or <5> dial.

You can press the button and

turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to

select the image using the index display.

2. Select an image as the starting point (1).

3. Use <Z> to select an image as the

ending point (2).

4. Select [OK].

453

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi

This section describes how to connect the camera to a computer via Wi-

Fi and perform camera operations using EOS software or other dedicated

software. Install the latest version of software on the computer before

setting up a Wi-Fi connection.

For computer operating instructions, refer to the computer user manual.

Operating the Camera Using EOS Utility

Using EOS Utility (EOS software), you can perform a variety of camera

operations.

Steps on the Camera (1)

Select [5: Wireless communication

settings].

Select [Wi-Fi function].

zIf the [Nickname] screen is displayed,

Select [D] (Remote control (EOS

Utility)).

zIf the history (=493) is displayed,

switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>

keys.

454

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi

Select [Register a device for

connection].

(1)

(2)

Check the SSID (network name)

and password.

zCheck the SSID (1) and password (2)

displayed on the camera screen.

zIn [Wi-Fi settings], if you set

[Password] to [None], the password

will not be displayed or required. For

details, see =516.

Steps on the Computer (1)

Computer’s screen (sample)

Select the SSID, then enter the

password.

zOn the computer’s network setting

screen, select the SSID checked in step

zFor the password, enter the password

checked in step 5.

455

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi

Steps on the Camera (2)

Select [OK].

gThe following message is displayed.

“******” represents the last six digits of

the MAC address of the camera to be

connected.

Steps on the Computer (2)

Start EOS Utility.

In EOS Utility, click [Pairing over

Wi-Fi/LAN].

zIf a rewall-related message is

displayed, select [Yes].

Click [Connect].

zSelect the camera to connect to, then

click [Connect].

456

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi

Steps on the Camera (2)

Establish a Wi-Fi connection.

zSelect [OK].

[DWi-Fi on] Screen

Disconnect,exit

zTerminates the Wi-Fi connection.

Conrm set.

zYou can check the settings.

Error details

zWhen a Wi-Fi connection error occurs,

you can check the details of the error.

The Wi-Fi connection to a computer is now complete.

zOperate the camera using EOS Utility on the computer.

zTo reconnect via Wi-Fi, see “Reconnecting via Wi-Fi” (=493).

457

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi

oIf the Wi-Fi connection is terminated while recording a movie with remote

shooting, the following will occur.

• Any movie recording in progress in movie recording mode will continue.

• Any movie recording in progress in still photo shooting mode will end.

oOperations using the camera are not possible after you use EOS Utility to

switch from still photo shooting mode to movie recording mode.

oWith a Wi-Fi connection to EOS Utility established, certain functions are

unavailable.

oIn remote shooting, the AF speed may become slower.

oDepending on the communication status, image display or shutter release

timing may be delayed.

oIn Remote Live View shooting, the rate of image transmission is slower

compared to a connection via an interface cable. Therefore, moving subjects

cannot be displayed smoothly.

oThe Wi-Fi connection will be terminated if you set the camera’s power switch

to <2> or open the card slot/battery compartment cover.

458

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi

Sending Images to a Computer Automatically

With the dedicated software Image Transfer Utility 2, you can send images

on the camera to a computer automatically.

Steps on the Computer (1)

Connect the computer and access

point and start Image Transfer

Utility 2.

zIn Image Transfer Utility 2, access the

pairing settings screen.

zThe screen to set up pairing is shown

when you follow the instructions

displayed the rst time Image Transfer

Utility 2 starts up.

Steps on the Camera

Select [Auto send images to

computer].

zSelect [Wi-Fi settings] on the [5:

Wireless communication settings]

screen.

zOn the [Wi-Fi settings] screen, select

[Auto send images to computer].

In [Auto send], select [Enable].

zIf the [Nickname] screen is displayed,

459

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi

Select [OK].

Connect to an access point via

Wi-Fi.

zEstablish a Wi-Fi connection between

the camera and the access point

connected to the computer. For

connection instructions, see “Wi-

Fi Connection via Access Points”

(=488).

Select the computer to pair the

camera with.

Steps on the Computer (2)

Pair the camera and computer.

zSelect the camera, then click [Pairing].

460

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Computer via Wi-Fi

Sending Images on the Camera to a Computer Automatically

On the [Wi-Fi settings] screen,

select [Auto send images to

computer].

Select [Image sending options].

Select what to send.

zIf you select [Selected imgs] in [Range

to send], specify the images to send on

the [Select images to send] screen.

Connect the computer and access

point via Wi-Fi and start Image

Transfer Utility 2.

zImages are sent automatically to the

computer when you turn the camera on

within range of the access point.

oAuto power o󰀨 is disabled.

oAny images captured after automatic transfer are sent automatically when the

camera is restarted.

oIf images are not sent automatically, try restarting the camera.

oAny images captured during automatic transfer are also sent automatically.

461

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

This section describes how to print images by directly connecting the

camera to a printer via Wi-Fi. For printer operating instructions, refer to the

printer user manual.

Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection

Select [5: Wireless communication

settings].

Select [Wi-Fi function].

zIf the [Nickname] screen is displayed,

Select [l] (Print from Wi-Fi

printer).

zIf the history (=493) is displayed,

switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>

keys.

Select [Register a device for

connection].

462

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

(1)

(2)

Check the SSID (network name)

and password.

zCheck the SSID (1) and password (2)

displayed on the camera screen.

zIn [Wi-Fi settings], if you set

[Password] to [None], the password

will not be displayed or required. For

details, see =516.

Set up the printer.

zOn the Wi-Fi settings menu of the printer

to be used, select the SSID you have

checked.

zFor the password, enter the password

checked in step 5.

Select the printer.

zIn the list of detected printers, select the

printer to connect to via Wi-Fi.

zIf your preferred printer is not listed,

selecting [Search again] may enable

the camera to nd and display it.

Print the image (=464).

463

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

oWi-Fi connection is possible with Wi-Fi printers supporting PictBridge (Wireless

LAN).

oTo establish a Wi-Fi connection via an access point, see “Wi-Fi Connection via

Access Points” (=488).

464

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

Printing Images

Printing Images Individually

Select the image to be printed.

zPress the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the

<5> dial to select an image to print,

then press <0>.

zYou can press the button and

turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to

select the image using the index display.

Select [Print image].

Print the image.

zFor the print setting procedures, see

=467.

zSelect [Print], then [OK] to start printing.

465

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

Printing by Specifying the Options

Press <0>.

Select [Print order].

Set the printing options.

zFor the setting procedures, refer to

“Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)”

(=318).

zIf the print order is complete before

establishing a Wi-Fi connection, go to

step 4.

Select [Print].

z[Print] can be selected only when an

image is selected and the printer is

ready to print.

Set the [Paper settings] (=467).

466

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

Print the image.

zWhen [OK] is selected, printing starts.

oShooting is not possible while connected to a printer via Wi-Fi.

oMovies cannot be printed.

oBefore printing, be sure to set the paper size.

oCertain printers may not be able to imprint the le number.

oIf [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.

oDepending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a

bright background or on the border.

oRAW images cannot be printed by selecting [Print order]. When printing,

select [Print image] and print.

oWhen you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.

oDepending on the image’s le size and image quality, it may take some time to

start printing after you select [Print].

oTo stop printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select [OK].

oWhen printing with [Print order], if you stopped printing and want to resume

printing of the remaining images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not

resume if any of the following occurs.

• You change the print order or delete any of the print ordered images before

resuming printing.

• When index is set, you change the paper setting before resuming printing.

• The card’s remaining capacity is low when you pause printing.

oIf a problem occurs during printing, see =472.

467

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

Print Settings

The screen display and setting options vary depending on the printer.

Also, certain settings may not be available. For details, refer to the printer’s

instruction manual.

Print setting screen

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)(8)

(1) Sets date or le number printing (=469).

(2) Sets the printing e󰀨ects (=469).

(3) Sets the number of copies to print (=470).

(4) Sets the print area (=471).

(5) Sets the paper size, type, and layout (=468).

(6) Returns to the image selection screen.

(7) Starts the printing.

(8) The paper size, type, and layout you have set are displayed.

* Depending on the printer, certain settings may not be selectable.

Paper Settings

zSelect [Paper settings].

468

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

[Q] Setting the Paper Size

zSelect the size of the paper in the

printer.

[Y] Setting the Paper Type

zSelect the type of the paper in the

printer.

[U] Setting the Page Layout

zSelect the page layout.

Borderless Prints with no borders. If your printer cannot print borderless

prints, the print will have borders.

Bordered Prints with white borders along the edges.

xx-up Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, 20 or 35 images on one sheet.

Default The page layout varies depending on the printer model or its

settings.

oBorderless printing may result in signicant cropping if the aspect ratio of

the paper and image do not match. Images may also be printed at lower

resolution.

469

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

Setting the Date/File Number Imprinting

zSelect [I].

zSelect what to print.

Setting the Printing E󰀨ects (Image Optimization)

Contents displayed on the screen vary depending on the printer.

zSelect [E].

zSelect printing e󰀨ects.

Option Printing E󰀨ect

[E] Default Printing e󰀨ects di󰀨er depending on the printer. For details,

refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

[E] On Prints in the printer’s standard colors. The image’s Exif

information is used to make automatic corrections.

[E] O󰀨 No automatic correction is applied.

[E] Red-Eye1 E󰀨ective in ash images where the subject has red eye. The

red eye is reduced for printing.

oIf you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO

speed (H), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.

470

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

Setting the Number of Copies

zSelect [R].

zSelect the number of copies to print.

oThe [Default] setting for printing e󰀨ects and other options are the printer’s

own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer to the printer’s

instruction manual to nd out what the [Default] settings are.

471

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

Cropping the Image

Set cropping immediately before

printing. Changing other print settings after

you crop images may require you to crop

the images again.

On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].

Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.

zThe image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The shape

of the frame (aspect ratio) can be changed with [Paper settings].

Changing the Cropping Frame Size

Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size.

Moving the Cropping Frame

Press the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys to move the frame over the

image vertically or horizontally.

Switching the Orientation of the Cropping Frame

Pressing the button will toggle the cropping frame between the

vertical and horizontal orientations.

Press <0> to exit the cropping.

zYou can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the print

setting screen.

472

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Connecting to a Printer via Wi-Fi

oDepending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as you

specied.

oThe smaller the cropping frame, the lower the resolution at which images are

printed.

Handling Printer Errors

oIf printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper,

etc.) and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer. For details on

resuming printing, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

Error Messages

oIf a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the

camera screen. After xing the problem, resume printing. For details on how to

x a printing problem, refer to the printer’s instruction manual.

Paper Error

oConrm that paper is loaded correctly.

Ink Error

oCheck the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.

Hardware Error

oCheck for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.

File Error

oThe selected image cannot be printed. Images taken with a di󰀨erent camera

or images edited with a computer may not be printable.

473

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

This section describes how to use Web services to send images.

Registering Web Services

Use a smartphone or computer to add your Web services to the camera.

zA smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is

required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and

other Web services.

zVisit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on versions of

browsers (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer) and settings required for

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY access.

zFor information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/

cig/).

zFor CANON iMAGE GATEWAY instructions and setting details, refer to

the help information for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.

zIf you also intend to use Web services other than CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY, you must have an account with the services you intend to

use. For further details, check the websites for each Web service you will

zFees to connect to your provider and communication fees to access your

provider’s access point are charged separately.

474

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY

Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.

You will need to enter an email address used on your computer or

smartphone.

Steps on the Camera (1)

Select [5: Wireless communication

settings].

Select [Wi-Fi function].

zIf the [Nickname] screen is displayed,

Select [R].

Select [I Agree].

475

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection

zConnect to an access point via Wi-Fi.

Go to step 7 on =490.

Enter your email address.

zEnter your email address, then select

[OK].

Enter a four-digit number.

zEnter a four-digit number of your choice,

then select [OK].

Select [OK].

gThe [R] icon changes to [].

476

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

Steps on the Computer or Smartphone

Set up camera web link.

zAccess the page in the notication

message.

zFollow the instructions to complete the

settings on the camera web link settings

page.

Steps on the Camera (2)

Add CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as a

destination.

zSelect [].

gCANON iMAGE GATEWAY is now

added.

477

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

Registering Other Web Services

Steps on the Computer or Smartphone

Congure the Web service you

want to use.

zVisit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY

website and access the camera web link

settings page.

zFollow the on-screen instructions to

complete settings for Web services you

want to use.

Steps on the Camera

Add the Web service you

congured as a destination.

zOn the [Wi-Fi function] screen, select

[].

478

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

Establishing a Wi-Fi Connection

Select [Wi-Fi function].

zSelect [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless

communication settings] screen.

Select a Web service.

zIf the history (=493) is displayed,

switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>

keys.

zA screen to select a destination may be

displayed, depending on the type and

settings of the Web service (=492).

479

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

You can share images with your family and friends by sending images from

the camera to a Web service registered on the camera or by sending Web

links of the online albums.

Sending Images Individually

Select an image to send.

zPress the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the

<5> dial to select an image to send,

then press <0>.

zYou can press the button and

turn the <6> dial counterclockwise to

select the image using the index display.

Select [Send img shown].

zIn [Size to send], you can select the

image sending size.

zOn the screen after images are sent,

select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.

zWhen the [Terms of use] screen is

displayed, thoroughly read the message,

then select [I Agree].

zTo scroll the screen, use the <W> <X>

keys.

480

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

Sending Multiple Selected Images

Press <0>.

Select [Send selected].

Select images to send.

zPress the <Y> <Z> keys or turn the

<5> dial to select an image to send,

then press <0>.

zYou can press the button and

turn the <6> dial counterclockwise

to switch to the three-image display to

select the images. To return to the single

image display, also press the

button and operate the <6> dial.

zAfter selecting the images to send, press

the <M> button.

481

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

Select [Size to send].

zWhen YouTube is selected as the

destination, [Size to send] is not

displayed.

zOn the displayed screen, select an

image size.

Select [Send].

zOn the screen after images are sent,

select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.

zWhen the [Terms of use] screen is

displayed, thoroughly read the message,

then select [I Agree].

zTo scroll the screen, use the <W> <X>

keys.

482

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

Sending a Specied Range of Images

Specify the range of images to send all the images in the range at once.

Press <0>.

Select [Send range].

Specify the range of images.

zSelect the rst image (start point).

zSelect the last image (end point).

gImages will be selected and [X] will

appear.

zTo cancel the selection, repeat this step.

zYou can press the button and turn

the <6> dial to change the number of

images shown in the index display.

Conrm the range.

zPress the <M> button.

483

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

Select [Size to send].

zOn the displayed screen, select an

image size.

Select [Send].

zOn the screen after images are sent,

select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.

zWhen the [Terms of use] screen is

displayed, thoroughly read the message,

then select [I Agree].

zTo scroll the screen, use the <W> <X>

keys.

Sending All Images on the Card

Press <0>.

Select [Send all card].

484

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

Select [Size to send].

zOn the displayed screen, select an

image size.

Select [Send].

zOn the screen after images are sent,

select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.

zWhen the [Terms of use] screen is

displayed, thoroughly read the message,

then select [I Agree].

zTo scroll the screen, use the <W> <X>

keys.

485

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

Sending Images that Match the Search Conditions

Send all the images that match the search conditions set in [Set image

search conditions] at once.

For [Set image search conditions], refer to “Filtering Images for Playback”

(=345).

Press <0>.

Select [Send all found].

Select [Size to send].

zOn the displayed screen, select an

image size.

486

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

Select [Send].

zOn the screen after images are sent,

select [OK] to end the Wi-Fi connection.

zWhen the [Terms of use] screen is

displayed, thoroughly read the message,

then select [I Agree].

zTo scroll the screen, use the <W> <X>

keys.

487

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Sending Images to a Web Service

oWith a Wi-Fi connection to a Web service established, a picture cannot be

taken even if the camera’s shutter button is pressed.

oWhen sending an image to a Web service other than CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY, a send error message may not be displayed even if the image has

not been sent to the Web service successfully. Since such send errors can be

checked on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY site, check the error content, then

try sending the image again.

oDepending on the Web service, the type or number of images that can be sent

and the length of movies will be limited.

oCertain images may not be able to be sent with [Send range], [Send all

card], or [Send all found].

oWhen you reduce the image size, all images to be sent at the same time are

resized. Note that movies or b size still photos are not reduced.

o[Reduced] is enabled only for still photos shot with cameras of the same

model as this camera. Still photos shot with other models are sent without

resizing.

oWhen accessing CANON iMAGE GATEWAY from a computer or other device,

you can check the send history for the Web services that the images were

sent to.

oTo terminate the Wi-Fi connection without sending an image, press the

<M> button on the screen for step 1.

oWhen you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.

488

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points

This section describes how to join a Wi-Fi network via an access point

compatible with WPS (PCB mode).

First, check the position of the WPS button and how long to press it.

It may take approx. one minute to establish a Wi-Fi connection.

Select [5: Wireless communication

settings].

Select [Wi-Fi function].

zIf the [Nickname] screen is displayed,

Select an item.

zIf the history (=493) is displayed,

switch the screen with the <Y> <Z>

keys.

zPress the <W> <X> or <Y> <Z> keys

to select an item.

489

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points

Select [Register a device for

connection].

zWhen [q] (Connect to smartphone)

is selected, the screen on the left is

displayed. If Camera Connect is already

installed, select [Do not display].

Select [Switch network].

zDisplayed when [q], [D], or [l] is

selected.

Select [Connect with WPS].

oFor [Camera access point mode] displayed in step 6, see =492.

490

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points

Select [WPS (PBC mode)].

zSelect [OK].

Connect to the access point via

Wi-Fi.

zPress the access point’s WPS button.

zSelect [OK].

Select [Auto setting].

zSelect [OK] to access the setting screen

for the Wi-Fi function.

zIf an error occurs with [Auto setting],

see =518.

491

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points

Specify the settings for the Wi-Fi

function.

[qConnect to smartphone]

Go to step 7 on =435.

[DRemote control (EOS Utility)]

Go to step 8 or 9 on =455.

[lPrint from Wi-Fi printer]

Go to step 7 on =462.

Registering CANON iMAGE

GATEWAY

Go to step 6 on =475.

492

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Wi-Fi Connection via Access Points

Send To Screen

A screen to select a destination may be displayed depending on the Web

service.

To register destinations or to specify the settings, you must use a computer.

For more information, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.

zThe [Send to] screen may be displayed.

zSelect the destination from the list of

registered destinations.

zThe procedures for setting up a

connection and sending images are the

same as those for other Web services.

Camera Access Point Mode

Camera access point mode is a connection

mode for connecting the camera directly to

each device via Wi-Fi.

Displayed when [q], [D], or [l] is

selected in [Wi-Fi function].

493

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Reconnecting via Wi-Fi

Follow these steps to reconnect to devices or Web services with registered

connection settings.

Select [Wi-Fi function].

zSelect [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless

communication settings] screen.

Select an item.

zSelect the item to connect to via Wi-Fi

from the displayed history. If the item is

not displayed, use the <Y> <Z> keys

to switch screens.

zIf [Connection history] is set to

[Hide], the history will not be displayed

(=516).

Operate the connected device.

[q] Smartphone

zActivate the smartphone’s Wi-Fi function, then start Camera

Connect.

zIf the smartphone’s connection destination has been changed,

restore the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same

access point as the camera.

When directly connecting the camera to a smartphone via Wi-Fi,

“_ Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.

494

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Reconnecting via Wi-Fi

[D] Computer

zOn the computer, start the EOS software.

zIf the computer’s connection destination has been changed, restore

the setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access

point as the camera.

When directly connecting the camera to a computer via Wi-Fi,

“_ Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.

[l] Printer

zIf the printer’s connection destination has been changed, restore the

setting to connect via Wi-Fi to the camera or the same access point

as the camera.

When directly connecting the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi,

“_ Canon0A” is displayed at the end of the SSID.

495

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Reconnecting via Wi-Fi

Registering Multiple Connection Settings

You can register up to 20 connection settings for the Wi-Fi function.

Select [Wi-Fi function].

zSelect [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless

communication settings] screen.

Select an item.

zWhen the screen on the left appears,

use the <Y> <Z> keys to switch

screens.

zSelect the item to newly connect to via

Wi-Fi from the screen on the left.

zFor details on [q] (Connect to

smartphone), see “Connecting to a

Smartphone via Wi-Fi from the [Wi-Fi

function] Menu” (=419).

zFor [D] (Remote control (EOS Utility)),

see “Connecting to a Computer via Wi-

Fi” (=453).

zFor details on [l] (Print from Wi-Fi

printer), see “Connecting to a Printer via

Wi-Fi” (=461).

zWhen sending images to a Web service,

see “Sending Images to a Web Service”

(=473).

oTo delete connection settings, see =496.

496

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Changing or Deleting Connection Settings

Change or delete connection settings saved on the camera. To change or

delete the connection settings, terminate the Wi-Fi connection rst.

Select [Wi-Fi function].

zSelect [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless

communication settings] screen.

Select an item.

zWhen the screen on the left appears,

use the <Y> <Z> keys to switch

screens.

zFrom the screen on the left, select the

item for which to change or delete the

connection settings.

Select [Edit device information].

Select a device.

zSelect the device for which to change or

delete the connection settings.

497

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Changing or Deleting Connection Settings

Check or change the connection

settings.

zSelect an item, then change or delete

the connection settings on the displayed

screen.

zChange device nickname

You can change the nickname using the virtual keyboard (=517).

zViewable imgs (=450)

Displayed when [q] (Connect to smartphone) is selected. Settings will

appear at the bottom of the screen.

zErase connection information

You can delete connection settings saved on the camera.

For Web services, visit the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website to delete

the connection settings.

498

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Clearing Wireless Communication Settings

to Default

All wireless communication settings can be deleted. By deleting the wireless

communication settings, you can prevent their information from being

exposed when you lend or give your camera to other people.

Select [Clear settings].

Select [OK].

gWireless communication settings are

cleared to default, and the [Wireless

communication settings] screen will

reappear.

oPerforming [5: Clear all camera settings] does not delete the wireless

communication setting information.

499

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

View Info Screen

On the [View info] screen, you can check error details and the camera’s

MAC address.

Select [Wi-Fi function].

zSelect [Wi-Fi function] on the [Wireless

communication settings] screen.

Press the button.

gThe [View info] screen will appear.

zWhen an error has occurred, press <0> to display the error content.

500

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Responding to Error Messages

When an error occurs, display the details of the error by following one of the

procedures below. Then, eliminate the cause of the error by referring to the

examples shown in this chapter.

zOn the [View info] screen, press <0> (=499).

zSelect [Error details] on the [Wi-Fi on] screen.

Click the error code number’s page in the following chart to jump to the

corresponding page.

11 (=501) 12 (=501) 21 (=502) 22 (=503)

23 (=504) 61 (=505) 63 (=506) 64 (=506)

65 (=507) 66 (=507) 67 (=507) 68 (=508)

69 (=508) 91 (=508) 121 (=508) 125 (=509)

126 (=509) 127 (=509) 141 (=509) 142 (=509)

151 (=510) 152 (=510)

oWhen an error occurs, [Err**] is displayed on the upper right of the [Wi-Fi

function] screen. It disappears when the camera’s power is set to <2>.

501

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Responding to Error Messages

11: Connection target not found

zIn the case of [q], is Camera Connect running?

gEstablish a connection using Camera Connect (=435).

zIn the case of [l], is the power of the printer on?

gTurn on the printer.

zIn the case of [D], is the EOS software running?

gStart the EOS software and reestablish the connection (=455).

zAre the camera and the access point set to use the same password for

authentication?

gThis error occurs if the passwords do not match when the

authentication method for encryption is set to [Open system].

The setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case

characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is

set on the camera (=517).

12: Connection target not found

zIs the power of the target device and access point on?

gTurn on the target device and access point, then wait a while. If a

connection still cannot be established, perform the procedures to

establish the connection again.

502

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Responding to Error Messages

21: No address assigned by DHCP server

What to check on the camera

zOn the camera, IP address is set to [Auto setting]. Is this the correct

setting?

gIf no DHCP server is used, specify the settings after setting the IP

address to [Manual setting] on the camera (=518).

What to check on the DHCP server

zIs the power of the DHCP server on?

gTurn on the DHCP server.

zAre there enough addresses for assignment by the DHCP server?

gIncrease the number of addresses assigned by the DHCP server.

gRemove devices assigned addresses by the DHCP server from the

network to reduce the number of addresses in use.

zIs the DHCP server working correctly?

gCheck the DHCP server settings to make sure it is working correctly

as a DHCP server.

gIf applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DHCP

server is available.

503

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Responding to Error Messages

22: No response from DNS server

What to check on the camera

zOn the camera, does the DNS server’s IP address setting match the

server’s actual address?

gSet the IP address to [Manual setting]. Then, on the camera, set

the IP address that matches the address of the DNS server used

(=514, =518).

What to check on the DNS server

zIs the power of the DNS server on?

gTurn on the DNS server.

zAre the DNS server settings for IP addresses and the corresponding

names correct?

gOn the DNS server, make sure IP addresses and the corresponding

names are entered correctly.

zIs the DNS server working correctly?

gCheck the DNS server settings to make sure it is working correctly

as a DNS server.

gIf applicable, ask your network administrator to ensure the DNS

server is available.

What to check on the network as a whole

zDoes the network that you are trying to connect to via Wi-Fi include a

router or similar device that serves as a gateway?

gIf applicable, ask your network administrator for the network gateway

address and enter it on the camera (=514, =518).

gMake sure that the gateway address setting is correctly entered on

all network devices including the camera.

504

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Responding to Error Messages

23: Device with same IP address exists on selected network

What to check on the camera

zDo the camera and another device connected via Wi-Fi to the same

network have the same IP address?

gChange the camera’s IP address to avoid using the same address

as another device on the network. Otherwise, change the IP address

of the device that has a duplicate address.

gIf the camera’s IP address is set to [Manual setting] in network

environments using a DHCP server, change the setting to [Auto

setting] (=490).

Responding to Error Messages 21–23

oAlso check the following points when responding to errors numbered 21–23.

oAre the camera and the access point set to use the same password for

authentication?

• This error occurs if the passwords do not match when the authentication

method for encryption is set to [Open system]. The setting is case-

sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case characters. Make sure that the

correct password for authentication is set on the camera (=517).

505

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Responding to Error Messages

61: Selected SSID wireless LAN network not found

zAre any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the

antenna of the access point?

gMove the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible

from the point of view of the camera (=511).

What to check on the camera

zDoes the SSID set on the camera match that of the access point?

gCheck the SSID at the access point, then set the same SSID on the

camera.

What to check at the access point

zIs the access point turned on?

gTurn on the power of the access point.

zIf ltering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in

use registered at the access point?

gRegister the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.

The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen

(=499).

506

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Responding to Error Messages

63: Wireless LAN authentication failed

zAre the camera and the access point set to use the same authentication

method?

gThe camera supports the following authentication methods: [Open

system], [Shared key], and [WPA/WPA2-PSK].

zAre the camera and the access point set to use the same password for

authentication?

gThe setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case

characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is

set on the camera.

zIf ltering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in

use registered at the access point?

gRegister the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.

The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen

(=499).

64: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal

zAre the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption

method?

gThe camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP,

and AES.

zIf ltering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in

use registered at the access point?

gRegister the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.

The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen

(=499).

507

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Responding to Error Messages

65: Wireless LAN connection lost

zAre any obstacles blocking the line of sight between the camera and the

antenna of the access point?

gMove the antenna of the access point to a position clearly visible

from the point of view of the camera (=511).

zThe Wi-Fi connection was lost for some reason, and the connection

cannot be restored.

gThe following are possible reasons: excessive access to the access

point from another device, a microwave oven or similar appliance in

use nearby (interfering with IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band)), or

inuence of rain or high humidity (=511).

66: Incorrect wireless LAN password

zAre the camera and the access point set to use the same password for

authentication?

gThe setting is case-sensitive, so check upper- and lower-case

characters. Make sure that the correct password for authentication is

set on the camera.

67: Incorrect wireless LAN encryption method

zAre the camera and the access point set to use the same encryption

method?

gThe camera supports the following encryption methods: WEP, TKIP,

and AES.

zIf ltering by MAC address is active, is the MAC address of the camera in

use registered at the access point?

gRegister the MAC address of the camera used to the access point.

The MAC address can be checked on the [View info] screen

(=499).

508

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Responding to Error Messages

68: Cannot connect to wireless LAN terminal. Retry from the

beginning.

zDid you hold down the access point’s WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)

button for the specied period of time?

gHold down the WPS button for the period of time specied in the

access point’s instruction manual.

zAre you trying to establish a connection near the access point?

gTry establishing the connection when both devices are within reach

of each other.

69: Multiple wireless LAN terminals have been found. Cannot

connect. Retry from the beginning.

zConnection is in progress by other access points in Pushbutton

Connection mode (PBC mode) of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup).

gWait a while before trying to establish the connection.

91: Other error

zA problem other than error code number 11 to 69 occurred.

gTurn the camera’s power switch o󰀨 and on.

121: Not enough free space on server

zThe target Web server does not have enough free space.

gDelete unnecessary images on the Web server, check the free space

on the Web server, then try sending the data again.

509

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Responding to Error Messages

125: Check the network settings

zIs the network connected?

gCheck the connection status of the network.

126: Could not connect to server

zCANON iMAGE GATEWAY is under maintenance or load is concentrated

temporarily.

gTry connecting to the Web service again later.

127: An error has occurred

zA problem other than error code number 121 to 126 occurred while the

camera is connected to the Web service.

gTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the Web service.

141: Printer is busy. Reconnect to try again.

zIs the printer performing a printing process?

gTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the

printing process is nished.

zIs another camera connected to the printer via Wi-Fi?

gTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection to the printer after the Wi-

Fi connection to the other camera has been terminated.

142: Could not acquire printer information. Reconnect to try

again.

zIs the power of the printer on?

gTry again to establish the Wi-Fi connection after turning on the

printer.

510

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Responding to Error Messages

151: Transmission canceled

zAutomatic image transfer to the computer was somehow interrupted.

gTo resume automatic image transfer, set the camera’s power switch

to <2>, and then set it to <1>.

152: Card’s write protect switch is set to lock

zIs the card’s write protect switch set to the locked position?

gSlide the card’s write protect switch to the writing position.

511

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Wireless Communication Function Notes

If the transmission rate drops, the connection is lost, or other problems

occur when using the wireless communication functions, try the following

corrective actions.

Distance Between the Camera and the Smartphone

If the camera is too far from the smartphone, a Wi-Fi connection may not

be established even when Bluetooth connection is possible. In this case,

bring the camera and the smartphone closer together, then establish a Wi-

Fi connection.

Installation Location of Access Point Antenna

zWhen using indoors, install the device in the room where you are using

the camera.

zInstall the device where people or objects do not come between the

device and the camera.

Nearby Electronic Devices

If the Wi-Fi transmission rate drops because of the inuence of the following

electronic devices, stop using them or move further away from the devices

to transmit communication.

zThe camera communicates over Wi-Fi via IEEE 802.11b/g/n using radio

waves in the 2.4 GHz band. For this reason, the Wi-Fi transmission

rate will drop if there are Bluetooth devices, microwave ovens, cordless

telephones, microphones, smartphones, other cameras, or similar

devices operating on the same frequency band nearby.

Cautions for Using Multiple Cameras

zWhen connecting multiple cameras to one access point via Wi-Fi, make

sure the cameras’ IP addresses are di󰀨erent.

zWhen multiple cameras are connected to one access point via Wi-Fi, the

transmission rate drops.

zWhen there are multiple IEEE 802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band) access points,

leave a gap of ve channels between each Wi-Fi channel to reduce radio

wave interference. For example, use channels 1, 6, and 11, channels 2

and 7, or channels 3 and 8.

512

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Wireless Communication Function Notes

Using the Wireless Remote Control BR-E1

zWhen [Bluetooth function] is set to [Remote] to use the Wireless

Remote Control BR-E1, the camera cannot be connected to a

smartphone via Bluetooth.

513

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Security

If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may

occur.

zTransmission monitoring

Third parties with malicious intent may monitor the Wi-Fi transmissions

and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.

zUnauthorized network access

Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to

the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.

Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access

such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain

access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where

someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to

cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).

It is recommended to make use of the systems and functions to thoroughly

secure your network, preventing these types of problems from occurring.

514

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Checking Network Settings

zWindows

Open the Windows [Command Prompt], then type ipcong/all and press

the <Enter> key.

In addition to the IP address assigned to the computer, the subnet mask,

gateway, and DNS server information are also displayed.

zMac OS

In Mac OS X, open the [Terminal] application, enter ifcong -a, and press

the <Return> key. The IP address assigned to the computer is indicated

in the [en0] item next to [inet], in the format “***.***.***.***”.

* For information about the [Terminal] application, refer to the Mac OS X help.

To avoid using the same IP address for the computer and other devices on

the network, change the rightmost number when setting up the IP address

assigned to the camera in the processes described on =518.

Example: 192.168.1.10

515

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

[Wireless communication settings] Screen

On the [Wireless communication settings] screen, you can change the

wireless communication function settings.

Select [5: Wireless communication settings].

Wi-Fi settings

zSee the next page.

Wi-Fi function

The following Wi-Fi functions are available:

zCommunicate with smartphone

zRemote control (EOS Utility)

zPrint from Wi-Fi printer

zSend images to Web service

Bluetooth function (=429)

Displays the [Bluetooth function]

screen on which you can set or check the

Bluetooth functions.

Nickname

You can change the nickname using the

virtual keyboard (=517).

Clear settings (=498)

Clear all wireless communication settings.

516

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

[Wi-Fi settings] Screen

Wi-Fi

When the use of electronic devices and

wireless devices is prohibited, such as on

board airplanes or in hospitals, set it to

[Disable].

Password

Set to [None] to allow a Wi-Fi connection to

be established without a password (except

when connecting to an access point via Wi-

Fi).

Connection history

You can set whether to [Show] or [Hide]

the history of the Wi-Fi connected devices.

Auto send images to computer

With the dedicated software Image

Transfer Utility 2, you can send images on

the camera to a computer automatically

(=458).

Send to smartphone after shot

Your shots can be sent to a smartphone

automatically (=439).

MAC address

You can check the MAC address of the

camera.

517

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Virtual Keyboard Operation

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5) (7) (8) (9)

(6)

(1) Input area, for entering text

(2) Cursor keys, for moving in the

input area

(3) Current no. of characters/no.

available

(4) Keyboard

(5) Switch input modes

(6) Space

(7) Delete a character in the input

area

(8) Change the type of keyboard

(9) Finish the text entry

zUse the <W> <X> <Y> <Z> keys to move within 2 and 4–8.

zPress <0> to conrm input or when switching input modes.

518

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the IP Address Manually

Set up the IP address settings manually. The items displayed vary

depending on the Wi-Fi function.

Select [Manual setting].

zSelect [OK].

Select an item.

zSelect an item to access the screen for

numerical input.

zTo use a gateway, select [Enable], then

select [Address].

Enter the desired values.

zTurn the <6> dial to move the input

position in the upper area and turn the

<5> dial to select the number. Press

<0> to enter the selected number.

zTo set the entered values and return to

the screen for step 2, press the <M>

button.

519

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting the IP Address Manually

Select [OK].

zWhen you have completed setting the

necessary items, select [OK].

zIf you are not sure what to enter, see

“Checking Network Settings” (=514),

or ask the network administrator or

another person knowledgeable about

the network.

520

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Status Display

Wireless communication status can be checked on the camera screen.

(3)

(1) (2)

(2)

(1) Wi-Fi function

(2) Bluetooth function

(3) Wireless signal strength

Communication status Wi-Fi function Wireless signal

strength

Not

connected

Wi-Fi: Disable

O󰀨

Wi-Fi: Enable

Connecting (Blinking)

Connected

Sending data (fg)

Connection error (Blinking)

521

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Status Display

Bluetooth Function Indicator

Bluetooth function Connection status Screen

Other than [Disable] Bluetooth connected

Bluetooth not connected

[Disable] Bluetooth not connected Not displayed

522

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

523

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

523

Custom Functions / My Menu

You can ne-tune camera functions and change the functionality of

buttons and dials to suit your shooting preferences. You can also

add menu items and Custom Functions that you adjust frequently

to My Menu tabs.

524

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: Customization

=526

=530

=536

=546

525

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Setting Custom Functions

Select [C.Fn I: Exposure], [C.Fn II:

Autofocus], or [C.Fn III: Operation/

Others].

(1)

Select a Custom Function number.

zUse the <Y> <Z> keys to select the

Custom Function number (1) to set up.

Change the setting as desired.

zUse the <W> <X> keys to select a

setting (number).

zTo set up another Custom Function,

repeat steps 2–3.

zAt the bottom of the screen, the current

Custom Function settings are indicated

below the respective function numbers.

zAny options changed from defaults are

displayed in blue.

Exit the setting.

zPress the <M> button.

gThe screen in step 1 is displayed again.

526

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

You can customize camera features on the [8] tab to suit your shooting

preferences.

C.Fn I: Exposure

C.Fn I-1: Exposure level increments

Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure

compensation, AEB, ash exposure compensation, etc.

z0: 1/3-stop

z1: 1/2-stop

oWhen [1/2-stop] is set, the display will be as shown below.

C.Fn I-2: ISO speed setting increments

You can change the manual ISO speed setting increments to a whole-stop.

z0: 1/3-stop

z1: 1-stop

oEven if [1-stop] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop

increments when ISO Auto is set.

oEven when [1-stop] is set, you can set ISO 40000 (for still photo shooting).

527

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn I-3: Bracketing auto cancel

You can specify to cancel AEB and white balance bracketing when the

power switch is set to <2>.

z0: Enable

z1: Disable

C.Fn I-4: Bracketing sequence

The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can

be changed.

z0: 0 → – → +

z1: – → 0 → +

z2: + → 0 → –

AEB White Balance Bracketing

B/A Direction M/G Direction

0 : Standard exposure 0 : Standard white balance 0: Standard white balance

–: Decreased exposure – : Blue bias – : Magenta bias

+ : Increased exposure + : Amber bias +: Green bias

528

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn I-5: Number of bracketed shots

The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can be

changed.

When [Bracketing sequence] is set to [0, –, +], the bracketed shots will be

taken as shown in the table below.

z0: 3 shots

z1: 2 shots

z2: 5 shots

z3: 7 shots

(1-stop/step increments)

1st Shot 2nd Shot 3rd Shot 4th Shot 5th Shot 6th Shot 7th Shot

3: 3 shots Standard (0) –1 +1

2: 2 shots Standard (0) ±1

5: 5 shots Standard (0) –2 –1 +1 +2

7: 7 shots Standard (0) –3 –2 –1 +1 +2 +3

oIf [2 shots] is set, you can select the + or – side when setting the AEB range.

With WB bracketing, the 2nd shot will be adjusted toward either the B/A or M/

G direction.

529

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn I-6: Safety shift

If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be

obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically

change the manually selected setting to obtain the standard exposure.

When set to [Shutter speed/Aperture], this setting applies to <s> and

<f> mode. When set to [ISO speed], this setting applies to <d>, <s>,

and <f> mode.

z0: Disable

z1: Shutter speed/Aperture

z2: ISO speed

oUnder [z: zISO speed settings], even if [ISO speed range] or [Min.

shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will override it if

the standard exposure cannot be obtained.

oThe minimum and maximum limits for the safety shift with the ISO speed are

determined by [Auto range] (=134). However, if the manually set ISO

speed exceeds the [Auto range], the safety shift will take e󰀨ect up or down to

the manually set ISO speed.

oSafety shift will take e󰀨ect as necessary even when ash is used.

C.Fn I-7: AE lock metering mode after focus

For each metering mode, you can specify

whether to lock the exposure (AE lock)

once subjects are in focus with One-Shot

AF. The exposure will be locked while you

keep pressing the shutter button halfway.

Select metering modes for AE lock and add

a checkmark [X]. Select [OK] to register

the setting.

530

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn II: Autofocus

C.Fn II-1: Tracking sensitivity

You can set the subject-tracking sensitivity, which a󰀨ects responsiveness to

interfering objects that move across AF points or subjects that stray from AF

points during Servo AF.

Standard setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.

zLocked on: –2 / Locked on: –1

The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an obstacle

cuts across the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF points. The

–2 setting makes the camera keep tracking the target subject longer than

the –1 setting.

However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take slightly

longer to switch and focus on the target subject.

zResponsive: +2 / Responsive: +1

The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at di󰀨erent distances

that are covered by the AF points. Also e󰀨ective when you want to always

focus on the closest subject. The +2 setting is more responsive than the

+1 setting when focusing on the next subject.

However, the camera will be more prone to focus on an unintended

subject.

531

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn II-2: Acceleration/deceleration tracking

Sets the Servo AF tracking sensitivity for subjects that change speed

suddenly, as by suddenly moving or stopping.

Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in

moving speed).

z–2 / –1

Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in

moving speed). E󰀨ective when a setting of 0 makes focus unstable, due

to slight subject movement or an obstruction in front of the subject.

z+2 / +1

E󰀨ective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden acceleration/

deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving subject’s speed

suddenly changes dramatically, the camera continues to focus on

the target subject. For example, the camera is less likely to focus

behind a subject that suddenly starts approaching you, or in front of an

approaching subject that suddenly stops moving. Setting +2 can track

dramatic changes in the moving subject’s speed better than with +1.

However, since the camera will be sensitive to even slight movements of

the subject, focusing may become unstable for short periods.

532

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn II-3: AF point auto switching

This sets the switching sensitivity of the AF points as they track the subject

moving dramatically up, down, left, or right.

Takes e󰀨ect when [z: AF method] is set to [u+Tracking], [Expand AF

area: Z], [Expand AF area: Around], or [Zone AF].

Standard setting for gradual AF point switching.

z+2 / +1

Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or right

and moves away from the AF point, the camera switches its focus to

neighboring AF points to continue focusing on the subject. The camera

switches to the AF point deemed most likely to focus on the subject

based on the subject’s continual movement, contrast, etc. Setting +2

makes the camera more prone to switch the AF point than with +1.

However, with a wide-angle lens having a wide depth of eld or if

the subject is too small in the frame, the camera may focus with an

unintended AF point.

533

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn II-4: Lens drive when AF impossible

You can specify lens operation in cases when the camera cannot autofocus

on a subject.

z0: Continue focus search

If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the lens is driven to search

for the precise focus.

z1: Stop focus search

If autofocus starts and the focus is far o󰀨 or if focus cannot be achieved,

the lens drive will not be performed. This prevents the lens from

becoming grossly out of focus due to the focus search drive.

o[1: Stop focus search] is recommended for super telephoto lenses or other

lens that cover a large area, to avoid signicant delay from focus search drive

if the lens becomes greatly out of focus.

C.Fn II-5: Limit AF methods

You can limit the AF methods available to

those that you will use.

For details on AF methods, see =188–

=190.

Add a checkmark [X] to the AF methods to

make available. Select [OK] to register the

setting.

oThe [X] mark cannot be removed from [1-point AF].

534

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn II-6: Orientation linked AF point

You can assign AF points or Zone AF frames to di󰀨erent positions based on

whether you are shooting vertically or horizontally.

z0: Same for both vertic./horiz.

AF points or Zone AF frames in the same position are used for both

vertical and horizontal shooting.

z1: Separate AF pts: pt only

Separate AF point or Zone AF frame positions can be assigned for

each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip

above, 3. Vertical with the camera grip below). Useful when switching to

AF points or Zone AF frames in other positions automatically based on

camera orientation.

AF points or Zone AF frames assigned to each of the three camera

orientations are retained.

535

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn II-7: Initial Servo AF pt for c

You can set the initial AF point for Servo AF when the AF method is set to

[u+Tracking].

z0: Automatic

The initial AF point of Servo AF for [u+Tracking] is set automatically to

suit the shooting conditions.

z1: Initial AF pt set for c

Servo AF starts from the manually set AF point when AF operation is set

to [Servo AF] and the AF method is set to [u+Tracking].

z2: AF pt set for

If you switch from Spot AF, 1-point AF, Expand AF area :Z, or Expand AF

area: Around to [u+Tracking], Servo AF starts from the manually set AF

point. Useful for starting Servo AF from the AF point set before switching

to [u+Tracking].

536

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn III: Operation/Others

C.Fn III-1: Dial direction during Tv/Av

Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture can be

reversed.

In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and <5>

dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning direction of only

the <6> dial will be reversed. The direction of the <5> dial in <a>

mode matches the direction to set exposure compensation in <d>, <s>,

and <f> modes.

z0: Normal

z1: Reverse direction

C.Fn III-2: Control ring rotation

RF lens and mount adapter control ring turning direction when setting the

shutter speed and aperture can be reversed.

z0: Normal

z1: Reverse direction

C.Fn III-3: Focus ring rotation

RF lens focusing ring turning direction can be reversed.

z0: Normal

z1: Reverse direction

C.Fn III-4: RF lens MF focus ring sensitivity

RF lens focusing ring sensitivity can be set.

z0: Varies with rotation speed

z1: Linked to rotation degree

537

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn III-5: Customize buttons

You can assign frequently used functions to buttons, such as <V> or .

Di󰀨erent functions, for use when shooting still photos or movies, can be

assigned to the same button.

Select a part of the bar.

Select a function to assign.

zPress <0> to set it.

538

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

Functions Available for Buttons

Function L

Metering and AF start kkk

AF stop k k

AF point selection k k

Direct AF point selection

Set AF point to center k k

One-Shot AFzServo AF*1k k

Touch & drag AF k k

Eye Detection AF*1k k

Exposure

Metering start k

AE lock k k

AE lock (hold) k k

AE lock (while button pressed) k

AE Lock/FE Lock*1k k

Exposure compensation (hold button, turn )

Set ISO speed (hold button, turn )

Flash function settings*1k k

FE lock*1k k

Movie

kMovies k k

Pause Movie Servo AF k

539

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

k k k

kkkkkkkkk

kkkk

kkkkkkkkk

k k k

k k k k

kkkkkkkkk

k k k

kkkkkkkkk

540

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

Function L

Press buttons directly

Dial function settings k k

Depth-of-eld preview*1k k

Reset selected item in Fv mode*1k k

Reset Tv/Av/ /ISO in Fv mode*1k k

Quick Control screen k k

Magnify/Reduce k k

Menu display k k

Image quality*1k k

Picture Style k k

Select folder k k

Create folder k k

Maximize screen brightness (temporary) k k

Display o󰀨 k k

Switch between viewnder/screen k k

Eco mode k k

Wi-Fi function k k

No function (disabled) k k

*1: Cannot be assigned as a function available when recording movies.

541

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

kkkkkkkkk

k k k k

kkkkkkkkk

o<> stands for “AF stop button” provided on super telephoto lenses

equipped with Image Stabilizer.

542

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn III-6: Customize dials

Assign functions to the <5>, <6> dials or control ring <T>.

Select a part of the bar.

Select a function to assign.

zPress <0> to set it.

543

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

Functions Available for Dials

Function 6 5 T

Shutter speed setting in M mode k k

Aperture setting in M mode k k

Change aperture (hold metering button) k

Change shutter speed (hold metering button) k

Set ISO speed (hold metering button) k

Exposure compensation (hold metering

button) k

Change aperture value k

Change shutter speed k

Set ISO Speed k

Exposure compensation k

No function (disabled) kkk

o<T>: Control ring on RF lenses and mount adapters

544

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn III-7: Release shutter without lens

You can specify whether shooting still photos or movies is possible without

a lens attached to the camera.

z0: Disable

z1: Enable

C.Fn III-8: Retract lens on power o󰀨

You can set whether to retract gear-type STM lenses (such as EF40mm

f/2.8 STM) automatically when the camera’s power switch is set to <2>.

z0: Enable

z1: Disable

oWith auto power o󰀨, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.

oBefore detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.

oWhen [0: Enable] is set, this function takes e󰀨ect regardless of the lens’s

focus mode switch setting (AF or MF).

545

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Custom Function Settings

C.Fn III-9: Audio compression

Sets audio compression for movie recording. [1: Disable] allows higher

audio quality than when audio is compressed, but le sizes are larger.

z0: Enable

z1: Disable

oEditing movie les recorded with [1: Disable] and then saving them with

compression will also compress the audio.

oAudio is compressed even if [1: Disable] is selected when [Movie rec. size]

is set to L6V (NTSC) or L5V (PAL).

oAudio for video snapshots is compressed even when [1: Disable] is selected.

546

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Clearing Custom Function Settings

zClearing all Custom Function settings

By selecting [8: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)], you can clear

all Custom Function settings other than [Customize buttons] and

[Customize dials] settings.

zClearing [Customize buttons] and [Customize dials] settings

By selecting [8: Clear customized settings], you can clear [Customize

buttons] and [Customize dials] settings.

547

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Tab Menus: My Menu

=548

=551

=552

548

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Registering My Menu

Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom Functions

whose settings you change frequently.

Creating and Adding My Menu Tab

Select [Add My Menu tab].

Select [OK].

zYou can create up to ve My Menu tabs

by repeating steps 1 and 2.

Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)

Select [MY MENU*: Congure].

549

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Registering My Menu

Select [Select items to register].

zSelect the item to be set, then press

<0>.

zSelect [OK] on the conrmation dialog.

zYou can register up to six items.

zTo return to the screen in step 2, press

the <M> button.

My Menu Tab Settings

You can sort and delete items under the

menu tab, and rename or delete the menu

tab.

zSort registered items

You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select

[Sort registered items], select an item to rearrange, then press <0>.

With [z] displayed, use the <W> <X> keys to move the item, then press

<0>.

zDelete selected items / Delete all items on tab

You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]

deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all the

registered items under the tab.

550

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Registering My Menu

zDelete tab

You can delete the current My Menu tab. Select [Delete tab] to delete the

[MY MENU*] tab.

zRename tab

You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].

Select [Rename tab].

Enter text.

zSelect [] or press the <L> button to

delete any unneeded characters.

zUse the <V> cross keys or <5> dial

to select a character, then press <0>.

zBy selecting [ ], you can change the

input mode.

Conrm input.

zPress the <M> button, then press

[OK].

551

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Registering My Menu

Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items

You can delete all the created My Menu

tabs or My Menu items registered under

them.

zDelete all My Menu tabs

You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select [Delete

all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will

be deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.

zDelete all items

You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to

[MY MENU5] tabs. The tab(s) will remain. When [Delete all items]

is selected, all the items registered under all the created tabs will be

deleted.

oIf you perform [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names renamed

with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.

552

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Registering My Menu

Menu Display Settings

You can select [Menu display] to set the

menu screen that is to appear rst when

you press the <M> button.

zNormal display

Displays the last displayed menu screen.

zDisplay from My Menu tab

Displays with the [9] tab selected.

zDisplay only My Menu tab

Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The [z], [3], [5], and [8] tabs will

not be displayed.)

553

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

553

Reference

This chapter provides reference information on camera features.

554

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Software Overview

Downloading and Installing the Software

When using EOS software or other dedicated software, use the latest

version available. To download it, you will need to enter the serial number

on the bottom of the camera.

oDo not connect the camera to a computer before you install the software. The

software will not be installed correctly.

oYou cannot install the EOS software to a computer without an Internet

connection.

oPrevious versions cannot display images from this camera correctly. Also,

processing RAW images from this camera is not possible.

oAlways update any previous version of the software that is installed (by

overwriting it with the latest version).

Download the software.

zConnect to the Internet from a computer and access the following

Canon website.

www.canon.com/icpd

zSelect your country or region of residence and download the

software.

zDecompress it on the computer.

For Windows

Click the displayed installer le to start the installer.

For Macintosh

A dmg le will be created and displayed. Follow the steps below to

startup the installer.

555

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Software Overview

(1) Double-click the dmg le.

gA drive icon and installer le will appear on the desktop.

If the installer le does not appear, double-click the drive icon

to display it.

(2) Double-click the installer le.

gThe installer starts.

Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software.

Downloading the Software Instruction Manuals

Software Instruction Manuals (PDF les) can be downloaded from the

Canon website to your computer.

zSoftware Instruction Manual Download Site

www.canon.com/icpd

oTo view the Instruction Manuals (PDF les), an Adobe PDF viewing

software such as Adobe Acrobat Reader DC (most recent version

recommended) is required.

oAdobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.

oDouble-click the downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF le) to open it.

oTo learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help section.

556

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Importing Images to a Computer

You can use EOS software to import images from the camera to a computer.

There are two ways to do this.

Importing by Connecting the Camera to the Computer

Install the software (=554).

Connect the camera to the

computer with Interface Cable IFC-

100U (sold separately, computer

end: USB Type-C).

zInsert the plug into the camera’s digital

terminal.

zInsert the other end of the cable into the

computer’s USB terminal.

Use EOS Utility to import the

images.

zRefer to the EOS Utility Instruction

Manual.

oWith Wi-Fi connection established, the camera cannot communicate with the

computer even if they are connected with an interface cable.

557

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Importing Images to a Computer

Importing Images with a Card Reader

You can use a card reader to import images to a computer.

Install the software (=554).

Insert the card into the card reader.

Use Digital Photo Professional to

import the images.

zRefer to the Digital Photo Professional

Instruction Manual.

oWhen importing images from the camera to a computer with a card reader

without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to the

computer.

558

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Charging a Battery in the Camera

Using USB Power Adapter PD-E1 (sold separately), you can charge Battery

Pack LP-E17 without removing it from the camera. Charging stops if you

operate the camera.

Connect the USB power adapter.

zWith the camera’s power switch set to

<2>, insert the USB power adapter

plug fully into the digital terminal.

Connect the power cord.

zConnect the power cord to the USB

power adapter and plug the other end

into a power outlet.

gCharging begins, and the access lamp

(1) is lit in green.

(1)

zWhen charging is nished, the access

lamp turns o󰀨. Unplug the power cord

and disconnect the USB power adapter

from the camera.

oTo protect batteries and keep them in optimal condition, do not charge

continuously for more than 24 hours.

oIn case of charging problems, the access lamp blinks in green and a protective

circuit stops charging. In this case, unplug the power cord, reattach the battery,

and wait a few minutes before plugging it in again. If the problem persists,

contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.

559

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Charging a Battery in the Camera

oIf the access lamp does not light up, try unplugging the USB power adapter

and plugging it in again.

oThe charging time required and the amount charged vary depending on

ambient temperature and remaining capacity.

oFor safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5–10°C / 41–50°F) will

take longer.

oBatteries are not charged when the camera is connected via Wi-Fi or when the

card slot/battery compartment cover is open.

560

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Using an Extension Grip

Extension Grip EG-E1 (sold separately) is a dedicated accessory that

makes EOS RP cameras even easier to hold. The battery and card can be

inserted or removed while the extension grip is attached to the camera.

Remove the card slot/battery

compartment cover.

zTurn the camera o󰀨 and remove the

cover. Be careful not to lose the cover

after removal.

Attach the extension grip.

zAttach as shown at left and turn the

attach/detach dial to lock in place.

561

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Using an Extension Grip

Open the extension grip cover.

zFor instructions on inserting or removing

the battery and card, see “Inserting/

Removing the Battery and Card”

(=42).

oWhen reattaching the card slot/battery compartment cover to the camera,

attach it opened to at least 90°.

562

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

If a problem occurs with the camera, rst refer to this Troubleshooting

Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, contact

your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.

Power-Related Problems

Batteries cannot be charged with the charger.

zDo not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack

LP-E17.

The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.

zIf (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2) communication

with the battery failed (with a non-Canon battery pack), the protection

circuit will stop charging, and the charge lamp will blink in orange. In

the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug from the power outlet.

Detach and reattach the battery to the charger. Wait a few minutes, then

reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the problem persists,

contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.

The charger’s lamp does not blink.

zIf the internal temperature of the battery attached to the charger is

high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp

o󰀨). During charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes high for any

reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the battery

temperature goes down, charging will resume automatically.

563

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

Batteries cannot be charged with the USB power adapter (sold

separately).

zBatteries are not charged while the camera’s power switch is set to

<1>.

zOperating the camera will stop charging in progress.

The access lamp blinks during charging with the USB power

adapter.

zIn case of charging problems, the access lamp blinks in green and a

protective circuit stops charging. In this case, unplug the power cord,

reattach the battery, and wait a few minutes before plugging it in again.

If the problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service

Center.

The access lamp is not lit during charging with the USB power

adapter.

zTry unplugging the USB power adapter and plugging it in again.

The camera is not activated even when the power switch is set

to <1>.

zMake sure the card slot/battery compartment cover is closed (=42).

zMake sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (=42).

zCharge the battery (=40).

The access lamp still lights or blinks even when the power

switch is set to <2>.

zIf the power is turned o󰀨 while an image is being recorded to the card, the

access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds. When

the image recording is complete, the power will turn o󰀨 automatically.

564

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

[Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon logo?] is

displayed.

zDo not use any battery packs other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack

LP-E17.

zRemove and install the battery again (=42).

zIf the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.

The battery becomes exhausted quickly.

zUse a fully charged battery (=40).

zThe battery performance may have degraded. See [5: Battery info.] to

check the battery’s recharge performance level (=381). If the battery

performance is poor, replace the battery with a new one.

zThe number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following

operations:

Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.

Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.

Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.

Using the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth (wireless communication) function.

The camera turns o󰀨 by itself.

zAuto power o󰀨 is in e󰀨ect. To deactivate auto power o󰀨, set [Auto power

o󰀨] under [5: Power saving] to [Disable] (=372).

zEven if [Auto power o󰀨] is set to [Disable], the screen and viewnder

will still turn o󰀨 after the camera is left idle for the time set in [Display o󰀨]

and [Viewnder o󰀨], but the camera will remain on.

zSet [5: Eco mode] to [O󰀨].

565

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

Shooting-Related Problems

The lens cannot be attached.

zTo attach EF or EF-S lenses, you will need a mount adapter. The camera

cannot be used with EF-M lenses.

No images can be shot or recorded.

zMake sure the card is properly inserted (=42).

zSlide the card’s write-protect switch to the Write/Erase setting (=42).

zIf the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make

space (=42, =314).

zShooting is not possible if the AF point turns orange when you attempt to

focus. Press the shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or

focus manually (=54, =214).

The card cannot be used.

zIf a card error message is displayed, see =44 or =581.

An error message is displayed when the card is inserted in

another camera.

zSince SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT, if you format a card with this

camera and then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed

and it may not be possible to use the card.

566

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

The image is out of focus or blurred.

zSet the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF> (=48, =51).

zPress the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (=54).

zWith a lens equipped with an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.

zIn low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter

speed (=98), set a higher ISO speed (=131), use ash (=222),

or use a tripod.

zSee “Minimizing Blurred Photos” on =70.

I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.

zSet the AF operation to One-Shot AF. Shooting with the focus locked is

not possible with Servo AF (=71, =185).

The continuous shooting speed is slow.

zThe continuous shooting speed for high-speed continuous shooting

may be lower, depending on conditions such as these: battery level,

temperature, icker reduction, shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,

brightness, AF operation, type of lens, use of ash, and shooting settings

(=208).

567

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.

zIf you shoot a subject that has ne detail such as a eld of grass, the le

size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower than the

number listed on =583.

Even after I change the card, the maximum burst displayed for

continuous shooting does not change.

zThe maximum burst displayed does not change when you switch cards,

even if you switch to a high-speed card. The maximum burst shown in

the table on =583 is based on Canon’s testing card. (The faster the

card’s writing speed, the higher the actual maximum burst will be.) For

this reason, the maximum burst displayed may di󰀨er from the actual

maximum burst.

High-speed display is not available during high-speed

continuous shooting.

zRefer to the high-speed display requirements on =181.

Some image quality options are not available with cropped

shooting.

z74/84/7a/8a image quality options are not available when [1.6x

(crop)] is set, or with EF-S lenses.

The aspect ratio cannot be set.

zWith EF-S lenses, [1.6x (crop)] is set automatically, and no other aspect

ratios are available.

568

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.

zCheck the [ISO speed range] setting under [z: zISO speed

settings].

zWhen [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] or [Enhanced],

the available ISO speed range is ISO 200–40000 for still photo shooting.

Even if you set [ISO speed range] under [z: ISO speed settings] to

expand the setting range, you cannot select L (equivalent to ISO 50), H1

(equivalent to ISO 51200), or H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). When [z:

Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable] (=137), you can set ISO

100/125/160, L, or H1/H2.

Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation, the image

comes out bright.

zSet [z: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable] (=136). When [Low],

[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure

compensation or ash exposure compensation, the image may come out

bright.

I cannot set the exposure compensation when both manual

exposure and ISO Auto are set.

zSee =103 to set the exposure compensation.

Not all the lens aberration correction options are displayed.

zAlthough [Chromatic aberr corr] and [Di󰀨raction correction] are

not displayed when [Digital Lens Optimizer] is set to [Enable], both

functions are applied in shooting, as when set to [Enable].

zDuring movie recording, [Digital Lens Optimizer] or [Di󰀨raction

correction] will not be displayed.

569

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

Using ash in <f> or <d> mode lowers the shutter speed.

zUnder [z: External Speedlite control], set [Slow synchro] to [1/180-

1/60sec. auto] or [1/180 sec. (xed)] (=224).

The ash does not re.

zMake sure the ash is securely attached to the camera.

The ash always res at full output.

zFlash units other than EL/EX series Speedlites used in autoash mode

always re at full output (=221).

zWhen the ash Custom Function setting for [Flash metering mode] is

set to [TTL] (autoash), the ash will always re at full output (=230).

Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.

zIf ash exposure compensation is already set with the Speedlite, ash

exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the

external Speedlite’s ash exposure compensation is canceled (set to 0),

ash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.

570

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

High-speed sync cannot be set in <f> or <d> mode.

zUnder [z: External Speedlite control], set [Slow synchro] to [1/180-

30sec. auto] or [1/180-1/60sec. auto] (=224).

Remote control shooting is not possible.

zWhen taking still photos, set the drive mode to <Q> or <k> (=209).

When recording movies, set [z: Remote control] to [Enable] (=285).

zCheck the position of the remote control’s release timing switch.

zIf you are using Wireless Remote Control BR-E1, see =217 or =399.

zTo use a remote control for time-lapse movie recording, see =273.

A white s or red E icon is displayed during shooting.

zIt indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. Image quality

of still photos may be worse when a white <s> icon is displayed. If

a red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that shooting will soon stop

automatically (=291).

During movie recording, the red E icon is displayed.

zIt indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the red <E>

icon is displayed, it indicates that the movie recording will soon stop

automatically (=291).

571

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

Movie recording stops by itself.

zIf the card’s writing speed is slow, movie recording may stop

automatically. For cards that can record movies, see =585. To nd out

the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s website, etc.

zIf you shoot a movie for 29 min. 59 sec., the movie recording will stop

automatically.

The ISO speed cannot be set for movie recording.

zIn shooting modes other than [M], the ISO speed is set automatically. In

[M] mode, you can manually set the ISO speed (=589).

ISO 100 cannot be set or ISO speed expansion cannot be

selected during movie recording.

zCheck the [ISO speed range] and [Range for H] setting under [z:

kISO speed settings].

zWhen [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the available ISO

speed range starts at ISO 200. Expanded ISO speed cannot be selected

even if you set an expanded range for [ISO speed range] or [Range

for H] under [z: kISO speed settings]. When [z: Highlight tone

priority] is set to [Disable] (=137), you can set ISO 100/125/160 or an

expanded ISO speed.

572

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

The exposure changes during movie recording.

zIf you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie recording, the

changes in the exposure may be recorded.

zShooting a few test movies is recommended if you intend to perform

zooming during movie recording. Zooming as you record movies may

cause exposure changes or lens sounds to be recorded, an uneven audio

level, or loss of focus.

The image ickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie

recording.

zFlickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be

caused by uorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources during

movie recording. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or color

tone may be recorded. In [M] mode, a slow shutter speed may reduce

the problem. The problem may be more noticeable in time-lapse movie

recording.

The subject looks distorted during movie recording.

zIf you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving

subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be more

noticeable in time-lapse movie recording.

I cannot take still photos during movie recording.

zStill photos cannot be taken during movie recording. Before taking still

photos, stop recording the movie, then select a shooting mode for still

photos.

573

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

Problems with Wireless Features

Cannot pair with a smartphone.

zUse a smartphone compliant with Bluetooth Specication Version 4.1 or

later.

zTurn on Bluetooth from the smartphone settings screen.

zPairing with the camera is not possible from the smartphone’s Bluetooth

settings screen. Install the dedicated app Camera Connect (free of

charge) on the smartphone (=420).

zA previously paired smartphone cannot be paired with the camera again

if the camera’s registration is retained on the smartphone. In this case,

remove the camera’s registration retained in the Bluetooth settings on the

smartphone and try pairing again (=432).

Wi-Fi function cannot be set.

zIf the camera is connected to a computer or another device with an

interface cable, Wi-Fi functions cannot be set. Disconnect the interface

cable before setting any functions (=418).

A device connected with an interface cable cannot be used.

zOther devices, such as computers, cannot be used with the camera by

connecting them with an interface cable while the camera is connected to

devices via Wi-Fi. Terminate the Wi-Fi connection before connecting the

interface cable.

Operations such as shooting and playback are not possible.

zWith a Wi-Fi connection established, operations such as shooting and

playback may not be possible.

Terminate the Wi-Fi connection, then perform the operation.

574

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

Cannot reconnect to a smartphone.

zEven with a combination of the same camera and smartphone, if you

have changed the settings or selected a di󰀨erent setting, reconnection

may not be established even after selecting the same SSID. In this case,

delete the camera connection settings from the Wi-Fi settings on the

smartphone and set up a connection again.

zA connection may not be established if Camera Connect is running when

you recongure connection settings. In this case, quit Camera Connect

for a moment and then restart it.

Operation Problems

I cannot change the setting with <6>, <5>, <d>, or <T>.

zUse the <R> switch to unlock the controls (=58).

zCheck the [5: Multi function lock] setting (=407).

Touch operation is not possible.

zMake sure [5: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive]

(=379).

A camera button or dial does not work as expected.

zFor movie recording, check the [5: Shutter btn function for movies]

setting (=395).

zCheck [8C.Fn III-5: Customize buttons] and [8C.Fn III-6: Customize

dials] settings (=537, =542).

575

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

Display Problems

The menu screen shows fewer tabs and items.

zIn Basic Zone modes, some tabs and items are not displayed. Tabs and

items on the menu screen also vary for still photos and movies.

The display starts with [9] My Menu, or the [9] tab alone is

displayed.

z[Menu display] on the [9] tab is set to [Display from My Menu tab] or

[Display only My Menu tab]. Set [Normal display] (=552).

The le name’s rst character is an underscore (“_”).

zSet [z: Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the rst

character will be an underscore (=147).

The le name starts with “MVI_”.

zIt is a movie le.

The le numbering does not start from 0001.

zIf the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not

start from 0001 (=363).

576

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

The shooting date and time displayed are incorrect.

zMake sure the correct date and time are set (=374).

zCheck the time zone and daylight saving time (=374).

The date and time are not in the image.

zThe shooting date and time do not appear in the image. The date and

time are recorded in the image data as shooting information. When

printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using the date

and time recorded in the shooting information (=318).

[###] is displayed.

zIf the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the

camera can display, [###] will be displayed.

The screen does not display a clear image.

zIf the screen is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.

zThe screen display may seem slightly slow in low temperatures or

may look black in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room

temperature.

577

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

Playback Problems

Part of the image blinks in black.

z[3: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (=351).

A red box is displayed on the image.

z[3: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (=352).

During image playback, the AF points are not displayed.

zThe AF points are not displayed when the following types of images are

played back:

Images captured in <8: F> or <8: G> mode.

Images taken with Multi Shot Noise Reduction applied.

Cropped images.

Images captured with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable] in HDR

shooting.

The image cannot be erased.

zIf the image is protected, it cannot be erased (=310).

Still photos and movies cannot be played back.

zThe camera may not be able to play back images taken with another

camera.

zMovies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.

Only few images can be played back.

zThe images have been ltered for playback with [3: Set image search

conditions] (=345). Clear the image search conditions.

578

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

Mechanical sound and operation sound can be heard during

movie playback.

zIf AF operations are performed or you control the camera or lens during

movie recording, the camera’s built-in microphone may also record

mechanical sounds of the lens or sounds of camera/lens operations.

In this case, using an external microphone may reduce these sounds.

If the sounds are still distracting with an external microphone, it may be

more e󰀨ective to remove the external microphone from the camera and

position it away from the camera and lens.

The movie appears to freeze momentarily.

zIf there is a drastic change in the exposure level during autoexposure

movie recording, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness

stabilizes. In this case, shoot in the [M] mode (=241).

No picture appears on the television.

zMake sure [5: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL]

correctly for the video system of your television (=378).

zMake sure the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (=308).

There are multiple movie les for a single movie recording.

zIf the movie le size reaches 4 GB, another movie le will be created

automatically (=254). However, if you use an SDXC card formatted

with the camera, you can record a movie in a single le even if it exceeds

4 GB.

579

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

My card reader does not recognize the card.

zDepending on the card reader used and the computer’s operating system,

SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In this case, connect your

camera to the computer with the interface cable, then import the images

to the computer using EOS Utility (EOS software).

The image cannot be resized.

zWith this camera, you cannot resize JPEG b and RAW images (=339).

The image cannot be cropped.

zWith this camera, you cannot crop RAW images (=337).

Dots of light appear on the image.

zWhite, red, or blue dots of light may appear in captured images or on the

shooting screen if the sensor is a󰀨ected by cosmic rays or similar factors.

Their appearance may be reduced by performing [Clean nowf] under

[5: Sensor cleaning] (=382).

580

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Troubleshooting

Sensor Cleaning Problems

The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning.

zUnder [5: Sensor cleaning], when you select [Clean nowf], the

shutter will make a mechanical sound during the cleaning, but no picture

will be recorded to the card (=382).

Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.

zIf you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> and <2> within a short

time period, the <f> icon may not be displayed (=46).

Computer Connection Problems

I cannot import images to a computer.

zInstall EOS Utility (EOS software) in the computer (=554).

zIf the camera is already connected via Wi-Fi, it cannot communicate with

any computer connected with an interface cable.

Communication between the connected camera and computer

does not work.

zWhen using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z: Time-lapse movie] to

[Disable] (=262).

581

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Error Codes

(2)

(1)

If there is a problem with the camera, an

error message will appear. Follow the on-

screen instructions. If the problem persists,

write down the error code (Errxx) and

contact a Customer Support Help Desk.

(1) Error number

(2) Cause and countermeasures

582

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Performance Data

Still Photo Shooting

zNumber of Possible Shots

Temperature Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F)

Low Temperature

(0°C / 32°F)

Possible shots Approx. 250 shots Approx. 240 shots

• Based on using the screen and a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17, and following

CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.

zISO Auto Range

Shooting Mode ISO Speed

No Flash With Flash

t/d/s/f/aISO 100–40000* ISO 100–1600*

FISO 400* ISO 400*

* The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum] set with

[Auto range].

• In Basic Zone modes, ISO speed is set automatically.

583

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Performance Data

zGuide to Image Quality Settings

(Approx.)

Image

Quality

Pixels

Recorded

File Size

(MB)

Possible

Shots

Maximum Burst

Standard High Speed

JPEG

73 26M 9.1 3320 Full Full

83 4.9 6060 Full Full

74 12M 5.1 5820 Full Full

84 2.9 10280 Full Full

7a6.5M 3.4 8750 Full Full

8a2.0 14620 Full Full

b3.8M 1.9 15760 Full Full

RAW

126M 29.1 1040 50 Full

F26M 17.1 1780 130 Full

RAW+JPEG

26M

26M 29.1+9.1 790 42 98

26M

26M 17.1+9.1 1160 66 170

• The number of possible shots is based on Canon’s testing standards and an 32 GB

card.

• Maximum burst measured under conditions and with an SD card conforming to Canon

testing standards (32 GB standard/UHS-II card, <o> High-speed continuous

shooting, Full-frame still photo cropping/aspect ratio, ISO 100, Standard Picture

Style).

• The le size, number of possible shots, and maximum burst will vary depending

on the subject, card brand, still photo cropping/aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture

Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.

• “Full” indicates that shooting is possible until the card becomes full with the listed

conditions.

oEven if you use a high-speed SD card, maximum burst indicator will not

change. The maximum burst in the table will apply instead.

584

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Performance Data

zPixel Count When Still Photo Cropping/Aspect Ratio is Set

(Approx. pixels)

Image Quality Full-frame (3:2) 1.6x (crop)

3/1/F6240×4160

(Approx. 26.0 megapixels)

3888×2592

(Approx. 10.1 megapixels)

a4160×2768*

(Approx. 11.5 megapixels) –

a3120×2080

(Approx. 6.5 megapixels) –

b2400×1600

(Approx. 3.8 megapixels)

2400×1600

(Approx. 3.8 megapixels)

Image Quality 1:1 (aspect ratio) 4:3 (aspect ratio) 16:9 (aspect ratio)

3/1/F4160×4160

(Approx. 17.3 megapixels)

5536×4160*

(Approx. 23.0 megapixels)

6240×3504*

(Approx. 21.9 megapixels)

a2768×2768

(Approx. 7.7 megapixels)

3680×2768*

(Approx. 10.2 megapixels)

4160×2336*

(Approx. 9.7 megapixels)

a2080×2080

(Approx. 4.3 megapixels)

2768×2080*

(Approx. 5.8 megapixels)

3120×1752*

(Approx. 5.5 megapixels)

b1600×1600

(Approx. 2.6 megapixels)

2112×1600*

(Approx. 3.4 megapixels)

2400×1344*

(Approx. 3.2 megapixels)

oThe actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*” will

di󰀨er from the aspect ratio indicated.

oFor details on JPEG le sizes, see the values for full-frame recording on

=583. Under equivalent shooting conditions, le sizes will be smaller than

when [z: zCropping/aspect ratio] is set to [Full-frame].

585

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Performance Data

Movie Recording

zCards that Can Record Movies

Movie Recording Size SD Card

H45 X UHS-I, UHS Speed Class 3 or higher

87 X SD Speed Class 10 or higher

654 X

SD Speed Class 4 or higher

HDR movie

65 V

w87

65 X

• When movie cropping and Movie digital IS are disabled.

• This table indicates the card’s writing and reading speeds required for recording

movies (card performance requirements). However, card performance requirements

for 4K/Full HD time-lapse movies apply to reading speed.

586

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Performance Data

zTotal Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute

(Approx.)

Movie Recording Size Total Possible Recording Time on Card File Size

8 GB 32 GB 128 GB

H45 X 8 min. 35 min. 2 hr. 20 min. 869 MB/min.

87 X 17 min. 1 hr. 09 min. 4 hr. 37 min. 440 MB/min.

4X33 min. 2 hr. 15 min. 9 hr. 01 min. 225 MB/min.

HDR movie

65 V 1 hr. 26 min. 5 hr. 47 min. 23 hr. 11 min. 87 MB/min.

w87 X 38 min. 2 hr. 34 min. 10 hr. 19 min. 196 MB/min.

65 X 1 hr. 13 min. 4 hr. 53 min. 19 hr. 34 min. 103 MB/min.

• When movie cropping and Movie digital IS are disabled.

oAn increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie recording

to stop before the total recording time shown in the table (=291).

zTotal Possible Time for Movie Recording

(Approx.)

Temperature Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F)

Low Temperature

(0°C / 32°F)

Possible recording time 1 hr. 40 min. 1 hr. 30 min.

• With a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17.

• With [z: Movie rec. size] set to L6X (NTSC)/L5X (PAL) and

[z: Movie Servo AF] set to [Enable].

587

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Performance Data

zTotal Possible Time for Time-lapse Movie Recording

(Approx.)

Time-lapse Movie Recording Room Temperature

(23°C / 73°F)

Low Temperature

(0°C / 32°F)

Interval Screen Auto O󰀨

2 sec. Disable Approx. 2 hr. 40 min. Approx. 2 hr. 30 min.

Enable Approx. 2 hr. 50 min. Approx. 2 hr. 40 min.

10 sec. Disable Approx. 2 hr. 20 min. Approx. 2 hr. 10 min.

Enable Approx. 4 hr. 40 min. Approx. 4 hr. 30 min.

• With a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E17.

• The possible movie recording time varies depending on the shooting conditions.

588

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Performance Data

ISO Speed in Movie Recording

In [k] Mode

zFor Full HD/HD movies, ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO

100–25600.

zFor 4K movies, ISO speed is automatically set in a range of ISO 100–

12800.

zUnder [z: kISO speed settings], setting [Max for Auto] or [H Max

for Auto] to [H2(102400)] (=286) expands the maximum limit of the

automatic ISO speed setting range to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). You

can lower the maximum value to narrow the automatic ISO speed setting

range.

zWith [z: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable] (=137), the

automatic ISO speed setting range is ISO 200–25600 for Full HD/HD

movies and ISO 200–12800 for 4K movies.

589

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Performance Data

In [M] Mode

zFor Full HD/HD movies with ISO speed set to [AUTO], ISO speed is

automatically set in a range of ISO 100–25600.

zFor 4K movies with ISO speed set to [AUTO], ISO speed is automatically

set in a range of ISO 100–12800.

zWhen setting ISO Auto, setting [Max for Auto] or [H Max for Auto]

under [z: kISO speed settings] to [H2(102400)] (=286) expands

the maximum limit of the automatic ISO speed setting range to H2

(equivalent to ISO 102400). You can lower the maximum value to narrow

the automatic ISO speed setting range.

zYou can set the ISO speed manually in a range of ISO 100–25600 for

Full HD/HD movies and ISO 100–12800 for 4K movies. Note that under

[z: kISO speed settings], setting [ISO speed range] or [Range for

H] to [H2(102400)] (=286) expands the maximum limit of the manual

ISO speed setting range to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400). Note that you

can also set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a range narrower than

the default range.

zIf [z: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (=137), the

automatic and manual ISO speed setting range’s minimum limit will be

ISO 200. Even when ISO speed expansion is set, the maximum limit will

not be expanded.

590

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Performance Data

Image Playback

zResize Options by Original Image Quality

Original Image

Quality

Available Resize Settings

4a b

3*kkk

4k k

* Only b is available for images shot with [z: zCropping/aspect ratio] set to [1.6x

(crop)].

zSize for Resized Images

(Approx. pixels)

Image

Quality Full-frame (3:2) 1.6x (crop)

44160×2768*

(Approx. 11.5 megapixels) –

a3120×2080

(Approx. 6.5 megapixels) –

b2400×1600

(Approx. 3.8 megapixels)

2400×1600

(Approx. 3.8 megapixels)

Image

Quality 1:1 (aspect ratio) 4:3 (aspect ratio) 16:9 (aspect ratio)

42768×2768

(Approx. 7.7 megapixels)

3680×2768*

(Approx. 10.2 megapixels)

4160×2336*

(Approx. 9.7 megapixels)

a2080×2080

(Approx. 4.3 megapixels)

2768×2080*

(Approx. 5.8 megapixels)

3120×1752*

(Approx. 5.5 megapixels)

b1600×1600

(Approx. 2.6 megapixels)

2112×1600*

(Approx. 3.4 megapixels)

2400×1344*

(Approx. 3.2 megapixels)

oThe actual aspect ratio of images in the sizes marked with an asterisk “*” will

di󰀨er from the aspect ratio indicated.

oThe image may be cropped slightly depending on the resizing conditions.

591

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Information Display

Still Photo Shooting Screen

Each time you press the button, the information display will change.

zViewnder display positions vary for some items.

zThe display will show only the settings currently applied.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(19)

(20)

(21)

(22)

(23)

(24)

(1) Movie recording time available

(2) Maximum burst

(3) Possible shots/Sec. until self-

timer shoots

(4) Focus bracketing/HDR/Multiple

exposures/Multi Shot Noise

Reduction/Bulb timer/Interval

timer

(5) Shooting mode/Scene icon

(6) AF method

(7) AF operation

(8) Drive mode

(9) Metering mode

(10) Image quality

(11) Movie recording size

(12) AF point (1-point AF)

(13) Battery level

(14) No. of shots left for focus

bracketing/multiple exposures/

interval timer

(15) Temperature warning

(16) Electronic level

(17) Histogram

(18) Quick Control button

(19) Anti-icker shooting

(20) White balance/White balance

correction

(21) Picture Style

(22) Auto Lighting Optimizer

(23) Still photo cropping/aspect ratio

(24) Create folder

592

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Information Display

(26)

(25)

(27)

(28)

(29)

(30)

(31)

(32)

(33)

(34)

(35)

(36)

(37)

(38)

(39)

(40)

(41)

(42)

(25) Flash ready/FE Lock/High-speed

sync

(26) Wi-Fi signal strength

(27) Wi-Fi function

(28) Touch Shutter

(29) AE lock

(30) Shutter speed/Multi-function lock

warning

(31) Bluetooth function

(32) Aperture

(33) Flash exposure compensation

(34) Exposure level indicator

(35) Focus distance display

(36) Magnify button

(37) ISO speed

(38) Highlight tone priority

(39) Exposure simulation

(40) Exposure compensation

(41) AEB/FEB

(42) GPS acquisition status

oYou can set what is displayed for when you press the button (=388).

oThe electronic level is not displayed when the AF method is set to

[u+Tracking] or the camera is connected via HDMI to a television.

oOther icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.

593

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Information Display

Movie Recording Screen

Each time you press the button, the information display will change.

zViewnder display positions vary for some items.

zThe display will show only the settings currently applied.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(20)

(19)

(1) Electronic level

(2) Battery level

(3) Movie recording time available/

Elapsed recording time

(4) Movie recording mode/Time-lapse

movie/Scene icon

(5) AF method

(6) Movie recording size

(7) Sound-recording level (manual)

(8) Headphone volume

(9) Movie digital IS

(10) Movie Servo AF

(11) Temperature warning

(12) AF point (1-point AF)

(13) Histogram (for manual exposure)

(14) Movie recording in progress

(15) White balance/White balance

correction

(16) Picture Style

(17) Auto Lighting Optimizer

(18) Video snapshot

(19) GPS acquisition status

(20) Magnify button

594

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Information Display

(21)

(22)

(23)

(24)

(25)

(26)

(27)

(28)

(29)

(30)

(31)

(32)

(33)

(21) Sound-recording level indicator

(manual)

(22) Wi-Fi function

(23) AE lock

(24) Shutter speed

(25) Aperture

(26) Wi-Fi signal strength

(27) Bluetooth function

(28) Exposure level indicator

(29) GPS acquisition status

(30) ISO speed

(31) Highlight tone priority

(32) Exposure compensation

(33) Focus distance display

oYou can set what is displayed for when you press the button (=388).

oThe electronic level is not displayed when the AF method is set to

[u+Tracking] or the camera is connected via HDMI to a television.

oThe electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during movie

recording. (The display will disappear when you start recording a movie.)

oWhen movie recording starts, the movie recording remaining time will change

to the elapsed time.

oOther icons may be displayed temporarily after setting adjustments.

595

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Information Display

Scene Icons

In the <A> shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and sets

everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is

indicated on the upper left of the screen.

Subject

Background

Portrait Non-Portrait

Background

Color

In Motion*1

Nature and

Outdoor

Scene

Motion*1

Bright

Gray

Backlit

Blue Sky

Included Light blue

Backlit

Sunset *3*3Orange

Spotlight

Dark blue

Dark

With

Tripod*1*4*5*3*4*5*3

*1: Not displayed during movie recording.

*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an extension

tube or close-up lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.

*3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed.

oFor certain scenes or shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match

the actual scene.

596

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Information Display

*4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply:

The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a

tripod.

*5: Displayed with any of the lenses below:

• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM • EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM

• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM • EF600mm f/4L IS II USM

• Image Stabilizer lenses released in and after 2012.

*4+*5: If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.

597

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Information Display

Playback Screen

zBasic information display for still photos

(1) (8)

(14)

(13)

(12)

(11)

(10)

(9)

(15)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(2)

(1) Wi-Fi function

(2) Wi-Fi signal strength

(3) Battery level

(4) Playback No./Total images/

Number of found images

(5) Shutter speed

(6) Aperture

(7) Exposure compensation amount

(8) Bluetooth function

(9) Already sent to a computer/

smartphone

(10) Rating

(11) Image protection

(12) Folder number-File number

(13) Image quality/Edited image/

Cropping

(14) Highlight tone priority

(15) ISO speed

oIf the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information may

not be displayed.

oIt may not be possible to play back images taken with this camera on other

cameras.

598

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Information Display

zDetailed information display for still photos

(1) (8)

(13)

(12)

(11)

(10)

(9)

(15)

(14)

(16)

(17)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(2)

(1) Aperture

(2) Shutter speed

(3) Shooting mode/Multiple exposure

(4) White balance

(5) Auto Lighting Optimizer

(6) White balance correction

(7) Picture Style/Settings

(8) Exposure compensation amount

(9) Shooting date and time

(10) Histogram (Brightness/RGB)

(11) ISO speed

(12) Highlight tone priority

(13) Scroll bar

(14) Flash exposure compensation/

Bounce/HDR shooting/Multi Shot

Noise Reduction

(15) Metering mode

(16) File size

(17) Image quality/Edited image/

Cropping

* W

hen you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image le size will be displayed.

* Lines indicating the image area will be displayed for images taken with the aspect

ratio set (=119) and with RAW or RAW+JPEG set for image quality.

* D

uring ash photography without ash exposure compensation, <

> will be displayed.

* < > will be displayed for images shot with bounce ash photography.

* An icon for the e󰀨ect (=172) and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be

displayed for images shot with HDR shooting.

* will be displayed for images shot with multiple-exposure shooting.

* <M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.

* will be displayed for images created and saved after performing RAW image

processing, resizing, cropping, or Creative Assist.

* <N> will be displayed for images cropped and then saved.

599

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Information Display

zDetailed information display for movies

(1)

(2)

(7)

(8)

(6)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1) Movie playback

(2) Movie recording mode/Time-lapse

movie/Video snapshot

(3) Image size

(4) Frame rate

(5) Compression method

(6) Movie digital IS

(7) Recording time

(8) Movie recording format

* <G> will be displayed for still photos taken as test shots for time-lapse movies.

oDuring movie playback, “*, *” will be displayed for [Fineness] and [Threshold]

of [Picture Style]’s [Sharpness].

600

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Trademarks

oAdobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

oMicrosoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

oMacintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and

other countries.

oSDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

oHDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or

registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

oThe Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo and the Wi-Fi Protected Setup mark are trademarks

of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

oWPS used on camera settings screens and in this manual stands for Wi-Fi

Protected Setup.

oThe Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

oAll other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

About MPEG-4 Licensing

“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and

may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4

compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial

purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide

MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use

for MPEG-4 standard.”

601

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO

LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES

IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE

VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (''AVC VIDEO'') AND/

OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER

ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A

VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS

GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.

SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

* Notice displayed in English as required.

Third party software

This product includes third party software.

● AES-128 Library

reserved.

LICENSE TERMS

The redistribution and use of this software (with or without changes) is allowed

without the payment of fees or royalties provided that:

1. source code distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions

and the following disclaimer;

2. binary distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and

the following disclaimer in their documentation;

3. the name of the copyright holder is not used to endorse products built using this

software without specic written permission.

DISCLAIMER

This software is provided 'as is' with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its

properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and/or tness for purpose.

602

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended

This product is designed to achieve optimum performance when used with

genuine Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine

accessories is highly recommended.

Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents

such as malfunction, re, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon

accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery). Please note that

repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine accessories will not be

covered by the warranty for repairs, although you may request such repairs

on a chargeable basis.

oBattery Pack LP-E17 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an

incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or accidents

for which Canon cannot be held liable.

603

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and

Liechtenstein)

These symbols indicate that this product is not to be

disposed of with your household waste, according to

the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive

(2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing

those Directives.

If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol

shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that

a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this

battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold

specied in the Battery Directive.

This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g.,

on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or

to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic

equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this

type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human

health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated

with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will

contribute to the e󰀨ective usage of natural resources.

For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact

your local city o󰀩ce, waste authority, approved scheme or your household

waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee,

or www.canon-europe.com/battery.

604

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

CAUTION

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.

605

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Numbers

1-point AF : 188, 193

[4K] 3840×2160 (Movie) : 249

4K frame capture : 306

Acceleration/deceleration tracking : 531

Access lamp : 43

Accessories : 3

Adobe RGB : 147

AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing) : 129

AE lock : 213

AF-assist beam : 187, 201

AF method : 188

AF operation : 185, 196

AF point selection : 193

AF speed : 283

Area AF frame : 80, 81, 192

Beep (Beeper) : 380

Continuous AF : 199

Eye detection AF : 198

Lens drive when AF impossible : 533

Lens electronic MF : 200

Limit AF methods : 533

Manual focusing : 214

Orientation linked AF point : 534

Recomposing : 71

Touch & drag AF : 183

AF point auto switching : 532

AF point expansion : 189, 193

AF start button : 55

Album (video snapshot) : 274, 334

ALL-I : 265

Ambience priority (AWB) : 142

Anti-icker shooting : 179

Aperture-priority AE : 100

Area AF frame : 80, 81, 192

<A+> (Scene Intelligent Auto) : 68

Aspect ratio → Still photo cropping/

aspect ratio

Attenuator : 258

Autofocus → AF

Auto Lighting Optimizer : 136

Auto power o󰀨 : 372

Auto reset : 365

Auto rotate : 366

Av (Aperture-priority AE) : 100

Background music : 336

Basic information display : 597

Basic Zone : 34

Battery → Power

B (Bulb) : 106

Beep (Beeper) : 380

Bluetooth function : 399, 418

Address : 429

Connecting : 421

Bracketing

AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing) : 129

FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing) :

229

Focus bracketing : 202

White balance bracketing : 146

Bulb exposures : 106

Index

606

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index

Bulb timer : 107

BUSY : 118

<C1>/<C2>/<C3> (Custom shooting) :

408

Camera

Camera vibration blur : 107, 210

Default settings : 410

Holding the camera : 53

Camera shake : 54, 70

Card requirements : 253, 585

Cards : 10, 30, 42

Card reminder : 182

Formatting : 367

Low-level formatting : 367

Troubleshooting : 44, 565

Write protection : 42

Center-weighted average metering : 211

Certication logo : 413

Charger : 37, 40

Charging : 40, 558

Chromatic aberration correction : 126,

330

Cleaning (image sensor) : 382

Clipped highlights : 351

Close-up : 84

Color space : 147, 329

Color temperature : 144

Color tone : 153

Combination IS : 261

Continuous (le numbering) : 364

Continuous shooting : 206

Contrast : 136, 153

Control ring : 58

Creative Assist : 73, 331

Creative Zone : 35

Cropping (images) : 337

Custom Functions : 523

Customize buttons : 538

Custom shooting mode : 408

Custom white balance : 143

Date/time : 374

Daylight saving time : 375

Default settings : 410

Custom Functions : 546

Customizing operations : 546

Custom shooting mode : 408

Flash function settings : 230

My Menu : 551

Depth-of-eld preview : 101

Di󰀨raction correction : 126, 330

Digital Lens Optimizer : 125, 329

Digital terminal : 32, 556

Dioptric adjustment : 52

Display o󰀨 : 372

Display settings : 394

Distortion correction : 124, 329

Double-tap : 298

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) : 318

Dragging : 64

Drive mode : 206

Dust Delete Data : 161

607

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index

Eco mode : 371

Electronic level : 388

Erasing (images) : 314

Err (error codes) : 581

Evaluative metering : 211

exFAT : 254, 368

Expanded ISO speed : 131, 133, 286,

588

Exposure compensation : 129

Exposure compensation in M mode with

ISO Auto : 103

Exposure level increments : 526

Exposure level indicator : 102, 592

Exposure simulation : 139

Extension grip : 560

External microphone : 258

External Speedlite → Flash

Face+Tracking : 188, 191

FAT32 : 254, 368

Feature guide : 370

FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing) : 229

FE lock : 220

File extension : 116, 252

File size : 254, 583, 586

Filter e󰀨ect (Monochrome) : 154

Fine (Image quality) : 116

Firmware : 413

First-curtain synchronization : 228

Flash exposure compensation : 220, 229

Flash mode : 226

Flash (Speedlite) : 220

Custom Functions : 230

FEB (Flash Exposure Bracketing) :

229

FE lock : 220

Flash control (function settings) : 222

Flash exposure compensation : 220,

229

Flash sync speed : 221

Manual ash : 226

Safety FE : 225

Shutter synchronization (1st/2nd

curtain) : 228

Slow synchro : 224

Wireless : 227

Flash sync contacts : 31

Flexible-priority AE : 104

Focus bracketing : 202

Focusing → AF

Focus lock : 71

Focus mode switch : 48, 51

Folder creation/selection : 361

Food : 85

Formatting (card initialization) : 367

Frame Grab : 306

Frame rate : 252, 378

Full High-Denition (Full HD) (movie) :

249

Fv (Flexible-priority AE) : 104

GPS : 402

Grid display : 353, 390

608

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index

Group Photo : 78

H1/H2 (Expanded ISO speed) : 133

Handheld night scene : 87

[HD] 1280×720 (Movie) : 249

HDMI : 290, 308, 386

HDMI HDR : 387

HDMI output : 290

HDR Backlight Control : 88

HDR movie recording : 247

HDR shooting : 171

Headphones : 258

Help : 396

Text size : 397

High dynamic range → HDR

High ISO speed noise reduction : 157

Highlight alert : 351

Highlight tone priority : 137

High-speed continuous shooting : 206

High-speed display : 181

Histogram : 349, 391

Hot shoe : 31

ICC prole : 147

Icons : 8

Image browsing (jump display) : 347

Image quality : 116, 583

Image review time : 122

Images

AF point display : 352

Auto reset : 365

Auto rotation : 366

Continuous (le numbering) : 364

Erasing : 314

File numbering : 363

Highlight alert : 351

Histogram : 349

Importing (to computer) : 556

Index display : 300

Jump display (image browsing) : 347

Magnifying images : 299

Manual reset : 365

Manual rotation : 313

Playback : 293

Protecting images : 310

Rating : 340

Search conditions : 345

Shooting information : 297, 598

Image search : 345

Importing images to a computer : 556

Index display : 300

INFO button : 59

Initial magnication ratio/position : 355

Interval timer : 176

IPB : 252

ISO speed : 131, 286

Auto range (Still photos) : 134

ISO Auto range : 134, 582

ISO speed range : 133, 286

Minimum shutter speed for ISO Auto

(Still photos) : 135

JPEG : 116, 583

Jump display : 347

609

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index

Kids : 81

Landscape : 79

Language : 377

Large (image quality) : 116

Lens : 48, 50

Chromatic aberration correction : 126,

330

Di󰀨raction correction : 126, 330

Digital Lens Optimizer : 125, 329

Distortion correction : 124, 329

Focus mode switch : 48, 51

Lock release : 49, 51

Optical aberration correction : 123,

329

Peripheral illumination correction :

124, 329

Lens electronic MF : 200

Location information : 402

LOCK : 58, 407

Long (bulb) exposures : 106

Long Exposure Noise Reduction : 159

Low-speed continuous shooting : 207

Magnifying images : 195, 214, 299

Main dial : 56

Malfunction : 562

Manual exposure : 102

Manual focus : 214

Manual focusing : 214

Manual reset : 365

Maximum burst : 118, 583

Medium (image quality) : 116

Memory cards → Cards

Menu : 60

Custom Functions : 524

Dimmed menu items : 63

Function settings : 358

Movie shooting : 236

My Menu : 548

Playback : 294

Setting procedure : 61

Still photo shooting : 111

Metering mode : 211

Metering timer : 138

MF (Manual focusing) : 214

M-Fn button : 55

MF peaking : 216

Microphone : 258

M (Manual exposure) : 102

Mode dial : 34

Mode guide : 369

Monochrome : 150

Movies : 235

AE lock : 240

AF speed during Movie Servo AF :

283

Attenuator : 258

Autoexposure shooting : 239

Auto slow shutter : 288

Av 1/8-stop increments : 289

Cards that can record movies : 585

Compression method : 252

Cropped shooting : 256

610

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index

Editing : 304

Editing out rst and last scenes : 304

External microphone : 258

File size : 254, 586

Frame Grab : 306

Frame rate : 252

HDMI output : 290, 386

HDR movie recording : 247

Headphones : 258

Information display : 593

Manual exposure shooting : 241

Microphone : 258

Movie digital IS : 260

Movie recording size : 249

Movie Servo AF : 280, 282, 283

Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity :

282

Movie shooting button : 31

Playback : 301

Recording time : 255, 586

Shooting area : 251

Sound recording/Sound-recording

level : 257

Time-lapse movie : 262

Video snapshots : 274

Wind lter : 257

MP4 : 252

Multi function : 55

Multi-function lock : 58, 407

Multiple exposure : 165

Multi Shot Noise Reduction : 157

My Menu : 548

Night Portrait : 86

Noise reduction

High ISO speed : 157

Long exposures : 159

Non-Canon ash units : 221

Normal (Image quality) : 116

NTSC : 252, 378

One-Shot AF : 186

Orientation linked AF point : 534

PAL : 252, 378

Panning : 82

Partial metering : 211

Part names : 31

Peripheral illumination correction : 124,

329

Photobook set-up : 322

Picture Style : 148, 152, 155

Pixel count : 116, 583

Playback : 293

Portrait : 77

Positioning hole : 33

Possible recording time (movie) : 586

Possible shots : 582

Power : 46

Auto power o󰀨 : 372

Battery information : 381

Battery level : 47

Charging : 40, 558

Possible shots : 582

611

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index

Power saving : 372

P (Program AE) : 96

Pressing completely : 54, 395

Pressing halfway : 54, 395

Printing

Photobook set-up : 322

Print order (DPOF) : 318

Program AE : 96

Program shift : 97

Protecting images : 310

[Q] (Quick Control) : 65

Quick Control : 65

Quick control dial : 57

Rating : 340

Rating mark : 340

RAW : 116, 117

RAW image processing : 325

RAW+JPEG : 116, 583

Reduced display : 300

Release shutter without card : 182

Remote control : 217

Remote control terminal : 32, 219

Remote switch : 219

Resizing : 339

Rotating (images) : 313, 366

Safety instructions : 25

Safety shift : 529

Saturation : 153

Scene icons : 72, 595

Scene Intelligent Auto : 68

<SCN> (Special scene) : 34, 75

Screen : 30, 45

Angle adjustment : 45

Brightness : 373

SD/SDHC/SDXC cards → Cards

Second-curtain synchronization : 228

Self-timer : 209

Sensitivity → ISO speed

Sensor cleaning : 382

Serial number : 33

Servo AF

Initial AF Point : 535

Movie Servo AF : 280, 282, 283

SERVO : 186

SERVO (Servo AF) : 186

Sharpness : 153

Shooting information display : 388, 591

Shooting mode

<A+> (Scene Intelligent Auto) : 68

Av (Aperture-priority AE) : 100

B (Bulb) : 106

<C1>/<C2>/<C3> (Custom shooting) :

408

Fv (Flexible-priority AE) : 104

M (Manual exposure) : 102

P (Program AE) : 96

SCN (Special scene mode) : 75

Tv (Shutter-priority AE) : 98

Shooting range : 391

Shutter button : 54

Shutter button functions : 395

612

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index

Shutter-priority AE : 98

Shutter synchronization : 228

Silent mode : 89

Single-image display : 296

Single shooting : 206

Slide show : 343

Small (image quality) : 116

Software : 554

Instruction Manual : 555

Sound recording/Sound-recording level :

257

Speaker : 33

Special scene mode (SCN) : 75

Sports : 80

Spot AF : 188, 193

Spot metering : 211

sRGB : 147

Still photo cropping/aspect ratio : 119,

584

Strap : 38

Temperature warning : 232, 291

Tilt correction : 338

Time-lapse movie : 262

Time zone : 374

Tone priority : 137

Toning e󰀨ect (Monochrome) : 154

Touch beeping : 380

Touch operation : 64, 298, 379

Touch Shutter : 163

Tracking sensitivity : 530

Tripod socket : 33

Troubleshooting : 562

TV display : 308

Tv (Shutter-priority AE) : 98

UHS-II/UHS-I : 10

USB (digital) terminal : 32, 556

UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) : 406

Video snapshots : 274

Video system : 378

Viewnder

Dioptric adjustment : 52

Display format : 393

Grid display : 390

Information display : 389

Vertical display : 390

Viewnder o󰀨 : 372

Volume (movie playback) : 302, 303

White balance : 140

Auto : 142

Bracketing : 146

Color temperature setting : 144

Correction : 145

Custom : 143

White priority (AWB) : 142

Wi-Fi function : 415

Android : 420

Camera access point mode : 492

Camera Connect : 420, 437

CANON iMAGE GATEWAY : 473

613

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Chapters Contents

Index to Features Index

Index

Clearing wireless communication

settings : 498

Connection history : 493, 516

Edit device information : 450, 496

EOS Utility : 453

Erase connection information : 497

Image Transfer Utility 2 : 458

iOS : 420

IP address : 518

MAC address : 499

Network : 434, 454, 462

Network settings : 514

Nickname : 497

Notes : 511

Pairing : 422

Password : 516

PictBridge : 463

Printer : 461

Printing : 464

Print order : 467

Reconnecting : 493

Remote operation : 437

Resize image : 440, 445, 481

Sending all images on the card : 446,

483

Sending images that match search

conditions : 447, 485

Send selected : 443, 480

SSID : 434, 454, 462

Switch network : 489

Viewable images : 450

View info screen : 499

Viewing images : 437

Virtual keyboard : 517

Wi-Fi settings : 516

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) : 488

Wind lter : 257

Wireless communication settings : 398,

415

Zone AF : 189, 193

CANON INC.

30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

Europe, Africa & Middle East

CANON EUROPA N.V.

Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands

For your local Canon ofﬁce, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support

The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.

The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of October 2019.

For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,

contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,

refer to the Canon website.

Table of Contents

Canon RP + RF 24-105mm F4-7.1 IS STM User Manual

Related Manuals